1

2
 INDEX
Sr. Chapter Page No.
No.
1. Electric Charges and Field 4-16
2. Electric potential and capacitance 17-33
3. Current electricity 34-46
4. Magnetic effect of current 47-67
5. Magnetism 68-74
6. Electromagnetic induction 75-87
7. Alternating current 88-99
8. Electromagnetic waves 100-105
9. Ray optics and optical instruments 106-124
10. Wave optics 125-137
11. Dual nature of radiation and matter 138-148
12. Atoms & Nuclei 149-158
13.. Semiconductor devices 159-169
14. Sample papers and marking schemes 170-229

3
 Unit I: Electrostatics
Chapter–1: Electric Charges and Fields
Electric charge: Electric charge is the result of excess or insufficiency of electrons (negatively
charged particles) as compared to protons (positively charged particles).

There are two types of electric charge:

Positive and negative (commonly carried by protons and electrons respectively).

Methods of Charging with Examples

Charging means gaining or losing electron. Matters can be charged with three ways,
1.Charging by friction: When you rub one material to another, they are charged by friction. Material
losing electron is positively charged and material gaining electron is negatively charged

2. Charging by contact: If a charged body comes with the contact of an uncharged body, then the
uncharged body also becomes charged and there is a redistribution of charge on both the bodies.

3. Charging by induction: We can also charge

conductors without contact.
A and B conductors are neutral at the
beginning. When we put a positively charged
plate near them, it attracts the electrons in
the conductors. Electrons move to the left
part and protons stays. Thus, when we
separate plates A and B they are charged by
induction, A is negatively charged and B is
positively charged.

Properties of Charges:
1. There exists only two types of charges, namely positive and negative.
2. Like charges repel and unlike charges attract each other.
3. Charge is a scalar quantity.
4. Charge is additive in nature Q =Q1+Q2+Q3… eg. +2 C + 5 C – 3 C = +4 C
5. Charge is quantized: Electric charge exists in discrete packets rather than in continuous amount.
It can be expressed in integral multiples fundamental electronic charge (e = 1.6 x 10-19 C)
q = ± ne where n = 1, 2, 3, …………
6. Charge is conserved: The algebraic sum of positive and negative charges in an isolated system
remains constant.

7. It does not change with velocity also.

4
 Coulomb’s Law (Force between Coulomb’s Law (Force between
two charges): two charges) in a dielectric
The electrostatic force between two-point medium:
charges in vacuum is The ratio of permittivity of a medium to the
𝑞1 𝑞2
𝐹=𝑘 permittivity of free space is known as
𝑟2
dielectric constant or relative permittivity
1 of the medium and is denoted by K or ɛr
where 𝑘 = . Here, ε0 is the epsilon 𝐹 ε
4𝜋ɛ0 = =K, Hence
naught and it signifies permittivity of a 𝐹𝑚 ε0
vacuum. 𝐹
𝐹𝑚 =
The value of K comes 9 × 109 Nm2/ C2 𝐾
when we take the S.I unit of value of ε0 is The force becomes 1/K times in a dielectric
8.854 × 10-12 C2 N-1 m-2. medium.

Force between multiple charges:

According to principle of superposition, the
total force on any charge due to a number of
charges at rest is the vector sum of all the
forces on that charge due to other charges
taken one at a time.

Electric field strength Or intensity of electric field E:

Electric field strength at a point is the amount of force experienced by a unit positive test charge
placed at that particular point.

⃗
𝑭
⃗𝑬
⃗ =𝐥𝐢𝐦 𝒒
𝒒→𝟎

Lim q=o signify that the electric field of test charge should not modify the given electric field.
⃗⃗ is a vector quantity and its unit is newton/coulomb or N/C.
Electric field 𝑬
5
Electric field strength for a point charge at r distance:

We will place a test charge q at r distance and

calculate electrostatic force on q which is
𝐾𝑄𝑞
𝐹= 𝑟̂
𝑟2
And we know
⃗
⃗⃗ =𝐥𝐢𝐦 𝑭
𝑬
𝒒→𝟎 𝒒
Using the value of force in above equation
Electric field in vector form

⃗ =𝐾𝑄2 𝑟̂
⃗𝑬
𝑟
And its magnitude
𝐾𝑄
E=
𝑟2

Electric field for a system of charges:

For a system of charges principle of superposition is used.
We will calculate electric field for each charge at a given point and then vector addition rules will be
used.
For a system of n charges

𝐸⃗ =𝐸
⃗⃗⃗⃗1 + ⃗⃗⃗⃗ ⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗3 +𝐸
𝐸2 + 𝐸 ⃗⃗⃗⃗4 ………+𝐸
⃗⃗⃗⃗𝑛
Electric field lines: Electric field lines are the imaginary lines of force along which a positive test
charge tends to move when free to do so.
It shows the direction of an electric field when we draw a tangent at its point.
Properties of Electric Field Lines:
1. Electric field lines start from a positive charge and end at a negative charge, in case of a single
charge, electric field lines end at infinity.
2. In a charge-free region, electric field lines are continuous and smooth.
3. Two electric field lines never intersect or cross each other, as if they do, there will be two vectors
depicting two directions of the same electric field, which is not possible.
4. These lines never form a closed loop. This is because an electric field is conservative in nature and
hence the lines don’t form a closed loop.
5. Electric lines of force are perpendicular to the surface of a positively or negatively charged body.
6. Electric lines of force do not pass through a conductor. Hence, the interior of the conductor is free
from the influence of the electric field.

6
 Electric field lines for various cases:
(a) For a point charge (b) For two equal positive charges
q1q2 > 0

(C) For two equal negative charges : (d) For an electric dipole (two equal and
q1q2 > 0 opposite charges): q1q2 < 0

Electric dipole: Electric dipole is a system of two equal and opposite charges separated by some
distance.

Electric dipole moment: Electric dipole moment of an electric dipole is the product of one of two
charges and separation between them.
It is a vector quantity and its direction along negative charge to positive charge.
It is denoted by 𝑝 and its unit is Coulomb-metre.(C-m)
⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝑝 = q (2𝑎)

7
Electric field due to an electric dipole
(a) At its axial point:
Consider a system of charges (-q and +q) separated by a distance 2a. Let ‘P’ be any point
on an axis where the field intensity is to be determined.
Electric field at P (EB) due to +q

Electric field at p due to +q charge is

1 𝑞
𝐸𝐵 =
4𝜋ɛ0 (𝑟−𝑎)2
Electric field at p due to -q charge is
1 𝑞
𝐸𝐴 =
4𝜋ɛ0 (𝑟+𝑎)2
Net field at p is
Ep=𝐸𝐵 − 𝐸𝐴
𝑞 1 1
𝐸𝑝 = [(𝑟−𝑎)2 − (𝑟+𝑎)2 ]
4𝜋ɛ0
Simplifying
𝑞 4𝑎𝑟
𝐸𝑝 =
4𝜋ɛ0 (𝑟 2 − 𝑎2 )2
1
2aq=p and 𝑘 =
4𝜋ɛ0
2𝑘𝑝𝑟
𝐸𝑝 = (𝑟 2 2)2 if 2a<<r
−𝑎
2𝑘𝑝
𝐸𝑝 = 3
𝑟

(b) For points on the equatorial plane:

An equatorial plane of a dipole is the plane perpendicular to the axial line and passing through a point
mid-way between the charges.
Electric field at p due to +q charge is
1 𝑞
𝐸𝐵 =
4𝜋ɛ0 𝑟 2 +𝑎2
Electric field at p due to -q charge is
1 𝑞
𝐸𝐴 =
4𝜋ɛ0 𝑟 2 +𝑎2
Net field at p is
E = 2EA cosθ
2 𝑞 𝑎
𝐸= 2 2 1
4𝜋ɛ0 (𝑟 + 𝑎 ) (𝑟 2
+ 𝑎 2 )2
Simplifying
1
2aq=p and 𝑘 =
4𝜋ɛ0
𝑘𝑝
𝐸= 3
(𝑟 2 + 𝑎2 )2
𝑘𝑝
if 2a<<r 𝐸=
𝑟3

Electricity intensity at an axial point is twice the electric intensity on the equatorial line.
8
Torque on an electric dipole uniform electric field:
If a dipole is kept in an external electric field, it experiences a rotating effect. The rotating effect is also
called torque on the dipole.
Net force on the dipole
= qE - qE=0
Net force is zero so there is no translatory
motion.
Magnitude of torque = q E × 2a sin θ
τ= 2 q a E sin θ
τ= p E sin θ (Since p = 2 q
a)
The vector form of torque is the cross product
of dipole moment and electric field.

Special case

(a) Maximum torque

For θ=900
τ= p E sin900
τmax= p E
(b) Minimum torque

For θ=00 and 1800

τmin=0
But θ=00 is stable equilibrium and θ=1800 is
unstable equilibrium.

9
Electric flux:
The total number of electric field lines passing through a given area normally is called electric flux.
Electric flux is denoted by ϕE it is a scaler quantity.
Its unit is newton(metre)2 /coulomb or Nm2/c or volt-metre V-m
Electric flux is the scalar product of electric field vector and area vector.
ϕE = 𝐸⃗ .𝐴

Gauss theorem:
1
The total electric flux through a closed surface is equal to ε times the total charge enclosed by the
0
surface.
∑𝑞
ϕE =
ε0
∑𝑞
ϕE = ∫ 𝐸⃗ .d𝑠 = ε
0
Applications of Gauss theorem:
(1) Electric field due to infinitely long, thin and uniformly charged straight wire:
If is the line charge density is λ, then charge inside the Gaussian surface of the wire is =λl

10
(2)Electric field for infinite charged plane sheet:

Electric field for uniformly charged spherical shell:

If Surface charge density is σ then, charge on the

spherical shell

q =(4𝜋𝑅 2 ) σ
Using this value in electric field formula

1 (4𝜋𝑅 2 ) σ
E= 4𝜋ℰ
0 𝑟2

σ𝑅 2
E= ℰ 2
0𝑟

11
 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS
1. The ratio of the forces between two small spheres with constant charge in air and in a
medium of dielectric constant K is
(a) 1: K (b) K : 1
(c) 1: K2 (d) K2: 1
2. Two charges of equal magnitudes and at a distance r exert a force F on each other. If the
charges are doubled and distance between them is halved, then the new force acting on each
charge is
(a) F / 8 (b) F / 4
(c) 16 F (d) F / 16
3. An electron and a proton are separated by a distance of 1Å. The coulomb force between them
is
(a) 2 .3  10 −8 N (b) 4 .6  10 −8 N
−8
(c) 1 . 5  10 N (d) None of these
4. If E1 be the electric field strength of a short dipole at a point on its axial line and E2 that on the
equatorial line at the same distance, then
(a) E2=2E1 (b) E1=2E2
(c) E 1 = E2 (d) None of the above

5. The angle between electric dipole P and uniform electric field E the value of torque will be
maximum if angle between them
(a) 900 (b) 00
(c) 1800 (d) 450

12
 6. Electric field at a point independent on distance r for
(a) An electric dipole (b) A point charge
(c) A plane infinite sheet of charge (d) A line charge of infinite length
7. A point charge +q is placed at the centre of a sphere of radius R. The electric flux emerging
from the sphere is
q
(a) (b) Zero
0
6𝑞𝑅 2 𝑞
(c) (d)6𝑅2𝜀
𝜀0 0

8. A charge q is placed at the corner of a cube. The electric flux passing through the cube is

q q
(a) (b)
0 2 0
q 𝑞
(c) (d)
40 8𝜀0

9. 𝑞1 , 𝑞2 , 𝑞3 and q 4 are point charges located at points as shown in the figure and S is a spherical
Gaussian surface of radius R. Which of the following is true according to the Gauss’s law

q1 R
q4
q2 q3

𝑞 +𝑞 +𝑞
(a) ∮𝑠(𝐸⃗1 + 𝐸⃗2 + 𝐸⃗3 ). 𝑑𝑠 = 1 2𝜀2 3
0
(𝑞 +𝑞 +𝑞 )
(b) ∮𝑠(𝐸⃗1 + 𝐸⃗2 + 𝐸⃗3 ). 𝑑𝑠 = 1 𝜀 2 3
0
(𝑞 +𝑞 +𝑞 +𝑞 )
(c) ∮𝑠(𝐸⃗1 + 𝐸⃗2 + 𝐸⃗3 ). 𝑑𝑠 = 1 2𝜀 3 4
0

(d) None of the above

10. Electric field strength E due to a short electric dipole, depends on distance r as
1 1
(a) 𝐸 ∝ 𝑟4 (b) 𝐸 ∝ 𝑟3
1 1
(c) 𝐸 ∝ 𝑟2 (d) 𝐸∝𝑟
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b c a b a c a d b b

Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason
(R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as
given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false.

13
1. Assertion : A bird sitting on a high-tension line and nothing happens to the bird.
Reason : The high tension line is too high from the ground.
2. Assertion : A Charge, which is less than charge of one electron is not possible
Reason : Charge is quantized.
3. Assertion(A) : During charging by rubbing, the insulating material with higher work
function becomes negatively charged.
Reason(R) : Electrons are negatively charged.
4. Assertion(A) : A metallic shield in the form of a hollow shell, can be built to block an electric
field.
Reason(R): In a hollow spherical metallic shell, electric field inside is zero at every point.
5. Assertion : For a point charge or a small electric dipole, electric field decreases at the
same rate w.r.to distance in both the cases.
Reason : Electric field for point charge and electric dipole is inversely
proportional to square of distance .
6. Assertion (A): The range of gravitational force and coulomb force is infinity.
Reason(R): The Coulomb force is stronger than the gravitational force.
7. Assertion (A): If an dipole is enclosed by a surface, then according to the gauss theorem,
electric flux linked with it is zero.
Reason (R): The net charge on an electric dipole can never be zero.
8. Assertion (A): Positive electric flux indicates that electric lines of force are directed
outwards Reason (R): Positive electric flux is due to a positive charge.
9. Assertion (A): Electric field inside a metallic charged conductor is always zero whatever of
amount of charge.
Reason (R): Electric field lines are always perpendicular to surface of the metal.
10. Assertion (A): Charge on a body is 2.3x10-19C is not possible.
Reason (R): Electric charge on a body is quantized and integral multiple of charge of an
electron.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
c a b a d b c b b a

2 Marks Questions
1. Four-point charges qA = 2 μC, qB = –5 μC, qC = 2 μC, and qD = –5 μC are located at the corners
of a square ABCD of side 1m. What is the force on a charge of 0.5 μC placed at the centre of
the square?(ans-zero)
2. An attractive force of 5N is acting between two charges of +2.0 μC & -2.0 μC placed at
some distance. If the charges are mutually touched and placed again at the same distance,
what will be the new force between them?
3. Two identical charges, Q each are kept at a distance r from each other. A third charge q is
placed on the line joining the two charges such that all the three charges are in
equilibrium. What is magnitude, sign and position of the charge q?
4. A polythene piece rubbed with wool is found to have a negative charge of 3 × 10–7 C.
(a) Estimate the number of electrons transferred
(b) Is there a transfer of mass from wool to polythene?
5. Two point charges +3C and +8C repel each other with a force of 40N . If a charge of −5C
is added to each of them, find the new force between them.(ans:10N)

14
 6. An electric dipole with dipole moment 4 × 10–9 C m is aligned at 30° with the direction of a
uniform electric field of magnitude 5 × 104 NC–1. Calculate the magnitude of the torque
acting on the dipole.
7. A system has two charges qA = 2.5 × 10–7 C and qB = –2.5 × 10–7 C located at points A: (0, 0,
–15 cm) and B: (0,0, +15 cm), respectively. What is the total charge and electric dipole
moment of the system?
8. Consider a dipole of length 2a. What is the magnitude and direction of electric field at the
midpoint of the length of the dipole?
9. An infinite line charge produces a field of 9 × 104 N/C at a distance of 2m. Calculate the
linear charge density.
10. A point charge +10 μC is a distance 5 cm directly above the centre of a square of side 10
cm, as shown in Fig. What is the magnitude of the electric flux through the square?

3 Marks Questions
1. Careful measurement of the electric field at the surface of a black box indicates that the net
outward flux through the surface of the box is 8.0 × 103 Nm2/C.
(a) What is the net charge inside the box?
(b) If the net outward flux through the surface of the box were zero, could you conclude that there
were no charges inside the box? Why or Why not?
2. Consider a uniform electric field E = 3 × 103 î N/C.
(a) What is the flux of this field through a square of 10 cm on a side whose plane is parallel to the yz
plane?
(b) What is the flux through the same square if the normal of its plane makes a 60° angle with the x-
axis?
3. Derive an expression for the electric field intensity at a point on the equatorial line of an
electric dipole of dipole moment p and length 2a. What is the direction of this field?
4. A thin conducting spherical shell of radius R has charge Q spread uniformly over its surface. Using
Gauss’s law, derive an expression for an electric field at a point outside the shell. Draw a graph of
electric field E(r) with distance r from the centre of the shell for 0 ≤ r ≤ ∞
5. A conducting sphere of radius 10 cm has an unknown charge. If the electric field 20 cm from the
centre of the sphere is 1.5X 103 N/m and points radially inward, what is the net charge on the sphere?
5 Marks questions
1. What is an electric dipole? Deduce an expression for the torque acting on an electric dipole
placed in a uniform magnetic field. Hence define dipole moment. An electric dipole of length
2 cm is placed with its axis making an angle of 60o to a uniform electric field of 105 NC-1 . If it
experiences a torque of 8√3 Nm, calculate the; (i) Magnitude of charge on the dipole. (ii)
Potential energy of the dipole.
2. Define electric flux. Write its S.I. unit. State and explain Gauss’s law. Find out the outward flux
due to a point charge + q placed at the centre of a cube of side ‘a’. Why is it found to be
independent of the size and shape of the surface enclosing it ? Explain
15
 3. Define the term ‘electric field’. Write its S.I. unit. Given the components of an electric field as
Ex = x, Ey = 0 and Ez = 0, where  is a dimensional constant. Calculate the flux through each
face of the cube of side ‘a’, as shown in the figure, and the effective charge inside the cube.

4. (a) An electric dipole of dipole moment 𝑝 consists of point charges +q and –q separated by
a distance 2a apart. Deduce the expression for the electric field 𝐸⃗ due to the dipole at a
distance x from the centre of the dipole on its axial line in terms of the dipole moment⃗⃗⃗𝑝.
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗
2𝑝
Hence show that in the limit x >> a, 𝐸⃗ = 4𝜋ɛ 3
0𝑥

(b) Given the electric field in the region 𝐸⃗ = 2x 𝑖̂, find the net electric flux through the cube
and the charge enclosed by it.
5. (a) State Gauss’ law. Using this law, obtain the expression for the electric field due to an
infinitely long straight conductor of linear charge density .
(b) A wire AB of length L has linear charge density  = kx, where x is measured from the end
A of the wire. This wire is enclosed by a Gaussian hollow surface. Find the expression for the
electric flux through this surface.
6. (a) State Gauss’s law in electrostatics. Show, with the help of a suitable example
along with the figure, that the outward flux due to a point charge ‘q’, in vacuum within
a closed surface, is independent of its size or shape and is given by q / o .
(b) Two parallel uniformly charged infinite plane sheets, ‘1’ and ‘2’, have charge
densities +  and – 2  respectively. Give the magnitude and direction of the net
electric field at a point
(i) in between the two sheets and
(ii) outside near the sheet ‘1’.
Case study based question
The Faraday cage is a type of enclosure designed to keep external electric fields out of conductive
materials. Faraday shield is another name for it. Faraday's cage was invented by Michael Faraday in the
year 1800. He discovered that when he charged the metal cage, which works as an electrical conductor,
the charges appeared just on the surface and had no effect on the interiors. On a larger scale, he lined a
chamber in metal foil, permitting high-voltage discharges from an electrostatic generator. He utilized an
electroscope, a device that detects electric charges, to validate his idea that the outer surface of the
metal foil was conducting current while the inside of the room was empty of electric charges.
(i) Why is the electric field within a cavity zero?
(ii) What is the use of electroscope?
(iii) Write any two applications of The Faraday Cage or electric shielding.
Or
(iii) Why the surface charge density high at the sharp edges of a charged conductor.
16
 Chapter-2 Electrostatic potential and Capacitance
Definition of electric potential:
Electric potential at a point for a charge or a system of charges is the amount of work done to bring a unit
positive charge from infinity to that point by an external agency without acceleration is called potential at
that point.
Potential at a point is depend on reference point
𝒘𝒐𝒓𝒌 𝒅𝒐𝒏𝒆 𝒕𝒐 𝒃𝒓𝒊𝒏𝒈 𝒂 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒆 𝒇𝒓𝒐𝒎 𝒊𝒏𝒇𝒊𝒏𝒊𝒕𝒚 𝒕𝒐 𝒂 𝒑𝒐𝒊𝒏𝒕
Electric potential = 𝒂𝒎𝒐𝒖𝒏𝒕 𝒐𝒇 𝒄𝒉𝒂𝒓𝒈𝒆

Electric potential is a scalar quantity its symbol is V and its unit is joule/coulomb which termed as
volt.
𝑊
𝑉=
𝑞

Relation of electric field and electric potential:

Suppose a point charge q is placed at a
point where the electric field is E and the
force on the charged particle q will be qE in
the direction of electric field E. Now to
move the charged particle opposite of the
electrostatic force qE an external force Fext
is required such that the force is equal to
the force exerted by electric field E but in
opposite direction to move the charge
without accretion by some distance dr.
The work done is equal to VA-VB
𝐸𝑑𝑟 = 𝑉 − (𝑉 + 𝑑𝑉)
𝑑𝑉
𝐸=−
𝑑𝑟

Electric potential Difference: Electric potential difference between two points A and B is the
amount of work done to bring a unit positive charge from B to A by external agency without any
acceleration against the electric field is called Electric potential difference.
𝑤𝑜𝑟𝑘 𝑑𝑜𝑛𝑒 𝑡𝑜 𝑏𝑟𝑖𝑛𝑔 𝑞 𝑐ℎ𝑎𝑟𝑔𝑒 𝑓𝑟𝑜𝑚 𝐵 𝑡𝑜 𝐴
VA-VB= 𝑞

𝐴
⃗⃗⃗⃗
VA-VB= =− ∫𝐵 𝐸⃗ . 𝑑𝑟

Its unit is also volt

Potential difference predicts the direction of flow of charge. A positive charge always moves from
higher potential to lower potential.

17
Electric potential for a point charge Q at r distance:
There is a charge Q is placed at
origin O and we have to
calculate electric potential at
point P which has r distance.
Let’s assume an arbitrary point
P’ at any arbitrary distance r’.
Work done to move dr’ distance
opposite of electric field.
From the formula
𝑟 ′
V = − ∫∞ ⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝐸 . 𝑑𝑟 ⃗⃗⃗⃗ ′
But a Point charge Q electric
𝐾𝑄
field ⃗⃗⃗
𝐸′ = 𝑟 ′ 2 𝑟̂
Using in the above equation
V=
𝑟 𝐾𝑄
⃗⃗⃗⃗
− ∫∞ 𝑟 ′ 2 𝑟̂ . 𝑑𝑟 ′
V=
𝑟 1
−KQ ∫∞ 𝑟 ′ 2 𝑟̂ . 𝑑𝑟 ⃗⃗⃗⃗ ′
V=-KQ [-
1 𝑟
]
𝑟′ ∞
By solving it we get
𝑲𝑸
V= 𝒓

So we can see that electric

potential is inversely
proportional to the distance.

Electric potential difference for a point charge Q at r distance:

For Point A electric potential
𝑲𝑸
VA = 𝒓
𝑨
For Point B electric potential
𝑲𝑸
VB = 𝒓
𝑩

𝑲𝑸 𝑲𝑸
VA- VB = 𝒓 -
𝑨 𝒓𝑩

𝟏 𝟏
VA- VB=KQ⌊ − ⌋
𝒓𝑨 𝒓𝑩

18
Electrostatic potential for an electric dipole:
(i)At axial point
Electric potential for +q charge at P is
1 𝑞
= 4𝜋𝜀 (𝑟−𝑎) …………….(1)
0
Electric potential for -q charge at P is
1 𝑞
=− 4𝜋𝜀 (𝑟+𝑎) ……………(2)
0
1 𝑞 1 𝑞
Net potential V = 4𝜋𝜀 −
0 (𝑟+𝑎) 4𝜋𝜀0 (𝑟−𝑎)
𝑞 1 1
V = 4𝜋𝜀 ⌊(𝑟−𝑎) − (𝑟+𝑎)
⌋
0
𝑞 2𝑎
V= ⌊ ⌋ q(2a)=p
4𝜋𝜀0 𝑟 2 −𝑎2
For short dipole 𝑟 ≫ 𝑎2 2
𝑝
Hence V = 4𝜋𝜀 𝑟 2
0
(i)At equatorial point
Electric potential for +q charge at P is
1 𝑞
= 4𝜋𝜀 √𝑟 2 2 ……………. (1)
0 +𝑎
Electric potential for -q charge at P is
1 𝑞
= − 4𝜋𝜀 √𝑟 2 2 …………… (2)
0 +𝑎
1 𝑞 1 𝑞
Net potential V = −
4𝜋𝜀0 √𝑟 2 +𝑎2 4𝜋𝜀0 √𝑟 2 +𝑎2

Net potential V = 0

Equipotential surface :
Any surface over which the potential is constant is called an equipotential surface. In other words, the
potential difference between any two points on an equipotential surface is zero.
Some important properties of equipotential surfaces:
1. Work done in moving a charge over an equipotential surface is zero.
2. The electric field is always perpendicular to an equipotential surface.
3. The spacing between equipotential surfaces enables us to identify regions of strong and weak fields.
4. Two equipotential surfaces can never intersect. If two equipotential surfaces could intersect, then at the
point of intersection there would be two values of electric potential which is not possible.
Equipotential surfaces for various cases:
a) For a point charge: (b) For an electric dipole:
Equipotential surfaces are concentric spherical
concentric circles.

19
 (c) For two positive charges: d) Equipotential surfaces for a uniform electric field :
Equipotential surfaces are parallel planes.

(Note: for
identical negative charges Equi-potential
surfaces will be same as above only the
direction of electric field lines will be inward. )

Electric potential for a system of charges:

Suppose there is a system of charges
q1,q2 , q3 ……so on and we have to
calculate electric potential at P
point. Since electric potential is a
scalar quantity so we can use
superposition principle and add all
the potential available at P point.
V=V1 + V2 +V3+….
𝟏 𝒒 𝒒 𝒒
V = 𝟒𝝅𝓔 [𝒓𝟏 + 𝒓𝟐 + 𝒓𝟑 … … … … … … ]
𝟎 𝟏 𝟐 𝟑

Potential Energy of a system of charges:

(a) Potential energy for a single point chage:

Since the amount of work done to bring a single point charge from infinity to its present position by
external agency is zero (Because no electric field exist which interact this charge), so the potential
energy for it is zero.
(b) For a system of two charges:
According to the definition
The amount of work done to bring
q1 charge from infinity to A position
is
W1=0 ……………………….(1)
There is no work done to move this
charge because no other electric
field exist but it will develop an
electric potential around it .The
electric potential at B point is

20
 1 𝒒𝟏
V=4𝜋ℰ ………………….(2)
0 𝒓𝟏𝟐
Work done to bring q2 charge from
infinity to B position is
W2 = q2 x V ( By
definition of potential )
1 𝒒𝟏
W2 = q2 x 4𝜋ℰ ……………….(3)
0 𝒓𝟏𝟐
Total work done
W = W1 + W2
1 𝒒 𝒒
W= 0+ 4𝜋ℰ 𝒓𝟏 𝟐
0 𝟏𝟐
1 𝒒𝟏 𝒒𝟐
W = 4𝜋ℰ
0 𝒓𝟏𝟐

Electrostatic potential energy for three charges system:

Work done to bring q2 charge from infinity to
B point
W1 = 0 ………………………(1)
(no work done to bring a charge in absence of
a field)
Potential developed by q2 at point A
1 𝒒
V= 4𝜋ℰ 𝒓 𝟐
0 𝟏𝟐
Work done to bring q1 charge from infinity to
A point
W2 = V x q1
𝟏 𝒒 𝒒
W2 = 𝟒𝝅𝓔 𝒓𝟏 𝟐…………………(2)
𝟎 𝟏𝟐
Potential developed by q1 and q2 charges at C
point
1 𝒒 1 𝒒
V’ = 4𝜋ℰ 𝒓 𝟏 + 4𝜋ℰ 𝒓 𝟐
0 𝟏𝟑 0 𝟐𝟑
Work done to bring q3 charge from infinity to
C point
W3 = q3 X V’
1 𝑞 1 𝑞
W3 = q3 X ( 4𝜋ℰ 𝑟 1 + 4𝜋ℰ 𝑟 2 ) ………….. (3)
0 13 0 23
Net work done W = W1+W2+W3
𝟏 𝒒 𝒒 1 𝑞 𝑞 1 𝑞3 𝑞2
W = 0+ 𝟒𝝅𝓔 𝒓𝟏 𝟐 + ( 4𝜋ℰ 𝑟3 1 + 4𝜋ℰ )
𝟎 𝟏𝟐 0 13 0 𝑟23
So potential energy
𝟏 𝒒𝟏 𝒒𝟐 𝟏 𝒒𝟐 𝒒𝟑 𝟏 𝒒𝟑 𝒒𝟏
U= + +
𝟒𝝅𝓔𝟎 𝒓𝟏𝟐 𝟒𝝅𝓔𝟎 𝒓𝟐𝟑 𝟒𝝅𝓔𝟎 𝒓𝟏𝟑

21
Potential energy of a dipole in an external field:
The torque on the dipole at an angle θ
is
Ʈ= pE sinθ
Small work done dw to rotate the
dipole through small angle dθ by
external torque in anticlockwise
direction
dw = Ʈ dθ
dw = pE sinθ dθ
work done to rotate from angle θ1 to
angle θ2
𝜃
W =∫𝜃 2 pE sinθ dθ
1
𝜃
W =𝑝𝐸 ∫𝜃 2 sinθ dθ
1
W =𝑝𝐸[−𝑐𝑜𝑠𝜃] 𝜃𝜃2
1
W= pE (cosθ1-cosθ2)
Let’s assume that potential energy is
zero at an angle
𝜋
θ1=2
so potential energy at an angle θ is
U(θ) =-pE cosθ
U(θ) = - 𝒑 ⃗⃗
⃗ .𝑬

ELECTROSTATICS OF CONDUCTORS:
A metallic conductor shows these properties
1. Inside a conductor, electrostatic field is zero..
2. At the surface of a charged conductor, electrostatic field must be normal to the surface at every point:
3. The interior of a conductor can have no excess charge in the static situation.
4. Electrostatic potential is constant throughout the volume of the conductor and has the same value (as
inside) on
its surface:
5. Electric field at the surface of a charged conductor: Electric field near to the surface of a conductor is
𝝈
⃗𝑬
⃗ = ̂
𝒏
𝓔𝟎
Where σ is the surface charge density and 𝑛̂ is a unit vector normal to the surface in the outward
direction.

6. Electrostatic shielding: Consider a conductor with a cavity, with no charges inside the cavity. A
remarkable result is that the electric field inside the cavity is zero, This is known as electrostatic
shielding.

22
DIELECTRICS (INSULATORS) AND POLARISATION
Dielectric are the substances which have no or
negligible numbers of free charge carriers.When a
conductor is placed in an external electric field, the
free charge carriers move and charge distribution in
the conductor adjusts itself in such a way that the
electric field due to induced charges opposes the
external field within the conductor. This happens
until, in the static situation, the two fields cancel each
other and the net electrostatic field in the conductor
is zero. In a dielectric, this free movement of charges
is not possible. It turns out that the external field
induces dipole moment by stretching or re-orienting
molecules of the dielectric. The collective effect of all
the molecular dipole moments is net charges on the
surface of the dielectric which produce a field that
opposes the external field. Unlike in a conductor,
however, the opposing field so induced does not
exactly cancel the external field. It only reduces it.
The extent of the effect depends on the
nature of the dielectric.

Types of molecules for a dielectric

Non-polar molecule-The centres of positive and negative charges coincide. The molecule then has no
permanent (or intrinsic) dipole moment. Examples of non-polar molecules are oxygen (O2) and
hydrogen (H2) molecules which, because of their symmetry, have no dipole moment. On the other hand,
Polar molecule -The centres of positive and negative charges are separated (even when there is no
external field). Such molecules have a permanent dipole moment.
Polar molecules examples: HCl, H2O,NH3
Polarisation: Thus, in either case, whether polar or non-polar, a dielectric develops a net dipole
moment in the presence of an external field. The dipole moment per unit volume is called polarization
and is denoted by P.
Capacitance :
The charges on conductors are Q and –Q and
potential difference V = V1 – V2 .
The electric field in the region between the
conductors is proportional to the charge Q.
Potential difference V is the work done per
unit positive charge in taking a small test
charge from the conductor 2 to 1 against the
field.
The potential difference between two
conductors is directly proportional to charge
Q

Q∝V
Q =CV
The constant C is called the capacitance of the
capacitor. C is independent of Q or V, as
stated above. The capacitance C depends only
23
 on the geometrical configuration (shape, size,
separation, it also depends on the nature of
the
Insulator separating the two conductors) of
the system of two conductors.
Definition of capacitance:
In the equation Q =CV if V =1 volt then Q = C
The capacitance of a capacitor is the amount of charge stored for the potential difference of 1
volt.
Its unit is “coulomb/ volt or farad” and symbol “F”
Definition of 1F or 1 farad
If Q=1 coulomb and V =1 volt then C=1 farad
If 1 coulomb charge is provided to a capacitor and rising of potential difference is 1 volt then the
capacitance of the capacitor is 1 farad.
1 farad is a very big unit of capacitance and practically not possible to give 1 coulomb charge for just
rising 1 volt potential difference.
In practice, a farad is a very big unit; the most common units are its sub-multiples
1 μF = 10–6 F, 1 nF = 10–9 F, 1 pF = 10–12 F,

Symbol of variable capacitance capacitor

Symbol of capacitor

The maximum electric field that a dielectric medium can withstand without break-down (of its
insulating property) is called its dielectric strength; for air it is about 3 × 106 Vm–1.

THE PARALLEL PLATE CAPACITOR:

A parallel plate capacitor consists of two large plane

parallel conducting plates separated by a small distance d.
The surface charge density is say σ and - σ.
The charge on the plates are +Q and –Q
The electric field for positive plate between the plates is
𝜎
E1 = 2ℰ
0
The electric field for negative plate between the plates is
𝜎
E2 = 2ℰ
0
Since both are in the same direction so they will add up
inside the plates but for outside they will cancel to each
other Between the plates electric field
E = E 1 + E2
𝜎 𝜎
E = 2ℰ + 2ℰ
0 0
𝜎
E= ℰ0

24
 𝑄 𝑄
E= since σ = 𝐴
𝐴ℰ0
Electric field is uniform inside the plates so potential
difference
V = EXd
𝑄
V = 𝐴ℰ X d
0
𝑄𝑑
V = 𝐴ℰ
0
ℰ0 𝐴
Q= V
𝑑
𝓔𝟎 𝑨
Compare from equation Q= CV then C = 𝒅

Effect of dielectric on capacitance: If parallel plate capacitor is fully filled with dielectric material
𝓔𝑨
then capacitance C’ = 𝒅
𝑲𝓔 𝑨
C’ = 𝒅𝟎
C’ = KC
The capacitance of the capacitor filled with dielectric material is greater than air filled capacitor.
Combination of Capacitors :
(1) Series combination of capacitors:
In the above figure we have three capacitors C1,
C2, C3 which are in series combination.
V=potential difference along circuit =V1+V2+V3;
𝑄
V1=𝐶
1
𝑄
V2=𝐶
2
𝑄
V3=𝐶
3
(V1, V2, V3 are the potential difference along C1,
C2, C3 respectively.)

The value of equivalent capacitance of circuit is

always less than any capacitors which are in
series combination in that circuit.

25
 (2) Parallel combination of
capacitors:

In parallel combination the potential difference

across each terminal of every capacitor is same
which is equal to applied potential difference
and charge stored in each capacitor will be
different. We find the charge of each capacitor
as:

Capacitance of parallel plate capacitor partially filled with dielectric medium:

26
 𝓔𝟎 𝑨
C= 𝟏
𝒅−𝒕(𝟏− )
𝑲

Electrostatic energy stored in a Capacitor: Electrostatic Potential energy stored in a charged

𝑄2
dipole 𝑈 = 2𝐶
Using Q=CV
𝐶𝑉 2
U=
2
𝑄𝑉
U= 2

Multiple choice questions

1. Which of the following options is correct? In a region of constant potential
(a) the electric field is uniform. (b) The electric field is zero.
(c) There can be charge inside the region. (d) The electric field shall necessarily change if a charge is
placed outside the region.
2. The potential at a point due to an electric dipole will be maximum and minimum when the angles
between the axis of the dipole and the line joining the point to the dipole are respectively
(a) 900 and1800 (b)00 and 900
(c)900 and00 (d)00 and 0o
3. A parallel plate capacitor with dielectric slab (dielectric constant 2) in between the plates has a
capacitance ‘C’. Without the slab capacitance of the capacitor is
(a) 𝐶/ √2 (b)2𝐶
(c)𝐶/2 (d) √2C
4. Dielectric constant for metal is
(a)Zero (b) Infinite
(c) 1 (d) Greater than 1

27
 5. Two charged spheres of radii R1 and R2 are connected by a thin wire. No current will flow, if they
have
(a) The same charge on each
(b) the same charge densities
(c) The same potential energy
(d) The same potential
6. The kinetic energy will be gained by an  − particle in going from a point at 20𝑉 to another point
at 10𝑉
(a) 20𝑒𝑉 (b) 20𝑘𝑒𝑉
(c) 20𝑀𝑒𝑉 (d) 20𝐽
7. The electric potential V is given as a function of distance x (metre) by 𝑉 = (𝑥 2 + 2𝑥 − 9)𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡.
Value of electric field at x = 1 is (a) 4 𝑉/𝑚 (b) 6𝑉/𝑚
(c) 2𝑉/𝑚 (d) 0

8. The capacity of a parallel plate condenser is C . Its capacity when the separation between the
plates is halved and dielectric slab of dielectric constant K=5 in inserted between the plates, will
be
(a) 10𝐶 (b) 2𝐶
𝐶 𝐶
(c) 10 (d) 2
9. A 2𝜇𝐹capacitor is charged to 100𝑣𝑜𝑙𝑡 and then its plates are connected by a conducting wire
resistance 2ohm. The heat produced is
(a) 1 𝐽 (b) 0.1 𝐽
(c) 0.01 𝐽 (d) 0.001 𝐽
10. Three equal charges are located at the vertices of an equilateral triangle. At the centre of the
triangle
(a) The field is zero but potential is non-zero
(b) The field is non-zero but potential is zero
(c) Both field and potential are zero
(d) Both field and potential are non-zero

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b b c b d a a a c a
Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled
Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b),
(c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false.

28
1. Assertion (A) -The work done by an electrostatic field in moving a charge from one point to another
depends only on the initial and the final points.
Reason (R)- Electrostatic force is a conservative fore.

2. Assertion (A) - For a uniform electric field E along the x -axis, the equipotential surfaces are planes
parallel to the y-z plane.
Reason (R)- Electric field lines are always perpendicular to equipotential surfaces.

3. Assertion (A) - A polar molecule is one in which the centres of positive and negative charges are
separated.
Reason (R)- A polar molecules have a permanent electric dipole moment.

4. Assertion (A) - When capacitors are connected in series net capacitance decreases.
Reason (R)- In series combination, charges on the two plates are the same on each capacitor.
5. Assertion (A) - When a charged capacitor is filled completely with a metallic slab, its capacitance
decreases.
Reason (R) -The dielectric constant for metal is zero.
6. Assertion(A)- A charged capacitor is disconnected from a battery. Now, if its plates are separated
further, the charge on each plate will remains same.
Reason (R)- Energy stored in a capacitor is not equal to the work done when charging it.
7. Assertion(A) - Conductors having equal positive charge and volume must also have different
potential.
Reason(R) - Potential depends on charge, volume and shape of the conductor.
8. Assertion(A) - Electric potential inside a hollow conductor is constant.
Reason(R) – Electric field inside a hollow conductor is constant.
9. Assertion(A) – Work done to move a charge on an equipotential surface is always zero.
Reason(R) – Electric field is zero at each point on an equipotential surface.
10. Assertion(A) – During charging a capacitor Energy stored on the capacitor increases.
Reason(R) – During charging a capacitor potential difference of the plates of a capacitor increases.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
a a b b d c a c c b

2 Marks Questions
1. A regular hexagon of side 0.1m has charge 5μC at all vertices. Calculate the electric potential at
the centre. (2.7 X106V)
2. Find the ratio of the potential differences that must be applied across the parallel and series
combination of two identical capacitors so that energy stored, in two cases, becomes the same.
(1:2)
3. (i) Two circular metal plates, each of radius 10cm are kept parallel to each other at a distance of
1mm. What kind of capacitor do they make?
(ii) If the radius of each of the plates is increased by a factor of √2 and distance of separation
reduced to half, calculate the ratio of capacitance in both cases.
4. Two-point charges +Q1 and -Q2 are placed at a distance ‘r’ apart. Obtain the expression for the
amount of work done to place a third charge Q3 at the midpoint of the line joining the two.
5. A capacitor has charge Q , voltage V and field E. If the dielectric is introduced with K= 3 find the
new values of charge, voltage and field.

29
6. Two identical capacitors are first connected in series and then connected in parallel. If the
combinations are connected in constant voltage source, Find the ratio of energy stored in these
two combinations.
7. Find the equivalent capacitance between points A and B of the combinations of capacitors
12F
A

2 F 3 F

B
20F

8. A point charge Q is placed at point O as shown. Is the potential difference ( VA-VB) positive,
negative or zero if Q is

(i) positive (ii) negative

9. A parallel plate capacitor is charged and the charging battery is then disconnected. What
happens to the potential difference and the energy of the capacitor, if the plates are moved
further apart using an insulating handle?
10. Find the equivalence capacitance between X and Y.

3 Marks Questions
1. 5A network of four 10 µF capacitors is connected to a 500 V supply as shown in the figure.
Determine the (a) equivalent capacitance of the network and (b) charge on each capacitor.

2. Calculate the potential difference and the energy stored in the capacitor C2 in the circuit shown in
the figure. Given potential at A is 90 V, C1 = 20 µF, C2 = 30 µF and C3 = 15 µF.

3. Two capacitors of unknown capacitances C1 and C2 are connected first in series and then in
parallel across a battery of 100 V. If the energy stored in the two combinations is 0.045 J and 0.25
J respectively, determine the value of C1 and C2 . Also calculate the charge on each capacitor in
parallel combination.

30
4. Two capacitors of capacitance 10 µF and 20 µF are connected in series with a 6 V battery. After
the capacitors are fully charged, a slab of dielectric constant (K) is inserted between the plates of
the two capacitors. How will the following be affected after the slab is introduced?
(a) the electric field energy stored in the capacitors
(b) the charges on the two capacitors
(c) the potential difference between the plates of the capacitors Justify your answer.
5. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is charged to a potential V by a battery. Without
disconnecting the battery, the distance between the plates is tripled and a dielectric medium of k
= 10 is introduced between the plates of the capacitor. Explain giving reasons, how will the
following be affected : (i) capacitance of the capacitor (ii) charge on the capacitor, and (iii) energy
density of the capacitor.
6. A capacitor of unknown capacitance is connected across a battery of V volt. A charge of 360 µC is
stored in it. When the potential across the capacitor is reduced by 120 V, the charge stored in the
capacitor becomes 120 µC. Calculate V and the unknown capacitance. What would have been the
charge on the capacitor if the voltage were increased by 120 V ?
7. Two parallel plate capacitors X and Y have the same area of plates and same separation between
them. X has air between the plates while Y contains a dielectric medium of ε r = 4.

(i) Calculate capacitance of each capacitor if equivalent capacitance of the combination is 4 µF.
(ii) Calculate the potential difference between the plates of X and Y. (iii) Estimate the ratio of
electrostatic energy stored in X and Y.
8. Three-point charges, + Q, + 2Q and – 3Q are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle ABC of
side l. If these charges are displaced to the mid-points A1 , B1 and C1 respectively, find the amount

of the work done in shifting the charges to the new locations.

9. Two metal spheres A and B of radius r and 2r whose centers are separated by a distance of 6r are
given charge Q, are at potential V1 and V2. Find the ratio of V1/V2. These spheres are connected to
each other with the help of a connecting wire

keeping the separation unchanged, what is the amount of charge that will flow through the wire?
31
10. Four-point charges are placed at the corners of the square of edge a as shown in the figure. Find
the work done in disassembling the system of charges.

5 marks Questions
1. (a)Derive the expression for the energy stored in a parallel plate capacitor. Hence obtain the
expression for the energy density of the electric field.
(b) A fully charged parallel plate capacitor is connected across an uncharged identical capacitor.
Show that the energy stored in the combination is less than that stored initially in the single
capacitor.
2. (a)Explain why, for any charge configuration, the equipotential surface through a point is normal
to the electric field at that point.
Draw a sketch of equipotential surfaces due to a single charge (−q), depicting the electric field
lines due to the charge.
(b) Obtain an expression for the work done to dissociate the system of three charges placed
at the vertices of an equilateral triangle of side ‘a' as shown below.

3. Explain briefly the process of charging a parallel plate capacitor when it is connected across DC
battery. A capacitor of capacitance ‘C’ is charged to ‘V’ volts by a battery. After sometime battery
is disconnected and distance is doubled. Now a dielectric slab of constant, 1 < K < 2, is
introduced to fill the gap between the plates. How will the following get affected: (i) the electric
field between the plates (ii) the energy stored in the capacitor. Justify your answer by writing
necessary expressions.

4. (a)Define electrostatic potential at a point. Write its S.I. unit. Three-point charges q1, q2 and q3
are kept respectively at points A, B and C as shown in the figure. Derive the expression for the
electrostatic potential energy of the system.

(b) Depict the equipotential surfaces due to (i) an electric dipole, (ii) two identical positive
charges separated by a distance.

32
5. Deduce the expression for the torque acting on a dipole of dipole moment 𝑝 placed in a uniform
electric field 𝐸⃗ . Depict the direction of the torque. Explain it in vector form.
b) Show that the potential energy of a dipole making angle ϴ with direction of field is given by
U=-𝑝. 𝐸⃗ . Hence find out the amount of work done in rotating it from the position of unstable
equilibrium to the stable equilibrium.
Case Study based Questions
1. Capacitors are devices that can store electric charge and energy. Capacitors have several uses,
such as filters in DC power supplies and as energy storage banks for pulsed lasers. Capacitors
pass AC current, but not DC current, so they are used to block the DC component of a signal so
that the AC component can be measured. Plasma physics makes use of the energy storing ability
of capacitors. In plasma physics short pulses of energy at extremely high voltages and currents
are frequently needed. A capacitor can be slowly charged to the necessary voltage and then
discharged quickly to provide the energy needed. It is even possible to charge several capacitors
to a certain voltage and then discharge them in such a way as to get more voltage (but not more
energy) out of the system than was put in.
(i) A capacitor can store electric energy but cannot be used as a battery, why?
(ii) What is the role of dielectric in storing the electrical energy in a capacitor?
(iii) What are the factors on which energy stored in a capacitor depend?
Or
(iii) What are the factors on which capacitance of a capacitor depend?

33
 UNIT- 2
CHAPTER 3 CURRENT & ELECTRICITY
Electric current :- The time rate of flow of charge Current Density: - Current per unit area is
through any cross-section is called current. define as current density J , it is a vector quantity.
Direction of J is along drift velocity i.e.
ΔQ dQ
. i = ΔLim = perpendicular to the cross section area. Its unit is
t →0 Δt dt
A /m2.
If flow is uniform then i=
Q
t
. J=𝐴=
𝐼 neAvd
𝐴
= nevd
ne2τ
Current is a scalar quantity. It's S.I. unit is ampere (A) Hence J= 𝑚
E

Drift Velocity :- The average velocity of free electrons with which

they get drifted towards the +ve terminal under the influence of
external electric field is called drift velocity.
Average time taken between two successive collisions is called
relaxation time ().
t1 + t 2 + t 3 + t 4 + - - - - - - - t n
 =
n
The drift velocity vd = uav + a  = 0 + a 
acceleration a = F/m = eE/m
eE  eV 
Therefore vd = Hence vd = Since V = E × l
m ml

e𝐸⃗ τ
In vector form ⃗d = -
𝑉 𝑚

Current in terms of drift velocity: - Consider a conductor of Mobility:- mobility is defined as the
length ‘l’ & area of cross section ‘A’ connected by a battery. magnitude of the drift velocity per unit
Electron density ‘n’, then drift velocity vd = e V/ml electric field:
Distance travelled by electron in t sec is d = vd  t v d e
Volume occupied by the electrons which are entering into the µ= = The SI unit of mobility
E m
given cross section in t time is is m2/Vs
V = A d = A
(vd  t )
Total no of electron occupied in t sec is N = n V= n
A vd t
Total charge passing through the cross section in t sec is
q = N e = ( n A vd t) e
Electric current I = q / t = n A vd t e / t I = ne A vd
.

Ohm’s Law:- It state that-“If there is no change in physical conditions

such as- temperature, length, density, area of cross section etc then, the
current flowing in a metallic conductor is proportional to the potential
difference applied across it”.
If I current is flowing through the circuit & potential difference
developed is V. Then from Ohm’s law I V
Hence V  I
V=RI

34
 This is mathematical form of Ohm’s law. If we plot a graph between
voltage and current we obtain a straight line.
Where R = V / I is a proportionality constant known as resistance of
the conductor.
Its value depends on length, area of cross section, temperature &
nature of the substance. A conductor having resistance is called
resistor.
The resistance R of a conductor is the property due to which it opposes
the flow of current through it. The SI unit of resistance is ohm.

If the metallic conductor obeys the Ohm's law, we call it an Ohmic conductor e.g. metals
Many devices do not obey Ohm's law i.e. diode, transistor, thermistor, discharge tube, filament in a light. Those
substance for which graph between voltage and current is a straight line are called Nonohmic substance

Resistance – It is the opposition offered by a conductor to flow of charges through it It depends on the
length I, area of cross-section A, nature of material of the conductor and temperature.
l m l
R=  = 2
A ne  A
SI unit of resistance is ohm (Ω). The resistance of a conductor is 1 ohm if a current of I ampere flows
through it on applying a potential difference of I volt across its ends.
Resistivity or specific resistance - It is the resistance offered by a unit cube of the material of a
conductor. It depends on the nature of the material of the conductor and the temperature.
m 1
 = 2 and  =
ne  en e
Conductance -It is the reciprocal of resistance. SI unit - mho or siemen.
ne 2
Conductivity - It is the reciprocal of resistivity. SI unit – mho/ m.  = ne = 
m
Temperature dependence of resistance : Resistance of a conductor increase with temperature
Resistance  temperatur e .
If R0 = resistance of conductor at 0oC , Rt = resistance of conductor at toC
and ,  = temperature co-efficient of resistance

then Rt = R0 (1 +  t +  t 2 ) for t > 300oC and

Rt − R0
Rt = R0 (1 + α t ) for t  300oC or  =
R0  t
R1 1 +  t 1
If R1 and R2 are the resistances at t1oC and t2oC respectively then =
R2 1 +  t2 .

35
The value of  is different at different temperature. Temperature coefficient of resistance averaged over the
R 2 − R1
temperature range t1oC to t2oC is given by  =
R1 (t 2 − t1 )
which gives R2 = R1 [1 +  (t2 – t1)]. This formula gives an approximate value.
Effect of temperature on resistivity - For metals α is positive i.e., resistivity of metals increases with the
increase in temperature.
For semiconductors and insulators, α is negative i.e., their resistivity decreases with the increase in
temperature.
For alloys like constantan and manganin, α is very small. So they are used for making standard resistors.

Heating effect of current - The phenomenon of the production of heat in a resistor by the flow of an electric
current through it is called heating effect of current or Joule heating.
V2
H = VIt = I Rt = 2
t
R
Electric power - It is the rate at which an electric appliance converts electric energy into other forms of energy.
Or,
it is the rate at which work is done by a source of emf in maintaining an electric current through a circuit.
V2
P = VI = I 2 R =
R
Electric energy - It is the total work done in maintaining an electric current in an electric circuit for a given time.
𝑉2
W = VIt = I2 Rt = t joule
𝑅
Electromotive force (emf) - It is the energy supplied by the source in taking a unit positive charge once round
the complete circuit. It is equal to the terminal p.d. measured in open circuit.
Terminal potential difference (V) - The potential drop across the terminals of a cell when a current is drawn
from it is called its terminal potential difference. It is less than the emf of the cell in a closed circuit.
V = E - Ir
Terminal p.d. of a cell when it is being charged is V = E + Ir
Internal resistance - The resistance offered by the electrolyte of a cell to the flow of current between its
electrodes is called internal resistance of the cell.
It depends on
(i) nature of the electrolyte, (ii) concentration of the electrolyte, (iii) distance between the electrodes,
(iv) common area of the electrodes dipped in the electrolyte and (v) temperature of the electrolyte.

R = ( 𝑉 – 1 )R
𝐸−𝑉 𝐸−𝑉 𝐸
r= 𝐼
= 𝑉

36
Cells in series - The equivalent emf and internal resistance for the series combination of two cells with emf
E1 and E2 and internal resistances r1 and r2 respectively,

E eq = E1 + E 2 and
req = r1 + r2
If n cells of emf E and internal
resistance r each are connected in
series, then current flowing
through external resistance R is
nE
I=
R + nr

Cells in parallel - The equivalent emf and internal resistance for the parallel combination of two cells
with emf
E1 and E2 and internal resistances r1 and r2 respectively,

E1 r2 + E 2 r1
E eq =
r1 + r2
rr
and req = 1 2
r1 + r2
If m cells are connected in parallel, then
current drawn through external
mE
resistance R is I=
mR + r

Cells in mixed grouping - If n cells are connected in series in each row and m such rows are connected
in parallel, then current drawn through an external resistance R is
mnE
I= .
mR + nr
For maximum current, the external resistance must be equal to the total internal resistance, i.e.,
nr
R=  mR = nr.
m
Kirchhoff’s laws –
(1) Junction rule: In an electric circuit, the algebraic
sum of currents at any junction is zero. Or, at any
junction of electrical circuit the sum of currents entering
the junction must be equal to the sum of currents
leaving it
i.e. Σ I = 0.
This law is based on the conservation of charge
(2) Loop Rule:
Algebraic sum of changes in the potential around any closed loop must be zero i.e.
Σ V = IR . This law is based on the conservation of energy.

37
Wheatstone bridge – It is an arrangement of four resistances P. Q, R and S joined to form a
quadrilateral ABCD with a battery between A and C and a sensitive galvanometer between B and D. The
resistances are so adjusted that no current flows through the galvanometer. The bridge is then said to
be balanced.
In the balanced condition,
P R
=
Q S
A Wheatstone bridge is most sensitive when the resistances in its four arms are of the same order.
A pplying Kirchhoff’s second laws to the loop ABDA we get

I1P + IgG – I2R = 0 ………….(i)

A pplying Kirchhoff’s second laws to the loop BCDB, we get

(I1 – Ig ) Q - (I2 + Ig ) S – G Ig = 0 ………..(ii)

In the balanced condition of the bridge , Ig = 0
The above equation become
I1P – I2R = 0
I1P = I2R ………….(iii)
I1 Q - I2S = 0
I1 Q =I2S ………….(iv)
From equation (iii) and (iv) we get
P R
=
Q S

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Q. NO Questions
1 The resistivity of a wire
(a) Increases with the length of the wire
(b) Decreases with the area of cross-section
(c) Decreases with the length and increases with the cross-section of wire
(d) None of the above statement is correct
2 On increasing the temperature of a conductor, its resistance increases because
(a) Relaxation time decreases (b)Mass of the electrons increases
(c) Electron density decreases (d)None of the above
3 Through a semiconductor, an electric current is due to drift of
(a) Free electrons (b)Free electrons and holes
(c) Positive and negative ions (d)Protons
4 The resistance of a wire of uniform diameter d and length L is R . The resistance of another wire of the
same material but diameter 2d and length 4 L will be
(a) 2 R (b) R
(c) R / 2 (d) R / 4
5 For which of the following the resistance decreases on increasing the temperature
(a) Copper (b) Tungsten
(c) Germanium (d) Aluminium

38
 6 The resistance of a wire is R. If the length of the wire is doubled by stretching, then the new resistance
will be
(a) 2R (b) 4R
R
(c) R (d)
4
7 The magnitude and direction of the current in the circuit shown will be
1 e 2
a b
7 7
(a) A from a to b through e (b) A from b to a 10V 4V
3 3
through e
(c) 1A from b to a through e (d)1 A from a to b d
3
c
through e

8 A cell whose e.m.f. is 2 V and internal resistance is 0 .1  , is connected with a resistance of 3 .9  . The
voltage across the cell terminal will be
(a) 0 . 50 V (b) 1 . 90 V
(c) 1 . 95 V (d) 2 . 00 V
9 The figure shows a circuit diagram of a ‘Wheatstone Bridge’ to measure the resistance G of the
P R
galvanometer. The relation = will be satisfied only when
Q G

(a)The galvanometer shows a deflection when switch S is

closed
(b)The galvanometer shows a deflection when switch S is open
(c)The galvanometer shows no change in deflection whether S
is open or closed
(d)The galvanometer shows no deflection

10 In the circuit shown here, the readings of the ammeter and voltmeter are
6 V, 1
(a) 6 A, 60 V
(b) 0.6 A, 6 V V
6 A
(c) 6/11 A, 60/11 V
(d) 11/6 A, 11/60 V 4

ANSWERS MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Q. NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ANSWER d a b b c b d c c c

39
 ASSERTION REASONING BASED QUESTION
For question numbers 1 to 10, two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason
(R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false

Q. Questions
NO.
1 Assertion : The resistivity of a semiconductor increases with temperature.
Reason : The atoms of a semiconductor vibrate with larger amplitude at higher temperatures
thereby increasing its resistivity.
2 Assertion : The temperature coefficient of resistance is positive for metals and negative for p-
type semiconductor.
Reason : The effective charge carriers in metals are negatively charged whereas in p-type
semiconductor they are positively charged.
3 Assertion : In the following circuit emf is 2V and internal resistance of the cell is 1  and R = 1, then
reading of the voltmeter is 1V.
V
E=2V

r=1
2
Reason : V = E − ir where E = 2V, i = = 1A and R = 1  A
2 R=1
4 Assertion : There is no current in the metals in the absence of electric field.
Reason : Motion of free electron are randomly.
5 Assertion : The drift velocity of electrons in a metallic wire will decrease, if the temperature of the wire
is increased.
Reason : On increasing temperature, conductivity of metallic wire decreases.
6 Assertion : Electric field outside the conducting wire which carries a constant current is zero.
Reason : Net charge on conducting wire is zero.
7 Assertion : A person touching a high power line gets stuck with the line.
Reason : The current carrying wires attract the man towards it.
8 Assertion : The connecting wires are made of copper.
Reason : The electrical conductivity of copper is high
9 Assertion : Electric appliances with metallic body have three connections, whereas an electric bulb
has a two pin connection.
Reason : Three pin connections reduce heating of connecting wires
10 Assertion : Bending a wire does not effect electrical resistance.
Reason : Resistance of wire is proportional to resistivity of material.

ANSWERS ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS

Q. NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ANSWER d b a a b a d a c a

40
 CASE STUDY QUESTIONS
Q. Questions
NO
1 Read the following paragraph and answers the questions:
Heat produced by Electric Current : -

Whenever an electric current is passed through a conductor, it

becomes hot after some time. The Phenomenon of the production of
heat in a resistor by the flow of an electric current through it is called
heating effect of current or Joule heating. Thus, the electrical energy
supplied by the source of emf is converted into heat. In purely
resistive circuit the energy expended by the source entirely appears
as heat. But if the circuit has an active element like a motor, then a
part of the energy supplied by the source goes to do useful work and
the rest appears as heat. Joule’s law of heating form the basis of
various electrical appliances such as electric bulb, electric furnace,
electric press etc

(i) Why are alloys used for making standard resistance coils?
(ii) Nichrome and copper wires of same length and same radius are connected in series. Current I is
passed through them. Which wire gets heated up more?
(iii) A 25 W and 100 W are joined in series and connected to the mains. Which bulb will glow
brighter?
(iv) What is the heat emitted by an iron of 100 W in 1 minute .

2 Read the following paragraph and answers the questions

When a potential difference V is applied across the two ends of a conductor, the free electrons in the
conductor experience a force and are accelerated towards the positive end of conductor. On their way,
they suffer frequent collisions with the ions/atoms of the conductor and lose their gained kinetic
energy and again get accelerated due to electric field and lose the gained kinetic energy in the next
collision and so on. The average velocity with which the free electrons get drifted towards the positive
end of the conductor under the effect of applied electric field is called drift velocity.

(i) How does the drift velocity of electrons in a metallic conductor vary with increase in temperature?
(ii) Which factors depends on the drift velocity of the electrons in the conductors.?
(iii) How drift velocity is related to current flowing through the conductor .
(iv) How does the relaxation time of electron in the conductor change when temperature of the
conductor decreases.
ANSWERS CASE STUDY QUESTIONS

Q. NO ANSWERS
1 (i) Alloys have low value of temperature coefficient and high resistivity,
(ii) Heat Produce H = I2Rt , R = ρl/A
ρnichrome > ρcupper
Hnichrome > Hcupper
V2
(iii) P = VI = I R =
2
for const. voltage P α 1/R , R α 1/P
R
Heat Produce H = I2Rt
H α R ( I = constant in series circuit)
Then 25 W bulb will glow brighter.
(iv) H = Pt = 100 x 60 = 6000 J

41
 2 (i) drift velocity decrease)
(ii) Temperature, Material, Potential difference
(iii) I = neAvd
(iv) T α 1/𝜏 , 𝜏 increases )

Two marks questions

Q. NO. Questions
1 Electrics bulb have following specification (i) 100 W at 220 V (ii) 1000 W at 220 V which
bulb will have higher resistance. What is the ratio of their resistances.
V2
Ans- P = VI = I 2 R = ,for const. voltage P α 1/R , R α 1/P
R
. Resistance of 100 W bulb is greater and ratio 10 : 1.
2
When a cell is connected directly across a high resistance voltmeter the reading is 1.50 V.
When the cell is shorted through a low resistance ammeter the current is 2.5 A. What
is the emf and internal resistance of the cell?
Ans- E = 1.5 V
E = I r so 1.5 V = 2.5 A r and r = 0.6 
3
You are supplied with 6 identical dry cells, each of emf 1.5 V and internal resistance 0.3 .
What are the overall emf and internal resistance when:
(a) the cells are connected in parallel?
(b) the cells are connected in series?
Ans-: (a) 1.5 V, 0.05  (b) 9 V, 1.8 

4 Estimate the average drift speed of conduction electrons in a copper wire of cross section area 2.5 X
10-7m2 carrying a current of 2.7A. Assume the density of conduction electrons to be 9 x 10 28 m-3.
Ans- I = neAvd , vd =7.5 x10-4 m/s
5 A potential difference V is applied across the ends of copper wire of length l and diameter D.
What is the effect on drift velocity if
(i) V is doubled (ii) l is doubled
Ans-. (i) drift velocity doubled (ii) drift velocity halved
6 Find the value of the unknown resistance X and the current drawn by the circuit from the
battery if no current flows through the galvanometer. Assume the resistance per unit length
of the wire is 0.01Ωcm-1.

Ans- Ans X = 3Ω

42
 7 V – I graph for a metallic wire at two different temperatures T1 and T2 is as shown in the figure. Which of
the two
temperatures is higher and why?

Ans : Slope = V/I = R , Since (Slope) T1> (Slope) T2

 R(T1) > R(T2 )
 T1>T2 (because R α T for metals)

8 Distinguish between emf and terminal voltage.

9 Distinguish between ohmic and non ohmic devices. Give one example each.
10 Two wires A and B of the same material having length in the ratio 1:2 and radii in the ratio 2:1. What is
the ratio of the resistance?
Three marks questions
Q. Questions
NO.
1 In the circuit, assuming point A to be at zero potential, use Kirchhoff’s rules to determine the potential
at point B.

Ans- Hint From the loop BDCR1B, we get 2x2+3R1=4 , R1=0

Vb=Vc=2-Va=2-0=2V

2 State Kirchhoff’s rules. Apply these rules to the loops PRSP and PRQP to write the expressions for the
currents I1,I2 and I3 in the circuit.

Ans- Hint
By Kirchhoff’s junction rule, I3=I1+I2
From loop PRSP, 20I3+ 200I2= 5 ….(1)
From loop PRQP, 20I3+ 60I1=4…(2)
I1=39/860A, I2=4/215A, I3=11/172A.

43
3 The following graph shows the variation of terminal
potential difference V ,across the combination of
three cells in series to resistor vs current I :
Calculate (i) emf of each cell.
(ii) for what current I ,will the power dissipation of
the circuit be maximum.

Ans: emf of each cell = 2V. (ii) for maximum power dissipation current in the circuit = 1.0 A
4 Two cells of e.m.f. 1.5 V and 2V and internal resistance 1 ohm and 2 ohm respectively are connected in
parallel to pass a current in the same direction of and external resistance of 5 ohm.
(a) Draw circuit diagram.
(b) Using Kirchhoff’s laws, calculate the current through each branch of current and potential
difference across 5 ohm resistor

Ans- Hint: (a) correct diagram.

(b) Loop 1 , -2 + 1.5 = I1 – 2I2 ,-0.5 = I1 – 2I2 ,In loop 2, 2= 5I1 + 7I2 Now, I1 = 1/34 A
25
I2 = 9/34 A I= I1 + I2 = 10/34 A Potential Difference across 5 ohm resistor 17 V.

5 Find the value of unknown resistance X in the given circuit,

if no current flows through the section AD. Also calculate
the current drawn by the circuit from the battery of emf
6.0 V and negligible internal resistance.

Ans : X = 6 Ω , I = 1A

6 How the resistivity and resistance changes when the wire is stretched slowly to increased by 10%

Ans- Resistivity will not change. Let original length is l1 ,area is A1 and Resistance is R1 . When
l
wire is increased in length 10% then length is l2 ,area is A2 and Resistance is R2 , l2 = l1+101
11𝑙
= 101
after increased the length the volume will same of the wire so, A1l1 = A2l2
10𝐴 𝜌𝑙 𝜌𝑙
A2 = 11 1 R1 = 𝐴 1 and R2 = 𝐴 2
1 2
After putting the values of l2 and A2
121
R2 = 100 R1 So, resistance is increased by 21%
7 Using Kirchhoff’s laws find the current through each battery in the following network.

Ans- Applying Kirchhoff’s second law to the closed circuit ARBE1A

(I1 + I2) x 12+ I1 x 0.5 – 6 = 0 …………… (i)
Applying Kirchhoff’s second law to the closed circuit ARBE1A
(I1 + I2) x 12 + I2 x 1 – 10 = 0 …………… (ii)
On solving Eq. (i) and Eq.(ii) we get
I1 = -2.27 A and I2 = 2.86 A
Negative sign shows that I1 actually flows in a direction opposite to what is shown in fig.
44
8 Using Kirchhoff’s rules find the values of currents I1, I2 and I3.

Ans- For loop ABCFA-

E1 + I1 r1 – I2 r2 – E2 = 0
For the loop FCDEF
E2 + I2 r2 – I3 r3 – E3 = 0
At C, I3 = I1 + I2
Solving these equations we have I1 = 2/13 A, I2 = 7/13 A I3 = 9/13 A

9 Explain the principle of Wheatstone bridge for determining an unknown resistance. How is it realized
in actual practice in the laboratory.

10 Three identical resistors, each of resistance R when connected in series with a d c source dissipate
power X. If the resistors are connected in parallel to the same d c source, how much power will be
dissipated?
Ans-P = V2 /R
Effective resistance in series is 3R
Effective resistance in parallel is R/3 , Hence power = 9X
11 Derive the condition for balanced Wheatstone’s bridge.
12 The resistance of a tungsten filament at 150 0C is 133 Ω. What will be its resistance at 500 0C? Given
the temperature coefficient of tungsten is 0.0045/0C
Ans- Hint R = 𝑅0( 1 + 𝛼 𝛥T )
13 Define drift velocity and derive an expression for drift velocity of electrons in a conductor hence
deduce Ohm’s law.
14 State and explain Kirchhoff’s laws. In the electric network shown in the figure, use Kirchhoff’s rules to
calculate the power consumed by the resistance R=4Ω

15 A battery of emf 2V and internal resistance 0.1Ω is being charged by a current of 5A. What will be the
direction of current inside the battery? What is the potential difference between the terminals of the
battery?

Ans- During charging a battery the current inside the battery flows from the positive to the negative
terminal of the battery, so the terminal potential difference is greater than the emf
V = E +Ir = 2+5 x 0.1 V = 2.5V

45
 Five marks questions
Q NO. Questions
1 Define the term drift velocity.
On the basis of electron drift derive an expression for resistivity of a conductor in terms of number
density of free electrons and relaxation time.
On what factors does resistivity of a conductor depend on.
2 Define the terms internal resistance, potential difference and emf. Derive the relation between
internal resistance, emf and terminal potential difference of a cell. Draw a graph showing the variation
of current verses resistance connected to a cell of emf E and internal resistance r .
3 Two cells of emf E1 and E2 are and internal resistances r1 and r2 respectively are connected in series
and in parallel. Obtain expressions for the equivalent emf and effective resistance of the combination
in the two cases
4 State Kirchhoff’s laws for an electrical network. Using Kirchhoff’s laws , find the relation between the
resistances of four arms of a Wheatstone bridge when the bridge is balanced.
5 (a)Using the concept of drift velocity of charge carriers in a conductor deduce the relationship
between current density and resistivity of the conductor
(b) Two bulbs are marked 220V,100W and 220V and 50W respectively. They are connected in series
to 220V mains. Find the ratio of heat generated in them.

46
 UNIT-III
CHAPTER-4: MOVING CHARGES AND MAGNETISM
Magnetic Field: The space surrounding a magnet in which its magnetic force can be experienced is called
magnetic field.

Oersted’s experiment:
Oersted found that a magnetic field is
established around a current carrying conductor.
Magnetic field exists as long as there is current in
the wire.

Current element :
It is the product of current and length of infinitesimal segment of current carrying wire.
The current element is taken as a vector quantity. Its direction is same as the direction of current.
Current element AB = i dl A
B

i
dl


Biot-Savart’s law: Consider a current element dl of a conductor carrying current I. let P be a point having
   
position vector r with respect to current element dl . Let 𝜃 be the angle between dl and r
According to Biot-Savart law, the magnetic field dB at point P due to current
element is
1
(i) dB I (ii) dB∝dl (iii) dB sin 𝜃 (iv) dB∝
r2
Combining all the four factors, we get

I dl sin 
dB
r2
I dl sin 
dB = K
r2
The proportionality constant K depends on the medium between point P and the current element and
the system of units chosen. For free space and in SI units,
0
K= = 10− 7 T m A−1
4
 I dl sin 
 dB = 0
4 r2
  
As the direction of dB is perpendicular to the plane of dl and r , so from the above equation, we get
the vector form of the Biot-Savart law as

  0 I dl  r
dB =
4 r 3
47
   
The direction of dB is the direction of the vector dl  r . It is given by right hand screw rule. If we place
 
a right handed screw at point P perpendicular to the plane of paper and turn its handle from dl to r ,
 
then the direction in which the screw advances gives the direction of dB . Thus the direction of dB is
perpendicular to and into the plane of paper, as has been shown by encircled cross  at point P in the
figure.
Direction of Magnetic Field:
The direction of magnetic field is determined with the help of the following simple law
Right hand thumb rule : According to this rule if a straight current carrying conductor is held
in the right hand such that the thumb of the hand represents the direction of current flow, then
the direction of folding fingers will represent the direction of magnetic lines of force.
Fig. 21.4

Magnetic Field Due to Current carrying Circular loop along its axis:
Consider a circular loop of wire of radius a and
carrying current I, as shown in figure.
Biot-Savart law, the field at point P
due to the current element is
 0 I dl sin 
dB =
4 r2
 
Since dl ⊥ s , i.e., 𝜃 = 90 , therefore
 Idl
dB = 0 2
4 s

The field dB lies in the plane of paper
 Since  0 and I are constant, and s and aare same for
and is perpendicular to s , as shown
by PQ.Let  be the angle between OP all points on the circular loop, we have
and CP. Then dB can be resolved into 𝐵=
two rectangular components.  0 Ia  0 Ia 0 I a 2
4 s 3 
dI = .2 a = [  dI
1. dBsin  along the axis, 2. 4 s 3 2 s3
dBcos  perpendicular to the axis. 1
As, s = (r 2 + a 2 ) 2
For any two diametrically opposite
elements of the loop, the components 0 I a 2
 B= 3
perpendicular to the axis of the loop 2 (r 2 + a 2 ) 2
will be equal and opposite and will
If the coil consists on N turns, then
cancel out. Their axial components
0 N I a 2
will be in the same direction, i.e., B= 3
.
along CP and get added up. 2 (r + a )
2 2 2

Therefore, total magnetic field at the

Magnetic field at the centre: For the field at the centre
point P in the direction CP is
of the loop, r = 0. Therefore
𝐵 =  dB sin 
a  Idl 0 N I
𝐵𝑢𝑡 sin  =and dB = 0 2 B=
s 4 s 2a
 Idl a
B=  0. 2 .
4 s s

48
Ampere’s Law:
Ampere’s circuital law: This law states that the point of the circular loop is

line integral of the magnetic field B directed along the tangent to
around any closed circuit is equal to  0 the circle at that point. By
symmetry, the magnitude of
(permeability constant) times the total 
current I threading or passing through this field B is same at every point
closed circuit. of the circular loop. Therefore,
 
Mathematically  .dI = 0 I
B
 
Application of Ampere’s law to an  B.dl =  B dl cos 0 = B dl = B.2 r Form
infinitely long straight conductor: Ampere’s circuital law,
Figure shows a circular loop of radius r 0 I
around an infinitely long straight wire B.2  r =  0 I  B=
2 r
carrying a current I.

As the field lines are circular, the field B
at any
Straight Solenoid:
Cylindrical coil of many tightly wound
turns of insulated wire with generally diameter
of the coil smaller than its length is called a
solenoid.

The magnetic field along the axis of the

solenoid is given by the expression
B in = μ0 ni
Where’ i’ is the current flowing in the
solenoid and ‘n’ is the number of turns per
unit length of the solenoid.
The magnetic field at the ends of the solenoid
is given by the expression
1
B end = (  0 ni )
2
Force on a moving charge in uniform magnetic field:
If a particle carrying a positive charge q and moving with velocity v enters a magnetic field B then it
experiences a force F which is given by the expression      → 

F = q(v  B)  F = qvB sin  v

B
     

where velocity of the particle, B= magnetic field q, m

v =

     

     
49
Fig. 21.25
 (1) Zero force : Force on charged particle will be zero (i.e. F = 0) if
(i) No field i.e. B = 0  F = 0
(ii) Neutral particle i.e. q = 0  F = 0
(iii) Rest charge i.e. v = 0  F = 0
(iv) Moving charge i.e.  = 0o or  = 180o  F = 0
(2) Direction of force : The force F is always perpendicular to both the velocity v and the field B in
accordance with Right Hand Screw Rule, though v and B themselves may or may not be perpendicular to each
other.
Direction of force on charged particle in magnetic field can also be find by Fleming's Left Hand Rule
(FLHR).
Here, First finger (indicates) → Direction of magnetic field
Middle finger → Direction of motion of positive charge or direction, Opposite to the motion of negative
charge.

Thumb → Direction of force

→
→
Fm Fm

→ →
B → B
 → v
v 90°

Trajectory of a Charged Particle in a Magnetic:

(1) Straight line : If the direction of a v is parallel or antiparallel to B ,  = 0 or  = 180o and therefore F =
0. Hence the trajectory of the particle is a straight line.
 = 0o
q B
F
q
 = 180o

Fig. 21.28
(2) Circular path : If v is perpendicular to B i.e.  = 90o, hence particle will experience a maximum
magnetic force Fmax = qvB which act's in a direction perpendicular to the motion of charged particle. Therefore
the trajectory of the particle is a circle.

× × × × × ×
v + v
× × × × × × ×

× × × × × × ×
+ F +
× × × × × × ×

× × × × × × ×
v + v
× × × × × × ×

Fig. 21.29

50
 (i) In this case path of charged particle is circular and magnetic force provides the necessary centripetal
force i.e.
mv 2
qvB =  radius of path r =
mv
=
p
=
2mK
=
1 2 mV
r qB qB qB B q

where p = momentum of charged particle and K = kinetic energy of charged particle (gained
by charged particle after accelerating through potential difference V) then p = m v = 2m K = 2m qV
2m
(ii) If T is the time period of the particle then T = (i.e., time period (or frequency) is independent of
qB
speed of particle).
(3) Helical path : When the charged particle is moving at an angle to the field (other than 0o, 90o, or 180o).
Particle describes a path called helix. Y →
→ p B
→
B
v v sin v r
  X
q, m
Z v cos

m( vsin θ ) Fig. 21.30

(i) The radius of this helical path is r =
qB
2 m
(ii) Time period and frequency do not depend on velocity and so they are given by T =
qB
qB
=
2 m
and
(iii) The pitch of the helix, (i.e., linear distance travelled in one rotation) will be given by
m
p = T (v cos ) = 2 (v cos )
qB
(iv) If pitch value is p, then number of pitches obtained in length l given as
l l
Number of pitches = and time required t =
p v cos 
Force on a moving charge in uniform magnetic field and electric field (Lorentz Force) :
When the moving charged particle is subjected simultaneously to both electric field E and magnetic field B

, the moving charged particle will experience electric force Fe = q E and magnetic force Fm = q(v  B) ; so

the net force on it will be F = q [ E + ( v  B )] . Which is the famous ‘Lorentz-force equation’.

Force On a Current Carrying Conductor In Magnetic Field:
In case of current carrying conductor in a magnetic field force experienced by its small length element is
d F = id l  B ; id l = current element d F = i(d l  B)
× × × × × × ×

× × × × × × ×

× × × × × ×
dF
× × × × × × ×
i
× × × × × ×
dl
× × × × × × ×

Fig. 21.35

51
 Total magnetic force  
F = d F = i(d l  B) . If magnetic field is uniform i.e., B = constant


F = i[ dl]  B = i(L  B)

 dl = L' = vector sum of all the length elements from initial to final point. Which is in accordance with the
law of vector addition is equal to length vector L joining initial to final point.

(For a straight conductor F = Bil sin  )

Direction of force : The direction of force is always perpendicular to the plane containing idl and B and

is same as that of cross-product of two vectors ( A  B) with A = i dl .

→
dF

→
→ P →
i dl
i dl B  →
 P
B

→
dF


The direction of force when current element i dl and B are perpendicular to each other can also be
determined by applying either of the following rules.
Fleming’s left-hand rule : Stretch the fore-finger, central finger and thumb of left hand mutually
perpendicular. Then if the fore-finger points in the direction of field B and the central in the direction of current
i, the thumb will point in the direction of force.

52
Force Between Two Parallel Current Carrying Conductors:

Consider two long parallel wires AB and CD carrying

currents I1 and I2 in the same direction. Let r be
the separation between them.
The magnetic field produced by current I1 at
any point on wire CD is
 I
B1 = 0 1
2 r
This field acts perpendicular to the wire CD
and points into the plane of paper. It exerts a
force on current carrying wire CD. The force
acting on length l of the wire CD will be
 I  II
F2 = I 2 IB1 sin 90 = I 2l. 0 1 = 0 1 2 l
2 r 2 r
Force per unit length,
(i) Parallel currents attract, F  II
f = 2 = 0 1 2
(ii) Antiparallel currents repel. l 2 r
According to Fleming’s left hand rule, this
force acts at right angles to CD, towards
AB in the plane of the paper. Similarly, an One ampere is that value of steady current,
equal and opposite force is exerted on the which on flowing in each of the two parallel
wire AB by the field of wire CD. Thus infinitely long conductors of negligible cross-
when the currents in the two wires are in section placed in vacuum at a distance of 1 m
the same direction, the forces between from each other, produces between them a
them are attractive. force of 2 X 10-7 newton per metre of their
Definition of ampere: length.
If I1=I2 =1A and r =1m, then

f = 0 = 2  10 −7 Nm −1
2

Torque experienced by a current loop in uniform magnetic field:

Consider a rectangular coil PQRS suspended in a

uniform magnetic field B , with its axis
perpendicular to the field
Let I be the current flowing through the
coil PQRS, a and b be the sides of the coil PQRS,
A = ab = area of the coil and 𝜃 is the angle

between the direction of B and normal to
the plane of the coil.
According to Fleming’s left hand rule, the
magnetic forces on sides PS and QR are
equal, opposite and collinear (along the
axis of the loop),so their resultant is zero.
The side PQ experiences a normal inward
force equal to IbB while the side RS
53
 experiences an equal normal outward
force. These two forces form a couple
which exerts a torque given by
 = Force x perpendicular distance
= IbB x a sin𝜃 = IBA sin𝜃
If the rectangular loop has N turns, the
torque increases N times i.e.,
 = NIBA sin𝜃
ButNIA = m, the magnetic moment of the
loop, so
 = mB sin𝜃 
In vector notation, the torque  is given by
  
 =mxB

The direction of the torque t is such that it
rotates the loop clockwise about the axis of
suspension.

Current loop as magnetic dipole and its magnetic dipole moment:

A current carrying circular coil behaves as a bar magnet whose magnetic moment is M = NiA; Where N =
Number of turns in the coil, i = Current through the coil and A = Area of the coil
Magnetic moment of a current carrying coil is a vector and it's direction is given by right hand thumb rule

Current
S N
→
M

Fig. 21.47

(1) For a given perimeter circular shape have maximum area. Hence maximum magnetic
moment.
(2) For a any loop or coil B at centre due to current in loop, and M are always parallel

54
Moving Coil Galvanometer:
A galvanometer is a device to detect current in a
circuit, the magnitude of which depends on
the strength of current. The torque  deflects
the coil through an
Principle: It works on the principle that a current
angle 𝛼. A restoring
carrying coil placed in a magnetic field experience a torque is set up in the
torque. coil due to the elasticity
Construction: A pivoted-type galvanometer of the springs such that
consists of a rectangular coil of fine insulated  restoring = k Where k
copper wire wound on a light aluminium frame. is the torsion constant of
The motion of the coil is controlled by a pair of hair the springs i.e., torque
springs of phosphor-bronze. The springs provide required to produce unit
the restoring torque. A light aluminium pointer angular twist. In
attached to the coil measures its deflection on a equilibrium position,
suitable scale. Restoring torque = Deflecting torque
The coil is placed symmetrically between the NBAI
k𝛼 = NIBA so  =
concave poles of a permanent horse-shoe magnet. k
There is a cylindrical soft iron core which not only Thus the deflection produced in the
makes the field radial but also increases the strength galvanometer coil is proportional to the
of the magnetic field. Theory current flowing through it.
and working: As the field is radial, the plane of the Functions:

coil always remains parallel to the field B . When a (i) A uniform magnetic field provides a
current flows through the coil, a torque acts on it. It linear current scale.
is  = Force x perpendicular distance (ii) A soft iron core makes the field radial.
= NIbB x a sin 90 = NIB(ab) = NIBA ( Here It also increases the strength of the magnetic
𝜃=90) field and hence increases the sensitivity of the
galvanometer.
.
Current sensitivity (Si) : The current sensitivity of a galvanometer is defined as the deflection produced in
the galvanometer per unit current flowing through it.
 NBA
Si = = Here C is torsion constant
i C
Voltage sensitivity (SV) : Voltage sensitivity of a galvanometer is defined as the deflection produced in the
galvanometer per unit voltage applied to it.
  S i NBA
SV = = = =
V iR R RC
Increasing the current sensitivity of a galvanometer may not necessary increase its voltage sensitivity
because the voltage sensitivity depends on current sensitivity and the resistance of the galvanometer. If we
increase the current sensitivity then it is not certain that voltage sensitivity will be increased.

55
 Conversion of Galvanometer into Ammeter:
A galvanometer may be converted into
ammeter by using very small resistance in
parallel with the galvanometer coil. The small
resistance connected in parallel is called a shunt.
If G is resistance of galvanometer, Ig is current
in galvanometer for full scale deflection, then
for conversion of galvanometer into ammeter of
range I ampere, the shunt is given by
P.D. across Galv. = P.D. across Shunt
IgG = S (I – Ig)

S = Ig G / ( I – Ig)
Effective resistance = GS / (G+ S)

Conversion of Galvanometer into Voltmeter:

A galvanometer can be
converted in voltmeter by
connecting a very large
resistance in parallel to the
galvanometer.
Large resistance connected
in parallel given by
R = V / Ig - G

Multiple Choice questions

1. A wire of length L carries a current of I ampere on bending it into a circle, the value of its magnetic
moment will be:- (a) IL2 (b) IL2/2 (c) IL2/ (d) IL2/4
2. Unit of magnetic flux density is :-
(a) Tesla (b) Weber/metre2
(c) Newton/ampere-metre (d) All of the above
3. A charged particle is moving with velocity v under the magnetic field B. The force acting on the particle
will be maximum if:-
(a) v and B are in same direction (b) v and B are in opposite direction
(c) v and B are perpendicular (d) None

56
4. The radius of circular loop is r and a current i is flowing in it. The equivalent magnetic moment will be:-
(a) ir (b) 2πr
(c) iπr2 (d) i/r2
5. A magnetic field of 5.0 × 10–4 T just perpendicular to the electric field of 15 kV/m in their effect an
electron beam passes undeflected and perpendicular to both of them. The speed of the electrons is:-
(a) 75 m/s (b) 3 × 104 m/s
(c) 7.5 × 104 m/s (d) 3 × 107 m/s
6. There are two straight long wires, insulated from each other, along x and y axis carrying equal currents as
shown in figure. AB and CD are lines in xy plane and at 45° with the axes. The magnetic field of the
system is zero at points on the line :-

(a) AB (b) OB but not on OA

(c) CD (d) OC but not on OD
7. An electron, moving in a circular orbit of radius 'R' with a period 'T'. The equivalent magnetic dipole
moment of circular orbit is:-
(a) 2eR/T (b) eR/T

(c) eR2T (d) R2e/T

8. Two long parallel wires are at a distance of 1m. If both of them carry 1A of current in same direction. The
magnetic force of attraction on unit length of each wire will be:-
(a) 2 × 10–7 N/m (b) 4 × 10–7 N/m (c) 8 × 10–7 N/m (d) 10–7 N/m
9. A long solenoid carrying a current produces a magnetic field B along its axis. If the current is doubled
and the number of turns per cm is halved, the new value of the magnetic field is:-

(a) B/2 (b) B (c) 2B (d) 4B

10. A closely wound flat circular coil of 25 turns of wire has diameter of 10 cm and carries a current of 4
ampere. Determine the magnetic flux density at the centre of the coil:-
(a) 1.679 × 10–5 T (b) 2.028 × 10–4 T (c) 1.257 × 10–3 T (d) 1.512 × 10–6 T
11. A proton and an α-particle moving with the same velocity and enter into a uniform magnetic field which
is acting normal to the plane of their motion. The ratio of the radii of the circular paths described by the
proton and a-particle respectively:-
(a) 1 : 2 (b) 1 : 4 (c) 1 : 16 (d) 4 : 1

57
12. In the shown figure magnetic field at point A will be :-

0 I 0 I 0 I
(a) 4 (b) 4R (c) 4 R (d) Zero
13. A long solenoid with 20 turns per cm is made to produce a magnetic field of 20 mT inside the solenoid.
The necessary current will nearly be:-
(a) 8.0 ampere (b) 4.0 ampere (c) 2.0 ampere (d) 1.0 ampere
14. A current is flowing in a circular coil of radius R and the magnetic field at its centre is Bo. It what distance
from the centre on the axis of the coil, the magnetic field will be Bo/8:-

(a) 3 R (b) 3 R (c) 2R (d) 8R

15. A rectangular coil 20 cm × 20cm, has 100 turns and carries a current of 1A. It is placed in a uniform
magnetic field 0.5T with the direction of magnetic field parallel to the plane of the coil. The magnitude
of the torque required to hold this coil in this position is:-
(a) zero (b) 200N-m (c) 2N-m (d) 10N-m
16. A current loop of area 0.01m2 and carrying a current of 10A is held perpendicular to a magnetic field of
0.1T, the torque in N–m acting on the loop is :-

(a) 0 (b) 0.001 (c) 0.01 (d) 1.1

17. In a region constant uniform electric and magnetic field is present. Both field are parallel. In this region a
charge released from rest, then path of particle is:-
(a) Circle (b) Helical (c) Straight line (d) Ellipse
18. 2A current is flowing in a circular loop of radius 1m. Magnitude of magnetic field at the centre of circular
loop will be:-
(a) 0/2 (b) 20 (c) 0 (d) 0/4

19. A long straight wire of radius 'a' carries a steady current i. The current is uniformly distributed across its
cross section. The ratio of the magnetic field at a/2 and 2a distances from the axis of the wire is:
(a) 4 (b) 1 (c) 1/2 (d) 1/4
20. A and B are two concentric circular loops carrying current i1 and i2 as shown in figure. If ratio of their
radii is 1:2 and ratio of the flux densities at the centre O due to A and B is 1:3 then the ratio of current
will be :-
(a) 1/2 (b) 1/3
(c) 1/4 (d) 1/6

58
21 .If we double the radius of a coil keeping the current through it unchanged, then the magnetic field at
any point at a
large distance from the centre becomes approximately
(a) double (b)three times (c ) four times (d) one-fourth

22 A galvanometer acting as ammeter will have

(a) high resistance in parallel (b) high resistance in series
(c) low resistance in parallel (d) low resistance in series
23. If resistance of a galvanometer is 6 Ω and it can measure a maximum current of 2 A. Then required
shunt resistance to convert it into an ammeter reading up to 6 A, will be
(a) 2 Ω (b) 3 Ω (c) 4 Ω (d) 5 Ω
24. A galvanometer can be changed into voltmeter by providing
(a) low resistance in series (b) low resistance in parallel
(c) high resistance in series (d) high resistance in parallel
25. If the number of turns in a moving coil galvanometer is increased, its current sensitivity
(a) increases (b) remains same (c) decreases (d) may increase or decrease
ANSWERS(Multiple Choice Questions):

1.d 2.d 3.c 4.c 5.d 6.a 7.d 8.a 9.b 10.c

11.a 12..b 13a 14.a 15.c 16.a 17.c 18.c 19.b 20.d

21.c 22.c 23.b 24.c 25.a

ASSERTION AND REASONING QUESTIONS:

For these questions two statements are given-one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled
Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as
given below.
a. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b. Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c. A is true but R is false
d. A is false and R is also false.
1. Assertion: Free electron always keep on moving in a conductor even then no magnetic force act on
them in magnetic field unless a current is passed through it.
Reason: The average velocity of free electron is zero.
2. Assertion: A circular loop carrying current lies in XY plane with its center at origin
having a magnetic flux in Z-axis direction.
Reason: Magnetic flux direction is independent of the direction of current in the conductor.
3. Assertion: The energy of charged particle moving in a uniform magnetic field does not change.
Reason: Work done by magnetic field on the charge is zero.

59
 4. Assertion: If an electron, while coming vertically from outer space, enters the earth's
magnetic field, it is deflected towards west.
Reason: Electron has negative charge.
5. Assertion: A direct current flows through a metallic rod, produced magnetic field
only outside the rod.
Reason: There is no flow of charge carriers inside the rod.
6. Assertion: Magnetic field interacts with a moving charge and not with a stationary charge.
Reason: A moving charge produces a magnetic field.
7. Assertion: The magnetic field at the ends of a very long current carrying solenoid is half
of that at the center.
Reason: If the solenoid is sufficiently long, the field within it is uniform.
8. Assertion: If a charged particle is moving on a circular path in a perpendicular
magnetic field, the momentum of the particle is not changing.
Reason: Velocity of the particle in not changing in the magnetic field.
9. Assertion: If two long wires, hanging freely are connected to a battery in series, they
come closer to each other.
Reason: Force of attraction acts between the two wires carrying current.
10. Assertion: A current I flows along the length of an infinitely long straight and thin
walled pipe. Then the magnetic field at any point inside the pipe is zero.
⃗ . 𝑑𝑙 = 𝜇0 𝐼.
Reason: ∮ 𝐵

ANSWERS(Assertion & Reason Question):

Q.No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ANS a c a b d a b d d a

VERY SHORT QUESTION (two marks)

1. Under what condition is the force acting on a charge moving through a uniform magnetic field
minimum and maximum?

2. What is the nature of force, when the two parallel conductors carry currents in the (i) same
direction (ii) opposite direction?
Ans. (i) Force is attractive. (ii) Force is repulsive
3. What is the resistance of an ideal voltmeter and an ammeter?
Ans. The resistance of an ideal voltmeter is infinite and that of an ammeter is zero.

60
4. Which one of the following will have a minimum frequency of revolution,
when projected with the same velocity v perpendicular to the magnetic field B: (i) α – particle
and (ii) β – particle. Explain with reason.
Ans: Frequency of revolution v = qB/2πm and q/m of α – particle is less, hence α – particle
will have minimum frequency of revolution
5. Equal currents I and I are flowing through two infinitely long parallel wires. What will be the
magnetic field at a point mid-way when the currents are flowing in the same direction? Justify
Ans: Zero, because fields due to two wires will be equal but opposite
6. An electron is moving with velocity v along the axis of a long straight solenoid carrying
current I. What will be the force acting on the electron due to the magnetic field of the
solenoid?
Ans: Zero, as a force on a charged particle moving in a magnetic field, is F= Bqv sin θ
Here both v and B are along the axis of – solenoid, so θ = 0° between them. Hence F= qvB sin
θ = 0.
7. In the expression F = q (V x B) , which two pairs of vectors are perpendicular to each other?
Ans : F & V and F & B
8. An alpha particle and a proton are moving in the plane of paper in a region where there is uniform
magnetic field B directed normal to the plane of paper.If two particles have equal linear momenta,
what will be the ratio of the radii of their trajectories in the field?
Ans: 1:2

9. It is desired to pass only 10% of the current through a galvanometer of resistance 90 Ohm . How much
shunt resistance should be connected across the galvanometer?
Ans: 10 Ohm
10. How radial magnetic field is obtained in moving coil galvanometer?

Short Answer Question (Three Marks)

1. A current of 10A flows through a semicircular wire of radius 2cm as shown in figure (a). What
is direction and
magnitude of the magnetic field at the centre of semicircle? Would your answer change if the
wire were bent
as shown in figure (b)?

Ans: (a) 5 x10-5 outward

(b) 5 x10-5 inward
61
 2. Derive an expression for the force acting on a current carrying conductor placed
in a uniform magnetic field. Write the condition for which this force will have
(1) maximum (2) minimum value.

3. A straight wire carries a current of 10 A. An electron moving at 107 m/s is at distance 2.0
cm from the wire. Find the force acting on the electron if itsvelocity is directed
towards the wire.
16
Ans: F 1.6 10 N.
4. State Biot-Savarts law. Derive an expression for magnetic field at the center of a
circular coil of n -turns carrying current I.
5. Two straight parallel current carrying conductors are kept at a distance r from each other
in air. The direction for current in both the conductors is the same. Find the magnitude and
direction of the force between them. Hence define one ampere.
6. A circular coil of wire consisting of 100 turns, each of radius 8.0 cm carriesa current of
0.40 A . What is the magnitude of the magnetic field B at the centre of the coil?
7. A galvanometer coil has a resistance of 12 and the metre shows full scale deflection for
a current of 3mA . How will you convert the metre into a voltmeter of range 0 to 18V ?
8. A proton , a deutron and an alpha particle having the same kinetic energy are allowed to
pass through a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to their direction of motion.
Compare the radii of their circular paths.
Ans: 1: 2:1

9. The wires which connect the battery of an automobile to its starting motor carry a current
of 300A (for a short time). What is the force per unit length between the wires if they are
70cmlong and 1.5cm apart? Is the force attractiveor repulsive?
Ans: F = 1.2 N, repulsive
10 A square coil of side 10cm consists of 20 turns and carries a current of 12A. The coil is
suspended vertically and the normal to the plane of the coil makes an angle of 30o with the direction
of a uniform horizontal magnetic field of magnitude 0.80T. What is the magnitude of torque
experienced by the coil?
Ans: Torque = 0.96 Nm

Long Answer questions ( Five Marks)

1. (a) Draw a labelled diagram of a moving coil galvanometer. Prove that in a radial magnetic
field, the deflection of the coil is directly proportional to the current flowing in the coil.
(b) What is the importance of the radial magnetic field?
2. Derive an expression for the force per unit length acting on each of the two straight parallel metallic
conductors carrying current in the same direction and opposite direction and kept near each other.
Depict the pattern of magnetic field lines around them in both the case.
3. With the help of a circuit , show how a moving coil galvanometer can be converted into an
ammeter and voltmeter of given range. Write the necessary mathematical formula.
4. To convert a given galvanometer into a voltmeter of ranges 2V , V and V/2 volt, resistance R1
, R2 and R3 ohm respectively, are required to be connected in series with the galvanometer.
Obtain the relationship between R1 , R2 and R3
Ans: R3 = 3R1 – 2R2

62
5. (a) Derive an expression for the torque acting on a rectangular current carrying loop kept in a
uniform magnetic field B. Indicate the direction of torque acting on the loop
(b) A circular coil of 20 turns and radius 10 cm is placed in a uniform magneticfield of 0.10 T
normal to the plane of the coil. If the current in the coil is 5.0 A,what is the: (The coil is
made of copper wire of cross-sectional area 10 5m2 , andthe free electron density in copper
is given to be about1029m 3 ). Ans: Torque = Zero
6. (a) State the principle of the working of a moving coil galvanometer, giving its labeled
diagram.
(b) “Increasing the current sensitivity of a galvanometer may not necessarily increase its
voltage sensitivity.” Justify this statement.
(c) Outline the necessary steps to convert a galvanometer of resistance RG into an ammeter of a given
range.
7.(a) Write the expression for the force, , acting on a charged particle of charge ‘q’, moving

with a velocity in the presence of both electric field and magnetic field . Obtain
the condition under which the particle moves undeflected through the fields.
(b). A rectangular loop of size l × b carrying a steady current I is placed in a uniform magnetic

field . Prove that the torque acting on the loop is give by where is the
magnetic moment of the loop.
8. (a) Explain, giving reasons, the basic difference in converting a galvanometer into (i) a
voltmeter and (ii) an ammeter.
(b).Two long straight parallel conductors carrying steady currents I1 and I2 are separated by a
distance 'd'. Explain briefly, with the help of a suitable diagram, how the magnetic field
due to one conductor acts on the other. Hence deduce the expression for the force acting
between the two conductors. Mention the nature of this force.
9. (a) Using Biot − Savart’s law, derive the expression for the magnetic field in the vector form
at a point on the axis of a circular current loop.
(b).Two concentric circular coils A and B of radii 10 cm and 6 cm respectively, lie in the
same vertical plane containing the north to south direction. Coil A has 30 turns and
carries a current of 10 A . Coil B has 40 turns and carries a current of 15 A .The sense of
the current in A is anticlockwise and clockwise in B for an observer looking at the coils
facing west. Give the magnitude and direction of net magnetic field

63
 CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS
1. Motion of Charged Particle Inside Magnetic Field :A charged particle moving in a magnetic field
experiences a force that is proportional to the strength of the magnetic field, the component of the velocity that
is perpendicular to the magnetic field and the charge of the particle. This force is given by ⃗𝑭 = 𝒒(𝒗
⃗ × ⃗𝑩
⃗),

⃗ is the instantaneous velocity ofthe particle, and ⃗𝑩

where q is the electric charge of the particle, 𝒗 ⃗ is the
magnetic field (in tesla).
The direction of force is determined by the rules of cross product of two vectors.
⃗ × ⃗𝑩
Force is perpendicular to both velocity and magnetic field. Its direction is same as𝒗 ⃗ if q is positive and

⃗ × ⃗𝑩
opposite of 𝒗 ⃗ if q is negative.
The force is always perpendicular to both the velocity of the particle and the magnetic field that created it.
Because the magnetic force is always perpendicular to the motion, the magnetic field can do no work on an
isolated charge. The direction of force on a moving charge particle can also be found using Fleming’s Left
Hand Rule as shown in figure below.

(i) In the expression F = q (V x B) , which two pairs of vectors are perpendicular to each other.
(ii) A beam of positively charged particles moving along +x axis, experience a force in +y direction due
to a magnetic field. What is the direction of magnetic field?
(iii) When is the charged particle moving in a uniform magnetic field experience maximum and
minimum force?
OR
An electron does not suffer any deflection while passing through a region of uniform magnetic
field. What is the direction of the magnetic field?

2. HELICAL MOTION OF CHARGED PARTICLES : A charged particle of mass m and charge q,

⃗⃗ with an initial velocity 𝒗
entering a region of magnetic field 𝑩 ⃗⃗ . Let this velocity
⃗ making an angle θ with𝑩
have a component 𝒗𝒑 (= 𝒗 𝐜𝐨𝐬 𝛉) parallel to the magnetic field and a component𝒗𝒏 (= 𝒗 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝛉) normal
(perpendicular) to it. There is no force on a charged particle in the direction of the field. Hence the particle
continues to travel with the velocity𝒗𝒑 parallel to the field. The normal component 𝒗𝒏 of the particle results in
⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗⃗𝒏 × ⃗⃗⃗
a Lorentz force𝒒(𝒗 𝒗𝒏 and ⃗⃗⃗
𝑩 )which is perpendicular to both ⃗⃗⃗⃗ 𝑩 .The particle thus has a tendency to
perform a circular motion in a plane perpendicular to the magnetic field. When this is coupled with the
velocity parallel to the field, the resulting trajectory will be a helix along the magnetic field line, as shown in
64
 𝒎 𝒗𝒏 𝒎𝒗 𝐬𝐢𝐧 𝛉
Figure below. The radius of the helical path is given by 𝒓 = = (By the fact that required
𝒒𝑩 𝒒𝑩

centripetal force is provided by Lorentz force).The distance moved along the magnetic field during the period
of one rotation is called pitch (𝑝 = 𝑣𝑝 𝑇, where 𝑇 is time taken by particle to complete one rotation). Since the
Lorentz force is normal to the velocity of each point, the field does no work on the particle and the magnitude
of velocity remains the same.

(i) Two charged particles A and B having the same charge, mass and speed enter into a magnetic
field in such a way that the initial path of A makes an angle of 30° and that of B makes an angle
of 90° with the field.
Compare the curvature of particle A and B.
(ii) An electron having momentum 3.2 x 10-23 kg m/s enters a region of uniform magnetic field of 0.2
T. The magnetic field vector makes an angle of 30° with the initial velocity vector of the electron.
Calculate the radius of the helical path of the electron in the field.
(iii) A neutron enters a region of uniform magnetic field 0.15 T with a velocity making an angle 30°
with the magnetic field vector. What is the path of the neutron?
OR
⃗⃗ = 𝟐𝝅 × 𝟏𝟎−𝟐 𝒊̂ 𝑻 . A proton is shot
The magnetic field in a certain region of space is given by 𝑩
into the field with velocity⃗⃗⃗𝒗 = (𝟐 × 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒊̂ + 𝟒 × 𝟏𝟎𝟓 𝒋̂) 𝒎/𝒔. The proton follows a helical path in
the field. What is the distance moved by proton in the x-direction during the period of one
rotation in the yz-plane?
(a) 0.312m (a) 0.209m (c )0.450m (d) 0.157m
3. Mass Spectrometer: The mass spectrometer is an instrument which can measure the masses and relative
concentrations of atoms and molecules. It makes use of the basic magnetic force on a moving charged particle.
The process begins with an ion source, a device like an electron gun. The ion source gives ions their charge(q),
accelerates them to some velocity 𝑣, and directs a beam of them into the next stage of the spectrometer. This
next region is a velocity selector that only allows particles with a particular value of 𝑣 to get through
undeflected. The velocity selector has both an electric field and a magnetic field, perpendicular to one another
and also to velocity of ions. . In the final region, there is only a uniform magnetic field perpendicular to the
65
 velocity of ions and so the charged particles move in circular arcs with radii proportional to particle mass.
𝒎𝒗
𝒓=
𝒒𝑩

(i) What is the Principle of velocity selector ?

(ii) Which of the concept is used in mass spectroscopy?
𝑟1 3
(iii) The ratio of radius of semi-circular path of two ions having same charge in mass spectrometer is = 4.
𝑟2

What is the ratio of their masses?

OR
Which particle will trace a circular trajectory with largest radius?

66
4. Moving coil galvanometer: Moving coil galvanometer is an electromagnetic device that can measure
small values of current. It consists of permanent cylindrically cut magnets, coil, soft iron core, pivoted
spring, non-metallic frame, scale, and pointer. The magnetic field in moving coil galvanometer is radial
in nature it means the magnetic field always lies in the plane of coil which makes the torque acting on
the coil maximum. When the current is passed through the coil a torque acts on the coil. Due to this
torque the coil rotates and with the coil spring also rotates. This rotation in the coil generates a restoring
torque in the spring. The restoring torque is given by 𝑘∅, where ∅ is the deflection in coil and 𝑘 is
torsional constant of spring. In equilibrium condition torque in the coil due to current is equal to the
restoring torque in the spring.

(i) Give the use of moving coil galvanometer.

(ii) How radial magnetic field id obtained in a moving coil galvanometer?
(iii) In a moving coil galvanometer, having a coil of N-turns of area A and carrying current I is
placed in a radial field of strength B. What is the torque acting on the coil?
OR
Give the working principle of moving coil galvanometer.

67
 CHAPTER-5: Magnetism and Matter
BAR MAGNET:

A bar magnet consist of two equal and

opposite magnetic pole separated by a small
distance. Poles are not exactly at the ends.
The shortest distance between two poles is
called effective length (Le) and is less than its
geometric length (Lg). for bar magnet Le = 2l
and Le = (5/6) Lg. for semi circular magnet
Lg = R and Le = 2 R

MAGNETIC FIELD LINES

The magnetic field line is an imaginary curve

whose tangent at any point determines the
direction of magnetic field B at that location

Properties of Magnetic Field Lines

1. A magnet's magnetic field lines (or the magnetic field lines of a current-
carrying solenoid) create closed continuous loops.
2. Magnetic field lines extend from the north pole to the south pole outside
themagnet's body.
3. The direction of the net magnetic field (B ) at any given place is represented
by the tangent to the magnetic field line.
4.The number of magnetic field lines travelling properly through unit area
surrounding a place represents the amount of the magnetic field at that point. As a
result, lines that are densely packed represent a high magnetic field, whereas lines
that are sparsely packed represent a weak magnetic field
5.Magentic field lines never intersect each other because at the point of intersection
their will two direction of magnetic field which is impossible.

68
Magnetic Diople: A magnetic dipole is made up of two poles that are diametrically opposed and
separated by a short distance.

Magnetic Dipole Moment:The product of the strength of either pole (m) and the magnetic length (2 l )
of the magnet is the magnetic dipole moment.

The magnetic dipole moment is a vector quantity that runs from the magnet's southpole to its north
pole, as shown in figure.

We shall show that the SI unit of M is joule/tesla or ampere Metre2

SI unit of pole strength is Am.

Bar magnet as an equivalent solenoid

A current loop is known to function as a magnetic dipole.
All magnetic phenomena, according to Ampere's idea, may be described in terms ofcirculating currents.
Magnetic field lines for a bar magnet and a current carrying solenoid are quite similar in figure. As a
result, a bar magnet, like a solenoid, may be conceived of as a huge number of circulating currents. A
bar magnet is similar toa solenoid in that it may be cut. The magnetic field lines stay continuous, coming
from one solenoid's face and entering the second solenoid's face. If we move a tiny compass needle
between a bar magnet and a current carrying solenoid, we will see that the deflections of the needle
are identical in both situations.

Magnetic Field intensity due to a magnetic dipole ( Bar Magnet) along its axis and perpendicular to
its axis:

69
 Torque on a magnetic dipole( Bar Magnet) in a uniform magnetic field:

Magnetic Properties of Materials – Para- , Dia- and ferro- magnetic substances with examples:

Property Diamagnetic Paramagnetic Ferromagnetic

substance magnetic substance substance
1. Effect of They are feebly They are feebly They are strongly
magnets repelled by magnets attracted by attracted by
magnets magnets
2. In external Acquire feeble Acquire feeble Acquire strong
magnetic field magnetization in magnetization in magnetization in the
the opposite the direction of the direction of the
direction of the magnetizing field magnetizing field
magnetizing field

3. In a non- Tend to move Tend to move Tend to move slowly

uniform slowly from slowly from weaker from weaker to
magnetic field stronger to weaker to stronger parts of stronger parts of the
parts of the field the field field
4. In a uniform A freely suspended A freely suspended A freely suspended
magnetic field diamagnetic rod paramagnetic rod ferromagnetic rod
align itself align itself parallel align itself parallel
perpendicular to the to the field to the field
field

5. Susceptibility Susceptibility is Susceptibility is Susceptibility is very

value(χm) small and negative. small and positive. large and positive.
-1 ≤ χm≤ 0 0 ≤ χm≤ ε χm ≥1000
6. Relative Slightly less than 1 Slightly greater than Of the order of
permeability 0 ≤µr ≤1 1 thousand
value (µr) 0 < µr < 1+ ε µr > 1000
70
7. permeability µ < µo µ > µo µ >> µo
value (µ)
8. Effect of Susceptibility is Susceptibility varies Susceptibility
temperature independent of inversely as decreases with
temperature temperature temperature in a
χm α 1/ T complex manner.
χm α 1/( T- Tc)
(T >Tc
9. Removal of Magnetisation lasts As soon as the Magnetisation is
magnetizing as long as the magnetising field is retained even after
field magnetizing field is removed , the magnetising
applied Magnetisation lost. field is removed.
10. Variation of M changes linearly M changes linearly M changes with
M with H with H with H and attains Hnon-linearly and
saturation at low ultimately attains
temperature and in saturation.
very strong field
11. Physical state Solid, liquid or gas Solid, liquid or gas Normally solids only
of matter
12. Examples Bi, Cu, Pb, Si, N2 (at Al, Na, Ca, O2 (At Fe, Ni, Co, Fe2O3
STP), H2O, NaCl STP), CuCl2 Alnico

Multiple Choice Questions (One Mark)

1. The resemblance of magnetic field lines for a bar magnet and a solenoid suggest that
(a) a bar magnet may be thought of as a large number of circulating currents in analogy with
asolenoid
(b) cutting a bar magnet in half is like cutting a solenoid
(c) both (a) and (b)
(d) neither (a) nor (b)
2. The resemblance of magnetic field lines for a bar magnet and a solenoid suggest
that
(e) a bar magnet may be thought of as a large number of circulating currents in analogy with
asolenoid
(f) cutting a bar magnet in half is like cutting a solenoid
(g) both (a) and (b)
(h) neither (a) nor (b)
3. A small bar magnet of moment M is placed in a uniform field B. If magnet
makes an angleof 30° with field. The torque acting on the magnet is:-
(i) MB (b) MB/2 (c) MB/3 (d) MB/4

71
 4. When a diamagnetic substance is placed near a magnet then it is
(a) Attracted (b) Repelled (c)No effect (d) None of these
5. According to Curie's law, the magnetic susceptibility of a substance at an
absolute temperature T is proportional to
(a)T (b) 12 (c) T2 (d) 1
T T

6. Which of the magnetic materials have negative susceptibly

(a)Diamagnetic materials (b) Paramagnetic materials
(c) Ferromagnetic materials (d) Ferromagnetic materials
7. A small rod of bismuth is suspended freely between the poles of a strong
electromagnet. It is found to arrange itself at right angles to the magnetic field.
This observation establishes that bismuth is
(a)Diamagnetic (b)Paramagnetic (c)Ferromagnetic (d)Anti-ferromagnetic
8.Susceptibility of a material varies as C where C is a constant and T is
= ,
T

temperature at absolute state, then material must be

(a) Diamagnetic (b) Paramagnetic
(c) Ferromagnetic (d)Any of the above depending upon range of temperature

9.Which of the following has higher magnetic susceptibility?

(a)diamagnetic (b)paramagnetic
(c)ferromagnetic (d) None of these
10.Three needles N1 N2 and N3 are made of a ferromagnetic, a paramagnetic and a
diamagnetic substance respectively. A magnet, when brought close to them, will
(а)attract N1 strongly, but repel N2 and N3 weakly.
(b)attract all three of them.
(c)attract N1 and N2 strongly but repel N3.
(d) attract N1 strongly, N2 weakly and repel N3 weakly
ANSWERS MCQ:
1.c 2. b 3. d 4. b 5. d
6. b 7. a 8. b 9. c 10. d

ASSRETION REASON QUESTIONS:

1. Assertion : We cannot think of magnetic field configuration with three poles.
Reason:A bar magnet does exert a torque on itself due to its own field

2. Assertion : The poles of magnet cannot be separated by breaking into two pieces.
Reason:The magnetic moment will be reduced to half when a magnet is broken into two equal pieces.

3. Assertion : Basic difference between an electric line and magnetic line of force is that former is discontinuous
and the latter is continuous or endless.
Reason : No electric lines of forces exist inside a charged body but magnetic lines do exist inside a magnet.

72
4. Assertion : The ferromagnetic substance do not obey Curie’s law.
Reason : At Curie point a ferromagnetic substance start behaving as a paramagnetic substance
5. Assertion : A paramagnetic sample display greater magnetisation (for the same magnetising field) when cooled.
Reason : The magnetisation does not depend on temperature.
6. Assertion : The susceptibility of diamagnetic materials does not depend upon temperature.
Reason : Every atom of a diamagnetic material is not a complete magnet in itself.
7. Assertion : The permeability of a ferromagnetic material is independent of the magnetic field.
Reason : Permeability of a material is a constant quantity.
Short Answer Questions (Two Marks)
1. The susceptibility of a magnetic material is 2.6 x 10-3. Identify the type of magnetic material and state
its two properties.
2. Explain the following:
(1) Why do magnetic field lines from continuous closed loops?
(2) Why are the field lines repelled when a diamagnetic material is placed in an external uniform
magnetic field?
3. Write three points of difference between para-, dia- and ferro- magnetic materials, giving one
example for each.
4. How does the (i) pole strength and (ii) magnetic moment of each part of a bar magnet change if it is
cut into two equal pieces transverse to length?
5. The magnetic susceptibility of magnesium at 300 K is 1.2 X105 . At what temperature will its magnetic
susceptibility become 1.44 X 105 ? Ans: 250 K
6. Define magnetic susceptibility of a material. Name two elements, one having positive susceptibility
and the other having negative susceptibility. What does negative susceptibility signify ?
7. Draw magnetic field lines when a (i) diamagnetic, (ii) paramagnetic substance is placed in an external
magnetic field. Which magnetic property distinguishes this behaviour of the field lines due to the
two substances?
8. The following figure shows the variation of intensity of magnetization I versus the applied magnetic
field intensity H for two magnetic materials A and B.
(1) Identify the materials A and B
(2) Draw the variation of susceptibility with temperature for B.

Short Answer Questions (Three Marks)

1. Draw the magnetic field lines for a current carrying solenoid when a rod maee of (a) copper (b)
aluminium anf (c ) iron are Inserted within the solenoid as shown
2. Show diagrammatically the behavior of magnetic field lines in the presence of (i) paramagnetic and
(ii) diamagnetic substances . How does one explain this distinguishing feature?

73
3. Explain the following:
(i) Why do magnetic field lines form continuous closed loops?
(ii) Why are the field lines repelled when a diamagnetic material is placed in an external uniform
magnetic field?
4. Write three points of difference between para-, dia-, and ferro- magnetic materials, giving one
examples of each.

CASE BASED QUESTION ( 4 MARKS):

Read the paragraph given below and answer the questions that follow:
Ferromagnetism: In the absence of an external magnetic field . some of the electron in a
ferromagnetic material have their magnetic moment aligned by mean of a quantum physical
interaction called exchange coupling, producing regions( domians) within the material with strong
magnetic dipole moments. An external field Bext can align the magnetic dipole moment for the
material as a whole , in the direction of B ext. This net magnetic dipole moment can partially persist
when field Bext is
is removed. If Bext is non uniform, the ferromagnetic material is attracted to region of greater
magnetic field. These properties are called ferromagnetism.. Ecchnge coupling didappears when a
simple temperature exceed its curie temperature, and then the sample has only paramagnetism.
(i). Name the substance which have positive susceptibility and small.
(ii) What happens to permeability of ferromagnetic substance if magnetic field is increased?
(iii) Draw the graph showing the variation of susceptibility vs temperature for ferromagnetic
substance.
OR
Give two examples of ferromagnetic substance.

74
 UNIT-IV
Chapeter-6: Electro Magnetic Induction
Area Vector(dA) : Direction of Area vector with respect to M-filed
All Possible directions of Area lines

(direction of M-filed lines upward than direction of

Up ward direction area vector taken upwards)
(direction of Area Vector dA)
(Direction of M-filed Lines)
(Ɵ=00)

(direction of Area Vector dA)

Downward direction
(Direction of M-filed Lines)
(Ɵ=1800)

Magnetic Flux
The total number of magnetic lines of force
dA→
passing normally through an area placed in a 
magnetic field is equal to the magnetic flux linked B→
with that area.
  ( is the angle between B
area vector and magnetic
Net flux through the surface  =  B  d A = BA cos θ
field vector)
Unit and Dimension : Magnetic flux is a scalar If  = 0o then  = BA, If  = 90o then  = 0
quantity. Other units : Tesla × m2 = N  m = Joule = Volt  Coulomb
It’s S.I. unit is weber (wb), Amp Amp Amp
CGS unit is Maxwell or Gauss × cm2; = Ohm × Coulomb = Henry × Amp. It’s
= Volt  sec
( 1 wb = 10 8 Maxwell ). dimensional formula [] = [ML2T–2A–1]

Electro Magnetic Induction: -The phenomenon of generation/induction of current or (Electro

Motive force) emf by changing the magnetic flux is known as Electromagnetic Induction.

Faraday's Laws of Electromagnetic Induction :-

First law : ( Cause of emf)The induced emf is due to Second law : (magnitude of emf) The induced emf is equal to
changing magnetic Flux that must be link to the rate of change of magnetic flux linked with the circuit i.e.
closed loop/coil. d . For N turns e = − N d  ; Negative sign indicates
e =−
dt dt
that induced emf (e) opposes the change of flux.
 = BA cos ; Hence  will change if either, B, A or  will change
Faraday’s Experiment Motional emf AC-generator
Change in B , A and  remain Change in A , B and  remain Change in  , A and B remain same
same same

75
Lenz's Law:- This law gives the direction of induced emf/induced current. According to this law, the
direction of induced emf or current in a circuit is such as to oppose the cause that produces it. This law is
based upon law of conservation of energy.

Position of
S N S N N S
magnet N S
Observer Observer Observer
Observer

Direction of Anticlockwise Clockwise direction Clockwise Anticlockwise direction

induced current direction direction

Behaviour of
face of the coil As a north pole As a south pole As a south pole As a north pole
Type of
magnetic force Repulsive force Attractive force Repulsive force Attractive force
opposed
Magnetic field Cross (×), Cross (×), Decreases Dots() Dots() Decreases
linked with the Increases Increases
coil and it’s
progress as
viewed from left
Induced emf (e) Induced Induced charge (q) Induced power(P)
current(I)
N d N N 2  d 
2
e=− , dq = i dt = −  d P=
e2
=  
dt e N d R R R  dt 
i= =− .
N ( 2 − 1 ) R R dt
e=− Induced charge is time It depends
t on time and
NA( B2 − B1 ) cos independent resistance
e=−
t

NBA (cos  2 − cos  1 )

=−
t

Dynamic (Motional) EMI Due to

Translatory Motion:-
If the length RQ = x and RS = l, the
magnetic flux Ф enclosed by the loop PQRS
will be
Ф = Blx
Since x is changing with time, the rate of
change of flux B will induce an emf given by:

76
 Fleming’s Right Hand Rule : If the
thumb, forefinger and middle finger of right
hand are stretched mutually perpendicular
to each other such that the forefinger points
the direction of magnetic field, thumb points
towards the direction of magnetic force, then
middle finger points towards the direction
of induced current in the conductor.

Motional EMI Due to Rotational Motion:-

Conducting rod : A conducting rod of length l Cycle wheel : A conducting wheel each spoke of length l
whose one end is fixed, is rotated about the axis is rotating with angular velocity  in a given magnetic
passing through it’s fixed end and field as shown below in fig.
perpendicular to it’s length with constant
angular velocity . Magnetic field (B) is
perpendicular to the plane of the paper.

Due to flux cutting each metal spoke becomes identical

cell of emf e (say), all such identical cells connected in
parallel fashion e net = e (emf of single cell). Let N be the
emf induces across the ends of the rod number of spokes hence
where  = frequency (revolution per sec)
1
e net = Bwl 2 ; = 2
2
and T = Time period. Here e net  N o i.e. total emf does not depends on
number of spokes ‘N’.

Induce Induced Magnetic Power dissipated in Electrical power

d emf current force moving the conductor H  Bvl 
2
B 2v 2 l 2
2
Pthermal = =i R =  .R ; Pthermal =
e = Blv i=
e
=
Bvl  Bvl 
Fm = Bil = B l Pmech = Pext =
dW
= Fext . v =
B 2 vl 2
v
t  R  R
R R  R  dt R (It is clear that Pmech. = Pthermal which is
=
B 2vl 2
=
B 2v 2 l 2 consistent with the principle of
R R conservation of energy.)
EMI due to change the orientation between coil and magnetic field:-
Suppose a rectangular coil having N turns
placed initially in a magnetic field such that
magnetic field is perpendicular to it’s plane as
shown.
 – Angular speed
 – Frequency of rotation of coil
R – Resistance of coil
For uniform rotational motion with , the flux
linked with coil at any time t
 = NBA cos  = NBA cos t
 = 0 cos ωt where 0 = NBA = maximum flux

77
 Induced emf in coil : Induced emf also changes Induced current in Coil: At any time t,
in periodic manner that’s why this phenomenon i = e = e 0 sin  t = i0 sin  t where i0 = current amplitude or
called periodic EMI R R
d e0 NBA   0 
e=− = NBA  sin  t  e = e 0 sin ωt where e0 = max. current i0 = R = R
=
R
dt
emf amplitude or max. emf = NBA  =  0 

Self Induction:- Mutual Induction:-

Whenever the electric current passing through a Whenever the current passing through a coil
coil changes, the magnetic flux linked with it will
also change. As a result of this, in accordance with changes, the magnetic flux linked with a
Faraday’s laws of electromagnetic induction, an
emf is induced in the coil which opposes the change neighbouring coil will also change. Hence an emf
that causes it. This phenomenon is called ‘self
will be induced in the neighbouring coil or circuit.
induction’ and the emf induced is called back emf,
current so produced in the coil is called induced This phenomenon is called ‘mutual induction’.
current.

Coefficient of self-induction : Number of Coefficient of mutual induction : Total flux

flux linkages with the coil is proportional to the linked with the secondary due to current in the
current i. i.e. N   i or N  = Li (N is the number of
primary is N22 and N22  i1  N 2  2 = Mi 1 where
turns in coil and N – total flux linkage). Hence
N N1 - Number of turns in primary; N2 - Number of
L= = coefficient of self-induction.
i turns in secondary; 2 - Flux linked with each turn
(1) If i = 1amp, N = 1 then, L =  i.e. the of secondary; i1 - Current flowing through primary;
coefficient of self induction of a coil is equal to the
flux linked with the coil when the current in it is 1 M-Coefficient of mutual induction or mutual
amp. inductance.
(2) By Faraday’s second law induced emf (1) According to Faraday’s second law emf
d
induces in secondary e 2 = − N 2 d  2 ; e 2 = − M 1
di di
e = −N . Which gives e = − L ; If = 1 amp / sec di
dt dt dt dt dt
then |e|= L. di
Hence coefficient of self induction is equal to (2) If 1 = 1 Amp then |e2| = M. Hence coefficient of
dt sec
the emf induced in the coil when the rate of change mutual induction is equal to the emf induced in the
of current in the coil is unity.
secondary coil when rate of change of current in
(3) Units and dimensional formula of ‘L’ :
It's S.I. unit primary coil is unity.

78
 weber Tesla  m 2
= =
N m
=
Joule Coulom b  volt
=
(3) Units and dimensional formula of M :
Am p Am p Am p 2 Am p 2 Am p 2 Similar to self-inductance (L)
volt  sec
= = ohm  sec . But practical unit is henry
amp
(H).
It’s dimensional formula [L] = [ML2T–2A–2]

The various formulae for L The various formulae for M

Circular coil Two concentric
i
L=
 0 N r2
coplaner
2
circular coils R P
r
 0 N 1 N 2 r 2
M= S
2R

Solenoid Two Solenoids

l
 0  r N A N A
2 2 l
L= = ( =  0  r )
l l
μ0 N1 N 2 A
M = i1
i l Secondary
Primary
(N2 turns)
(N1 turns)

Self-Inductance for a long Solenoid:-Consider Mutual-Inductance between pairs of long

a solenoid of N turns with length l and area of cross Solenoid:-
section A. It carries a current I. If B is the magnetic field
at any point inside the solenoid, then Magnetic flux per
turn =B × area of each turn
But, B=μ0NI/l
n=N/l no. of turns per unit length
Hence, the total magnetic flux ϕ=μ0 NI/l(A×N)
i.e. ϕ=μ0 N2 IA/l ....(1)
If L is the coefficient of self induction of the solenoid,
then ϕ=LI....(2)
From equation (1) and (2),
LI= μ0 N2 IA /l
L= μ0 N2 A/l
If the core is filled with a magnetic material of
permeability μ,
Then, L=μN2 A/l

79
Relation between M, L1 and L2 : For two
Let r1 and r2 be radii of inner and outer co-axial
magnetically coupled coils M = k L1 L 2 ; where k –
solenoids respectively,
coefficient of coupling or coupling factor which is
defined as n1 and n2 be number of turns per unit length of the two

k=
Magnetic flux linked in secondary
; 0k1 solenoids.
Magnetic flux linked in primary
Let N1 and N2 be total number of turns in two solenoids

(A) k = 1 and each of length l.

Let the outer solenoid carry current I2 . This current sets
up magnetic flux ϕ1 through inner solenoid.
(B) 0 < k < 1 The total flux linkages with inner solenoid are given by N1
ϕ1=M12I2
Magnetic field at the center of the outer solenoid due to a
(C) k = 0 current I2 is given by B2=μ0n2I2
The total flux linkages with the primary solenoid are
given by
Magnetic Energy Stored in the inductor is N1ϕ1=(n1l)B2 (I2)
N1ϕ1=(μ0 π n1 n2 l r12)I2
U=1/2 LI2
M12=N1 ϕ 1 /I2 =(μ0 π n1 n2 l r12)
Similarly M21=(μ0 π n1 n2 l r22)

(4) Dependence of mutual inductance

(i) Number of turns (N1, N2) of both coils
(ii) Coefficient of self inductances (L1, L2) of both
the coils
(iii) Area of cross-section of coils
(iv) Magnetic permeability of medium between the
coils (r) or nature of material on which two coils are
wound
(v) Distance between two coils (As d increases so
M decreases)
(vi) Orientation between primary and secondary
coil (for 90o orientation no flux relation M = 0)
(vii) Coupling factor ‘K’ between primary and
secondary coil

80
 Assertion Reason Type Questions
Two statements are given –one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
answer to these questions from the codes (a) , (b) , (c ) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A,
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A,
c) A is true but R is false,
d) A is false and R is also false.
1. Assertion : Faraday’s laws are consequences of conservation of energy.
Reason : In a purely resistive ac circuit, the current lags behind the e.m.f. in phase.
2. Assertion : Only a change in magnetic flux will maintain an induced current the coil.
Reason : The presence of large magnetic flux through a coil maintains a current in the coil if the
circuit is continuous.
3. Assertion : Faraday established induced e.m.f. experimentally.
Reason : Magnetic flux can produce induced e.m.f.
4. Assertion : Induced e.m.f. is proportional to rate of change of magnetic field while induced current
depends on resistance of wire.
Reason: The induced e.m.f. and current will be same in two identical loops of copper and aluminum,
when rotated with same speed in the same magnetic field.
5. Assertion : Inductance coil are made of copper.
Reason : Induced current is more in wire having less resistance.
6. Assertion : Self-inductance is called the inertia of electricity.
Reason : Self-inductance is the phenomenon, according to which an opposing induced e.m.f. is
produced in a coil as a result of change in current or magnetic flux linked in the coil.
7. Assertion : When two coils are wound on each other, the mutual induction between the coils is
maximum.
Reason : Mutual induction does not depend on the orientation of the coils.
8. Assertion : Acceleration of a magnet falling through a long solenoid decreases.
Reason : The induced current produced in a circuit always flow in such direction that it opposes
the change or the cause the produced it.
9. Assertion : A spark occur between the poles of a switch when the switch is opened.
Reason : Current flowing in the conductor produces magnetic field.
10. Assertion : In the phenomenon of mutual induction, self induction of each of the coils persists.
Reason : Self induction arises when strength of current in same coil changes. In mutual induction,
current is changing in both the individual coils.
11. Assertion : Induced e.m.f., opposes always the change in magnetic flux responsible for its
production.
Reason : Lenz’s law violates the principle of conservation of energy.
12. Assertion : The induced emf in a conducting loop of wire will be non zero when it rotates in a
uniform magnetic field.
Reason : The emf is induced due to change in magnetic flux.
13. Assertion : An induced emf is generated when magnet is withdrawn from the solenoid.
Reason : The relative motion between magnet and solenoid induces emf.
14. Assertion : A transformer cannot work on dc supply.
Reason : dc changes neither in magnitude nor in direction.
15. Assertion : Soft iron is used as a core of transformer.
Reason : Area of hysteresis is loop for soft iron is small.
16. Assertion : In single coil, we consider self-induction only.
Reason : An ac generator is based on the phenomenon of self-induction.
81
17. Assertion : When number of turns in a coil is doubled, coefficient of self- inductance of the coil
becomes 4 times.
Reason : This is because L α N2.
18. Assertion : Figure shows a metallic conductor moving in magnetic field. The induced emf across its
ends is zero.

Reason : The induced emf across the ends of a conductor is given by e = Bvℓ sinθ.
19. Assertion : Figure shows a horizontal solenoid connected to a battery and a switch. A copper ring is
placed on a smooth surface, the axis of the ring being horizontal. As the switch is closed, the ring will
move away from the solenoid.

Reason : Induced emf in the ring, e=-dΦ/dt

20. Assertion : Acceleration of a magnet falling through a long solenoid decreases.
Reason : The induced current produced in a circuit always flow in such direction that it opposes the
change to the cause that produced it.
Answers:-
1 C 6 B 11 C 16 C
2 C 7 C 12 A 17 B
3 C 8 A 13 A 18 A
4 C 9 B 14 A 19 A
5 A 10 A 15 A 20 A

Multiple choice types Question

1. A coil having an area A 0 is placed in a magnetic field which changes from B0 to 4 B0 in a time interval
t. The e.m.f. induced in the coil will be
3 A0 B0 4 A0 B0 3 B0 4 B0
(a) (b) (c) (d)
t t A0 t A0 t
2. Lenz's law is consequence of the law of conservation of
(aCharge (b) Momentum (c) Mass (d) Energy
3. A metallic ring is attached with the wall of a room. When the north pole of a magnet is brought near
to it, the induced current in the ring will be
(a) First clockwise then anticlockwise
(b) In clockwise direction
(c) In anticlockwise direction (d)
First anticlockwise then clockwise

4. A square coil 10 −2 m 2 area is placed perpendicular to a uniform magnetic field of intensity 10 3 Wb / m 2

. The magnetic flux through the coil is
(a) 10 weber (b) 10 −5 weber (c) 10 5 weber (d)100 weber

82
5. A coil having 500 square loops each of side 10 cm is placed normal to a magnetic flux which increases
at the rate of 1.0 tesla/second. The induced e.m.f. in volts is
(a) 0.1 (b) 0.5 (c) 1 (d)5
6. Two different loops are concentric and lie in the same plane. The current in the outer loop is
clockwise and increasing with time. The induced current in the inner loop then, is
(a) Clockwise (b)Zero (c) Counter clockwise (d)In a direction that
depends on the ratio of the loop radii
7. In the diagram shown if a bar magnet is moved along the common axis of two single turn coils A and
B in the direction of arrow
(a) Current is induced only in A & not in B
(b) Induced currents in A & B are in the same A B

direction
(c) Current is induced only in B and not in A N S

(d) Induced currents in A & B are in opposite

directions

8. 8. The coil of area 0.1 m2 has 500 turns. After placing the coil in a magnetic field of strength
4  10 −4 Wb / m 2 , if rotated through 90o in 0.1 s, the average emf induced in the coil is
(a) 0.012 V (b) 0.05 V (c)0.1 V (d) 0.2 V
9. When a wire loop is rotated in a magnetic field, the direction of induced e.m.f. changes once in each
1 1
(a) revolution (b) revolution (c)1 revolution (d)2 revolution
4 2
10. A conducting wire is moving towards right in a magnetic field B. The direction of induced current
in the wire is shown in the figure. The direction of magnetic field will be
(a) In the plane of paper pointing towards right
(b) In the plane of paper pointing towards left
(c) Perpendicular to the plane of paper and B i v
down-wards
(d) Perpendicular to the plane of paper and upwards
11. A conducting square loop of side L and resistance R moves in its plane with a uniform velocity v
perpendicular to one of its sides. A magnetic induction B constant in time and space, pointing
perpendicular and into the plane of the loop exists everywhere. The current induced in the loop is
(a) Blv
clockwise (b) Blv anticlockwise B   C  →
R R 
B
2 Blv    →
(c) anticlockwise (d) Zero   
v

R
   

   
 A   D 

12. An e.m.f. of 5 volt is produced by a self-inductance, when the current changes at a steady rate from
3 A to 2 A in 1 millisecond. The value of self-inductance is
(a) Zero (b) 5H (c) 5000 H (d)5 mH
13. Average energy stored in a pure inductance L when a current i flows through it, is
2 2
(a) Li 2 (b) 2 Li 2 (c) Li (d) Li
4 2

83
14. In a transformer, the coefficient of mutual inductance between the primary and the secondary coil
is 0.2 henry. When the current changes by 5 ampere/second in the primary, the induced e.m.f. in the
secondary will be
(a) 5 V (b) 1 V (c) 25 V (d)10 V
15. The inductance of a coil is 60 H . A current in this coil increases from 1.0 A to 1.5 A in 0.1 second. The
magnitude of the induced e.m.f. is
(a) 60  10 −6 V (b) 300  10 −4 V (c) 30  10 −4 V (d) 3  10 −4 V
16. If the current is halved in a coil, then the energy stored is how much times the previous value

1 1
(a) (b) (c)2 (d) 4
2 4
17.Two coils P and Q are lying a little distance apart coaxially. If a current I is suddenly set up in the coil
P then the direction of current induced in coil Q will be
(a) anti-clockwise (b) towards north
(c) clockwise (d) towards south

18.A metallic circular ring is suspended by a string and is kept in a vertical plane. When a magnet is
brought towards the ring it will
(a) get displaced towards the magnet (b) remain
stationary
(c) get displaced away from the magnet (d) none of them

19. The emf generated in a loop when it enters a magnetic field with a velocity as shown in is best
depicted in

20.The value of coefficient of mutual induction for the arrangement of two coils shown in the figure is

(a) positive (b) maximum (c) negative (d) zero

84
21.A cycle wheel with 64 spokes is rotating with N rotations per second at right angle to the horizontal
component of magnetic field. The induced emf generated between its axle and rim is E. If the number
of spokes is reduced to 32, then the value of induced emf will be
(a) E/4 (b) E/2 (c) E (d) 2E
22. The coils of wire A and B are mutually at right angles to each other as shown in the figure. If current
in one of the coils is changed then the current in the second coil will
(a) be induced in clockwise direction
(b) be inducted in anticlockwise direction
(c) will not be induced
(d) cannot be predicted

23. A helium nucleus enters a perpendicular magnetic field B with a velocity v. The magnetic force
acting on it will be
(a) 2 Bev (b) zero (c) evB (d) evB/2
24. If a bar magnet is dropped vertically into a long metallic tube then its final acceleration a will be
(a) a = 0 (b) a = g (c) a > g (d) a < g
25. The self inductance of a coil is 2 Henry and its resistance is 20 Ω. The value of current in it changes
from 10A to 9A in 0.01 s. The time constant of the coil will be
(a) 1 ms (b) 10 ms (c) 0.1 s (d) 2 s
Answers:-
1 a 6 c 11 d 16 b 21 c
2 d 7 d 12 d 17 c 22 c
3 c 8 d 13 d 18 c 23 a
4 a 9 b 14 b 19 b 24 a
5 d 10 c 15 d 20 d 25 c

Case Study Type Questions

1. Lenz's law states that the direction of induced current in a circuit is such that it opposes the change
which produces it. Thus, if the magnetic flux linked with a closed circuit increases, the induced current
flows in such a direction that magnetic flux is created in the opposite direction of the original magnetic
flux. If the magnetic flux linked with the closed circuit decreases, the induced current flows in such a
direction so as to create magnetic flux in the direction of the original flux.

(1).A closed loop of wire is being moved with constant velocity without changing its orientation inside a
uniform magnetic field. Will this induce a current in the loop?

85
 (2). A conducting loop is held above a current carrying wire
PQ as shown in fig. What will be the direction of the
induced current in the loop if the current in the wire PQ is
constantly increased?

(3). Two coils P and S are arranged as shown in

the figure.
(i) What will be the direction of induced
current in S when the switch is closed?
(ii) What will be the direction of induced
current in S when the switch is opened?
OR

(3) Two identical co-axial coils carry equal

currents. What will happen to the current in
each loop if the loops approach each other?

2. Mutual inductance is the phenomenon of inducing emf in a coil, due to a change of current in the
neighboring coil. The amount of mutual inductance that links one coil to another depends very much
on the relative positioning of the two coils, their geometry and relative separation between them.
Mutual inductance between the two coils increases μr times if the coils are wound over an iron core
of relative permeability μr

(1) What is the principle of mutual induction?

(2) A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance 1.5 H, if the current in one coil changes
zero to 20A in 0.5Sec. What is the change in flux linkage with other coil?
(3) Two circular loops are placed with their centers at fixed distance apart. How would you orient the
loops to have (i) maximum (ii) minimum Mutual inductance?
OR
(3) A coil of wire of certain radius has 600 turns and inductance of 108mH.
What will be the inductance of another similar coil with 500 turns?

86
 (Questions One Mark)

1. Predict the direction of induced current in metal rings 1 and

2 when current I in the wire is steadily decreasing?

2. A bar magnet is moved in the direction indicated by the arrow between two coils PQ and CD.
Predict the directions of induced current in each coil.

3. A bar magnet is moved between two parallel circular

loops A and B with a constant velocity v as shown in figure.
What will be direction of current in each coil?

4. What is electromagnetic induction?

5.Predict the polarity of the capacitor in the situation

described below:

6. A plot of magnetic flux versus current is shown in the figure for

two inductors and , which of the two has larger value of
Self-inductance and why ?

(Two marks Questions)

1. Explain, with the help of a suitable example, how we can show that Lenz’s law is a consequence of the
principle of conservation of energy.
2. Write the factors on which the mutual inductance of a pair of solenoids depends.
3. There is a square loop of each side 10 cm. A uniform magnetic field of 15 Tesla is applied
perpendicular to it. If the magnetic field decreases to zero in 10 seconds calculate the emf induced in
the loop.

(Three marks Questions)

1. Obtain an expression for the energy stored in a solenoid of self-inductance ‘L’ when the current
through it grows from zero to I .
2. Derive an expression for the mutual inductance of two long coaxial solenoids of same length wound one
over the other.

87
 Chapter-7 Alternating current
Transformer:-
It is a device which Increase or decreases the
voltage or current in ac circuits through mutual
induction.
Principle : It is based on the principle of
mutual induction.
Working : Types of transformer :
When an alternating voltage is applied to the Step-up Transformer :It increases voltage and
primary, magnetic flux linked with it changes decreases current. transformation Ratio must be
which links to the secondary and induces an graeter than 1. Ns> Np.
emf in it due to mutual induction.

Step-Down Transformer: – It increases current and

decreases voltage. transformation Ratio must be
less than 1. Ns< Np.

Energy losses in a transformer :

(i) Copper loss
(ii) Hysteresis loss
(iii) Flux leakage
(iv) Humming losses
(v) Eddy current loss

AC generator :-
An electrical machine used to convert
mechanical energy into electrical energy.
Principle : It works on the principle of
electromagnetic induction .
Parts of AC-Generator:-
1. Armature:- Armature coil (ABCD)
consists of large number of turns of
insulated copper wire wound over a soft
iron core. e=−
Nd 
= NBA  sin t = e0 sint
dt

88
 2. Strong field magnet:- A Strong magnetic where e0 = NBA
field provided perpendicular to the axis i=
e e
= 0 sin t = i0 sin t
R R
of rotation of the coil.
3. Slip rings:- The armature coil are
connected to two brass slip rings R1 and
R2.
4. Carbon Brushes:- : Two carbon brushes
(B1 and B2), are pressed against the slip
rings.

Working : When the armature coil ABCD

rotates in the magnetic field it cuts the magnetic
lines of force. Thus the magnetic flux linked
with the coil changes and hence induced emf is
set up in the coil. The direction of the induced
emf or the current in the coil is determined by
the Fleming’s right hand rule.

Equation for i and V : Alternating current or

voltage varying as sine function can be written
as
2
i = i0 sint = i0 sin 2 t = i0sin t
T
2
and V = V0 sin t = V0 sin 2t = V0 sin t
T
where i and V are Instantaneous values of
current and voltage,
i0 and V0 are peak values of current and
voltage
 = Angular frequency in rad/sec,  =
Frequency in Hz
and T = time period

89
 Peak value (i0 or V0) : The maximum value of alternating quantity (i or V) is defined as peak value
or amplitude.
Root mean square (r.m.s.) value : Root of mean of square of voltage or current in an ac circuit for one
complete cycle is called r.m.s. value. It is denoted by Vrms or irms
T

 i dt =
2
i12 + i22 + ... i0 V0
irms = = i2 =
0
T
= 0.707 i0 = 70.7% i0 Similarly Vrms = = 0.707 V0 = 70.7% of V0
 dt
n 2 2
0

 1
 sin ( t) = cos ( t) = 2 
2 2
The r.m.s. value of alternating current is also called virtual value or effective
 
value.
Mean or Average value (iav or Vav) : The average value of alternating quantity for one complete
cycle is zero.
The average value of ac over half cycle (t = 0 to T/2)
T /2

iav =
0
i dt
=
2i0
= 0 .637i0 = 63.7 % of i0, Similarly Vav =
2 V0
= 0 .637 V0 = 63 .7 % of V0.
T /2
 
0
dt

Phasor diagram : A diagram representing alternating current and alternating voltage (of same
frequency) as vectors
(phasors) with the phase angle between them is called a phasor diagram.
AC- Measurement DC- measurement

(1) All ac meters read r.m.s. value. (1) All dc meters read average value
(2) All ac meters are based on heating effect of (2) All dc meters are based on magnetic effect of
current. current
(3) Deflection in dc meters
(3) Deflection in hot wire meters
 i
  irms
2

Reactance (X) : The opposition offered by inductor or capacitor or both to the flow of ac through it is
defined as reactance. It is of following two type
Inductive reactance (XL) : Offered by inductive circuit X L = L = 2L  dc = 0 so for dc, XL = 0.
Capacitive reactance (XC) : Offered by capacitive circuit XC =
1
=
1
for dc XC = .
C 2C
Impedance (Z) : The opposition offered by ac circuits to the flow of ac through it is defined it's
impedance. It’s unit is ohm().
 1
Susceptance (S) : the reciprocal of reactance is defined as susceptance  S = . It is of two type
 X 
1 1 1
inductive susceptance SL = = and Capacitive susceptance, SC = =  C = 2 C .
X L 2 L XC

90
Resistive Circuit R
Inductive Circuit L

(1) Current : i = i0 sin  t (1) Current :  

i = i0 sin  t −  i
V i  2
(2) Peak current : i0 = 0
(2) Peak current :
R
V0 V V0
i0 = = 0 =
XL L 2 L
(3) XL α ν
(3) Resistance independent on frequency of applied
source .
(4) Phase difference between
voltage and current :  = 0o
(5) Power factor : cos  = 1 (4) Phase difference between

(6) Power : P = V i = 0 0
V i voltage and current  = 90 o (or + )
rms rms
2 2

(7) Phasor diagram : Both are in same phase (5) Power factor : cos  = 0 (6) Power : P = 0
(7) Phasor diagram : Voltage leads the current by

2

Capacitive Circuit RL-Circuit

R L
C
 
(1) Current : i = i0 sin  t +  VL V
 2
i i
VR VL
VR = iR ,
(2) Peak current : VL = iXL 
VR i
V0
i0 = = V0 C = V0 (2 C)
XC

(3) XC α 1/ ν
(1) Applied voltage : V = VR2 + VL2

(2) Impedance : Z = R 2 + X L2 = R 2 +  2 L2 = R + 4  L
2 2 2 2

(3) Current : i = i0 sin ( t −  )

V0 V0 V0
(4) Peak current i0 = = =
(4) Phase difference between voltage and current : R + Z 2
X L2 R + 4 2 2 L2
2


 = 90 (or − ) (5) Power factor : cos  = 0
o
L
2 (5) Phase difference :  = tan −1 X L = tan −1
R R
(6) Power : P = 0(7) Phasor diagram : Current leads
(6) Power factor : cos  = 2 R 2
thevoltageby/2 R + XL

(7) Leading quantity : Voltage

91
RC-Circuit:- Series LCR-Circuit
R L C
R C VL
VR V
VR = iR, VR VL VC
(VL – VC)

VR VC VC = iXC i i i

i VC V VR i
V = V0 sint VC
VR = iR, VL = iXL, VC = iXC Phasor diagram

(1) Applied voltage : V = VR2 + VC2

2
 1 
(2) Impedance : Z = R 2 + X C2 = R 2 +  
 C 
(3) Current : i = i0 sin ( t +  )
V0 V0 V0
(4) Peak current : i0 = = =
Z R + 2
X C2 R2 +
1
4 2 2 C 2
XC 1
(5) Phase difference :  = tan −1 = tan −1
R CR
R
(6) Power factor : cos  =
R + X C2 (1) Equation of current : i = i0 sin( t   ) ;
2

(7) Leading quantity : Current where V

i0 = 0
Z
(2) Equation of voltage : From phasor
Wattless Current diagram
The component of current which does not V = VR2 + (VL − VC )2
contribute to the average power dissipation is called (3) Impedance of the circuit :
wattless current  1 
2
Z = R 2 + ( X L − X C )2 = R 2 +  L − 
(i) The average of wattless component over one  C 
cycle is zero (4) Phase difference : From phasor diagram
(ii) Amplitude of wattless current = i0 sin  L−
1
2 L −
1
V − VC X − XC C 2 C
and r.m.s. value of wattless current = tan  = L = L = =
VR R R R
i0
irms sin  = sin  . V (5) If net reactance is inductive : Circuit
2 i cos
behaves as LR circuit
 (6) If net reactance is capacitive : Circuit
i
behave as CR circuit
i sin (7) If net reactance is zero : Means
X = XL − XC = 0

XL = XC . This is the condition of resonance

92
 (8) At resonance (series resonant circuit)
(i) XL = XC  Zmin = R i.e. circuit behaves as resistive circuit
(ii) VL = VC  V = VR i.e. whole applied voltage appeared across the resistance
(iii) Phase difference :  = 0o  p.f. = cos  = 1
1
(iv) Power consumption P = Vrms irms = V0 i0
2
V0
(v) Current in the circuit is maximum and it is i0 =
R
(vi) These circuit are used for voltage amplification and as selector circuits in wireless telegraphy.
(9) Resonant frequency (Natural frequency)
At resonance X L = XC  0 L = 1
 0 =
1 rad
 0 =
1
Hz (or cps)
0 C LC sec 2 LC
(Resonant frequency doesn't depend upon the resistance of the circuit)
Assertion Reason Type Questions
Two statements are given –one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
answer to these questions from the codes (a) , (b) , (c ) and (d) as given below.
e) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A,
f) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A,
g) A is true but R is false,
h) A is false and R is also false.
18. Assertion : In series LCR circuit resonance can take place.
Reason :Resonance takes place if inductance and capacitive reactances are equal and opposite.
19. Assertion : The alternating current lags behind the e.m.f. by a phase angle of  / 2 , when ac flows
through an inductor.
Reason : The inductive reactance increases as the frequency of ac source decreases.
20. Assertion : Capacitor serves as a block for dc and offers an easy path to ac.
Reason : Capacitive reactance is inversely proportional to frequency.
21. Assertion : When capacitive reactance is smaller than the inductive reactance in LCR current, e.m.f.
leads the current .
Reason : The phase angle is the angle between the alternating e.m.f. and alternating current of the
circuit.
22. Assertion : If the frequency of alternating current in an ac circuit consisting of an inductance coil is
increased then current gets decreased.
Reason : The current is inversely proportional to frequency of alternating current.
23. Assertion : On introducing soft iron core in the solenoid, the inductance increases.
Reason : A bulb connected in series with a solenoid is connected to ac source. If a soft iron core is
introduced in the solenoid, the bulb will glow brighter.
24. Assertion : An alternating current does not show any magnetic effect.
Reason : Alternating current varies with time.
25. Assertion : The dc and ac both can be measured by a hot wire instrument.
Reason : The hot wire instrument is based on the principle of magnetic effect of current.
26. Assertion : ac is more dangerous than dc
Reason : Frequency of ac is dangerous for human body.
93
27. Assertion : Average value of ac over a complete cycle is always zero.
Reason : Average value of ac is always defined over half cycle.
28. Assertion : The division are equally marked on the scale of ac ammeter.
Reason : Heat produced is directly proportional to the current.
29. Assertion : When ac circuit contain resistor only, its power is minimum.
Reason : Power of a circuit is independent of phase angle.
30. Assertion : An electric lamp connected in series with a variable capacitor and ac source, its
brightness increases with increase in capacitance.
Reason : Capacitive reactance decrease with increase in capacitance of capacitor.
31. Assertion : An inductance and a resistance are connected in series with an ac circuit. In this circuit
the current and the potential difference across the resistance lag behind potential
difference across the inductance by an angle /2.
Reason : In LR circuit voltage leads the current by phase angle which depends on the value of
inductance and resistance both.
32. Assertion : A capacitor of suitable capacitance can be used in an ac circuit in place of the choke coil.
Reason : A capacitor blocks dc and allows ac only.
Answers:-
1 a 6 c 11 d
2 c 7 b 12 d
3 a 8 c 13 a
4 b 9 a 14 b
5 a 10 b 15 b
Multiple Choice Type Questions
1. The peak value of an Alternating current is 6 amp, then r.m.s. value of current will be
(a) 3 A (b) 3 3 A (c) 3 2 A (d) 2 3A
2. The resonance point in X L − f and X C − f curves is
XL
P R S
Q f

XC

(a) P (b) Q (c)R (d) S

3. The variation of the instantaneous current (I) and the instantaneous emf (E) in a circuit is as shown in
fig. Which of the following statements is correct?
(a) The voltage lags behind the current by  / 2 E I
(b) The voltage leads the current by  / 2
/ 3 /
(c) The voltage and the current are in phase O
2  22 
(d) The voltage leads the current by   t
4. The voltage of an ac supply varies with time (t) as V = 120 sin 100  t cos 100  t. The maximum voltage and
frequency respectively are
(a) 120 volts, 100 Hz (b) 120 volts, 100 Hz (c) 60 volts, 200 Hz (d) 60
2
volts, 100 Hz

94
5. In the circuit shown in figure neglecting source resistance the voltmeter and ammeter reading will
respectively, will be V
(a) 0V, 3A (b) 150V, 3A
(c) 150V, 6A (d) 0V, 8A R = 30 XL = 25 XC = 25
A

6. In the circuit given below, what will be the reading of the voltmeter 240 V

(a) 300 V (b) 900 V V 100V 100V

(c) 200 V (d) 400 V

200V, 100 Hz

7. In a circuit L, C and R are connected in series with an alternating voltage source of frequency f . The
current leads the voltage by 45°. The value of C is
1 1 1 1
(a) (b) (c) (d)
2f (2fL + R) f (2fL + R) 2f (2fL − R) f (2fL − R)
 
8. If a current I given by I0 sin   t −  flows in an ac circuit across which an ac potential of E = E0 sin  t has
 2
been applied, then the power consumption P in the circuit will be
E0 I0 E0 I0
(a) P = (b) P = 2 E0 I0 (c) P = (d) P=0
2 2

9. A bulb is connected first with dc and then ac of same voltage then it will shine brightly with
(a) AC (b) DC (c)Brightness will be in ratio 1/1.4 (d) Equally with both
10. The phase angle between e.m.f. and current in LCR series ac circuit is
(a) 0 to  / 2 (b)  / 4 (c) / 2 (d) 
11. In a LCR circuit capacitance is changed from C to 2C. For the resonant frequency to remain unchanged,
the inductance should be change from L to
(a) 4L (b) 2L (c) L/2 (d) L/4
12. An alternating voltage E = 200 2 sin(100 t) is connected to a 1 microfarad capacitor through an ac
ammeter. The reading of the ammeter shall be
(a) 10 mA (b) 20 mA (c) 40 mA (d) 80 mA
13. The power factor of LCR circuit at resonance is
Y
(a) 0.707 (b) 1 (c) Zero (d) 0.5
+ 10
14. The r.m.s. voltage of the wave form shown is
(a) 10 V (b) 7 V 0 t

(c) 6.37 V (d) None of these – 10

15. In the circuit shown below, what will be the readings of the voltmeter and ammeter:
100 

(a) 800 V, 2A (b) 300 V, 2A V

A
(c) 220 V, 2.2 A (d) 100 V, 2A 300 V 300 V

220 V, 50 Hz
Answers:-
1 c 6 c 11 c
2 c 7 a 12 b
3 b 8 d 13 b
4 d 9 d 14 a

95
 5 d 10 a 15 c
1
− 2fL
XC − XL 2fC
(hints: 7. tan  =  tan 45 =
o
 C=
1
R R 2 f (2fL + R)
Vrms V C 200 2  100  (1  10 −6 )
12. Reading of ammeter = irms = = 0 = = 2  10 − 2 A = 20 m A
XC 2 2
(One Mark Questions)
1. Write an expression for impedance of L-C-R circuit. What is it’s S.I. unit ?
2. Write the factors on which resonant frequency of a series circuit depends.
3. Define the term ‘Wattless current’.
4. The power factor of an a.c. circuit is 0.5. What is the phase difference between the voltage and
current in the circuit ?
5. Write the principle of which a transformer works.
6. Why cannot a transformer works on d.c. ?
7. Why is the use of a.c. voltage is preferred over d.c. voltage ? Give two reasons.
8. These days most of the electrical devices we use require a.c. voltage. Why ?
9. Why is the core of a transformer is laminated ?
10. Why is the coils of primary and secondary wound on each another?
11. Can the current produced by an ac generator be measured with a moving coil galvanometer ?
12. In series LCR circuit, the voltages across an inductor, a capacitor and a resistor are 30V,
30V and 60 V respectively. What is the phase difference between the applied voltage and the
current in the circuit?
(Two Marks Questions)
1. A 400 mH coil of negligible resistance is connected to an AC circuit in which an effective current
of 6 mA is flowing. Find out the voltage across the coil if the frequency is 1000 Hz.
(hint: XL= ωL= 2520 Hz, Vrms=I XL= 15.07 V )
2. The instantaneous current and voltage of an a.c. circuit are given by i = 10 sin 300 t A and V = 200
sin 300 t V. What is the power dissipation in the circuit?
3. Plot a graph showing variation of capacitive reactance with the change in the frequency of the AC
source.
4. A 15.0 µF capacitor is connected to 220 V, 50 Hz source. Find the capacitive reactance and the rms
current.
5. Draw the variation graph between frequency of source versus resistance , capacitive reactance
and inductive reactance.
6. An RLC series circuit has R = 100 Ώ, C = 25 μF, and L = 0.16 H. For what angular frequency of an ac
voltage is the current flow maximum?
7. For circuits for transporting electric power, a low power factor implies large power loss in
transmission line. Why?
8. An LCR series circuit is connected to an AC source. Which of its components dissipates power?
L or C or R? Justify your answer.
9. When an AC source is connected to a capacitor with a dielectric slab between its plates, will the
rms current increase or decrease or remain constant?
10.Write any two differences between impedance and reactance.

96
 11.Draw phasor diagram for an LCR circuit for the cases (i) the voltage across the capacitor is greater
than that across the inductor (ii) voltage across inductor is greater than that across the capacitor.
12.Does current in AC circuit lag, lead or remain in phase with voltage of frequency υ applied to a
series LCR circuit when (i) υ = υr (ii) υ< υr (iii) υ > υr, where υr resonant frequency?
13.An inductor of inductance 100mH is connected in series with a resistance, a variable capacitance
and an AC source of frequency 2 kHz. What should be the value of the capacitance so that
maximum current may be drawn into the circuit?
Ans: 1/ωC=ωL ; C=1/ω2L=63nF.
14. In an AC circuit V and I are given by V=100Sin100t volts and I= 100 Sin(100t+π/3)mA
respectively. What is the power dissipated in the circuit?
Ans: V0=100V, I0=100A ,Ф= π/3, P=VrmsIrms Cos Ф=2500W
15. If the speed of rotation of armature is increased twice how would it affect the
(a) maximum e.m.f produced (b) frequency of the e.m.f?
Ans:-(e=NBAω ;f=ω/2Π)
(Three Marks Questions)
1. An AC- generator consists of a coil of 50 turns and an area of 2.5m2 rotating at an angular speed
of 60 rad/s in a uniform magnetic field of B= 0.3T between two fixed pole pieces. The resistance
of the circuit including that of the coil is 500Ώ
(i) What is the maximum current drawn from the generator?
(ii)What is the flux through the coil when current is zero?
(iii) What is the flux when current is maximum?
Ans:-(4.5A, 375Wb, zero)
2. How do R, XL and XC get affected when the frequency of applied AC is doubled?
3. Suppose the circuit parameters in a series RLC circuit are: L = 1.0 μH, C = 10.0 nF, R = 100Ώ, and
the source voltage is 220 V. Determine the resonant frequency of the circuit and the amplitude of
the current at esonance.
4. A 10Ώ resistor, 10mH inductor, and 10μF capacitor are connected in series with a 10kHz
voltage source. The rms current through the circuit is 0.20 A. Find the rms voltage drop across
each of the 3 elements.

5 A 15 μ F capacitor is connected to a 220 V, 50 Hz source. Find the capacitive reactance and the
current (rms and peak) in the circuit. If the frequency is doubled, what happens to the capacitive
reactance and the current?
Ans:- XC = 212 Ω; Irms= 1.038 A; i0 = 1.47 A; If doubles then XC halves and hence i doubles.
6. Calculate the current drawn by the primary of a transformer, which steps down 200 V to 20 V to
operate a device of resistance 20 Ω. Assume the efficiency of the transformer to be 80%.

(five Marks Question)

1. (a)An A.C source of voltage V= VmSinωt is connected one-by-one to three circuit elements X, Y and Z.
It is observed that the current flowing in them
i). is in phase with applied voltage for X
ii). Lags applied voltage in phase by π /2 for elements Y.
iii). Leads the applied voltage in phase by π /2 for element Z.
Identify the three circuit elements
(b) For a given alternating current, 𝐼 = 𝐼0 sin 𝜔𝑡, Show that the average power dissipated in a resistor
𝑅 over a complete cycle is 1/2 𝐼2𝑅.

97
2. In a step-up transformer, the transformation ratio is 100. The primary voltage is 220 V and input
power is 100 watt. The number of turns in primary is 100. Calculate
i. the number of turns in the secondary,
ii. the current in the primary,
iii. the voltage across the secondary and
iv. the current in the secondary.
V. the current in the primary,

3. (a) A series LCR circuit is connected to an a.c. source of variable frequency. Draw a suitable phasor
diagram to deduce the expressions for the amplitude of the current and phase angle.
(b) A sinusoidal emf E=200 sin 314t is applied to a resistor of 10 Ω resistance, calculate
(i) rms value of voltage
(ii) rms value of current

4. (a) An ac source of voltage v = v0 sin ωt is connected across a series combination of an inductor, a

capacitor and a resistor. Use the phasor diagram to obtain the expression for
(i)impedance of the circuit and
(ii) phase angle between the voltage and the current.
(b) A capacitor of unknown capacitance, a resistor of 100 Ω and an inductor of self-inductance L =
(4/π2) henry are in series connected to an ac source of 200 V and 50 Hz. Calculate the value of the
capacitance and the current that flows in the circuit when the current is in phase with the voltage.

( Case Study Based Questions )

1. Resonant Series LCR Circuit. When the frequency of ac supply is

such that the inductive reactance and capacitive reactance
become equal, the impedance of the series LCR circuit is equal to
the ohmic resistance in the circuit. Such a series LCR circuit is
known as resonant series LCR circuit and the frequency of the ac
supply is known as resonant frequency. Resonance phenomenon
is exhibited by a circuit only if both L and C are present in the
circuit. We cannot have resonance in a RL or RC circuit. A series
LCR circuit with L = 0.12 H, C = 480 nF, R = 23 Ω is Connect to a
230 V variable frequency supply

1) What is the importance of resonance in LCR circuits?

2) What are some uses of LCR circuits?
3) What are the roles of a capacitor and inductor in the LCR circuit?
(hint:- inductor opposes the change in the flow of current. A capacitor accumulates energy and gives off
it in a controlled way. It also helps in controlling the power or voltage that is supplied to the LCR circuit.
OR
In LCR series circuit capacitance changes from C to 5C for the resonant frequency to remain unchanged.
What should be change in Inductance?

2. A transformer is essentially an a.c. device. It cannot work on d.c. It changes alternating voltages or
currents. It does not affect the frequency of a.c. It is based on the phenomenon of mutual induction. A
transformer essentially consists of two coils of insulated copper wire having different number of turns
and wound on the same soft iron core.
98
 The number of turns in the primary and secondary coils of an ideal transformer are 2000 and 50
respectively. The primary coil is connected to a main supply of 120 V and secondary coil is connected
to a bulb of resistance 0.6Ω.
1) What is the power in secondary coil of the transformer?
2) What is the function of a step-up transformer?
3) Write any two factors responsible for energy losses in actual transformers?
OR
Can a transformer be used to step-up or step-down a DC voltage? Justify your answer.

3.When a pure resistance R, pure inductor L and an ideal

capacitor of capacitance C is connected in series to a source of
alternating e.m.f., then current at any instant through the three
elements has the same amplitude and is represented as I =
Iosinωt. However, voltage across each element has a different
phase relationship with the current as shown in graph.
The effective resistance of LCR circuit is called impedance Z of
the circuit and the voltage leads the current by a phase
angle ϕ. A resistor of 12Ω a capacitor of reactance 14Ω and a
pure inductor of inductance 0.1 H are joined in series and
placed across 200 V, 50 Hz a.c. supply.
1). what is the value of inductive reactance?
2) What is resonance condition?
3) Drive an expression for impedance (z) Of LCR circuit by using phasor diagram.
OR
What is the value of the phase angle between current and voltage?

99
 UNIT- V
CHAPTER-8 ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
Electromagnetic waves-A stationary charge produces only electrostatic field while a charge in
uniform motion produces electric and magnetic fields. An important result of Maxwell's theory is that
‘accelerated charges radiate electromagnetic waves. An oscillating charge produces an oscillating
electric field in space which produces an oscillating magnetic field, which in turn is a source of
oscillating electric field and so on.

Displacement Current- Displacement current arises due to rate of change of electric field with
time and termed as
𝑑𝛷𝐸
𝐼𝑑 = 𝜀0 ( )
𝑑𝑡
Need of displacement current
1. To remove the inconsistency in Ampere’s circuital law as modified Ampere’s Circuital Law
(Maxwell’s generalization of Ampere’s circuital law)

2. To Remove the inconsistency in Kirchhoff’s junction law of current during charging and
discharging of a capacitor. During charging and discharging, outside the capacitor conduction
current flows and inside displacement current flows.
𝐼𝑐 = 𝐼𝑑

Properties of em waves
1. Electromagnetic waves are transverse in nature, i.e. electric and magnetic fields are perpendicular to
each other and to the direction of wave propagation. Electromagnetic waves are not deflected by
electric and magnetic fields.
2. E (electric field) and B (magnetic field) in electromagnetic waves are in same phase.
1
3. Speed of electromagnetic wave is given by this formula in vacuum 𝑐 =
√µ0 ℰ0

1
In a medium 𝑣 =
√µℰ
𝑐
Or 𝑣=
√µ𝑟 ℰ𝑟

4. The energy in electromagnetic wave is divided on average equally between electric and magnetic
fields.
5. Energy associated with an electromagnetic wave is

100
 1 2
𝐵2
𝑈 = ℰ0 𝐸 +
2 2µ0
6. Linear momentum delivered to the surface p= U/c
7. The em waves show properties of reflection, refraction, polarization, interference, diffraction.
8. The ratio of the amplitudes of electric and magnetic fields is equal to the velocity of the
𝐸
electromagnetic wave. 𝑐 = 𝐵0
0

9. The refractive index of a material is given by: 𝑛 = √µ𝑟 ℰ𝑟

10. For electromagnetic waves 𝐸⃗ and 𝐵⃗ are always perpendicular to each other and perpendicular to
the direction of propagation. The direction of propagation is the direction of 𝐸⃗ 𝑋𝐵
⃗ .

Diagram of electromagnetic wave

Equations of em waves
The wave propagating in x direction and electric field vector is in y direction
𝐸𝑦 = 𝐸0 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜔𝑡 − 𝑘𝑥)

⃗⃗⃗⃗
𝐸𝑦 = 𝐸0 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜔𝑡 − 𝑘𝑥)𝑗̂

The wave propagating in x direction and magnetic field vector is in Z direction the magnetic field
𝐵𝑧 = 𝐵0 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜔𝑡 − 𝑘𝑥)
̂𝑧 = 𝐵0 𝑠𝑖𝑛(𝜔𝑡 − 𝑘𝑥)𝑧̂
𝐵
𝜔 𝐸 𝐸0
Speed of wave in the medium 𝑣 = , and the ratio = =𝑣
𝑘 𝐵 𝐵0

Electromagnetic Spectrum
Em wave ϒ-ray x-ray Ultraviole visible Infrared Microwav Radio
t (U.V.) e wave
Frequenc 1020 – 1024 1017 – 1020 1015 – 1017 (4x1014- 1013 – 3 x 1011 – < 3 x 1011
y (Hz) 7x1014) 1014 1013

101
 Wave <10-12m 10-9 to 10- 4X10-7m 10-3m to 0.1m to >0.1m
length(m) 12m to 10-9m (7x10-7m to 7X10-7m 10-3m
4x10-7m)

Productio Nuclear Bombardin Sun, By sun and By hot Magnetron Oscillatin

n reaction, g of Gaseous incandesce bodies, , and g charge,
Radioactiv energetic discharge nt bodies so called Klystron (LC
e decay, electrons tube, Arc and ionized heat circuits)
vibrations on heavy Lamps, gas, waves,
of nucleus metals mercury transition vibration
vapor of electrons s of
lamps in atoms atoms

USES of em waves
1. Radiowaves : Radio waves are used in radio and television transmission, wireless communications.
2. Microwaves: Microwaves are used inradar communication systems,speed detectors, in microwave
oven,to study molecular structure.
3. Infrared Rays: (i) They are used for taking photographs during the conditions of fog, smokes, etc.
This is called "infrared photography".
i) Infrared rays are characterized by heating effect. This is because water molecules heat up when
they absorb infrared waves. This property makes them useful to keep the plants warm, to produce heat
in solar water heaters and cookers. That is why infrared rays are sometimes called heat waves.
(ii) Infrared rays can cause photoelectric effect (i.e., emission of electrons from some metals e.g., Cs).
This property makes them useful for "infrared sensitive photoelectric burglar alarms."
(iii) Infrared rays are used in checking the purity of chemicals and in the study of molecular structure
by taking the infrared absorption spectrum.
Greenhouse Effect: Infrared radiations have quite a long wavelength range. An important property of
glass is that it transmits infrared radiation of very short wavelength while it reflects infrared radiations
of long wavelengths. This property of glass is used to keep the plants safe in severe winter in
greenhouses. The glass of greenhouse allows the visible light and infrared radiations of short
wavelength to pass through these radiations are absorbed by plants inside it. As a result they become
warm. The warm objects emit infrared radiations of longer wavelengths. These longer wavelength
radiations are reflected by glass walls of greenhouse and so are retained inside. Thus, the heat remains
inside the greenhouse.
4. Visible light: The use of visible light is self-evident because no one can see in the absence of visible
light. Visible light finds use in all optical devices, e.g, microscopes, telescopes, camera, etc. It is used to
study molecular structure and arrangement of electrons in external shells of atoms.
5. Ultraviolet Rays: ) They are used to detect invisible writing, forged documents, molecular structure
and finger-prints.
(i) They are used to destroy bacteria and for sterilizing surgical instruments, LASIK eye surgery.

102
(ii) They are used to preserve foodstuff.
(iv) They are used in burglar alarms.
6. X-rays:
(i) X-rays are used to reveal the structure of molecules and arrangement of electrons in inner atomic
shells.
(ii) In the field of medicine, they are used to diagnose diseases e.g., cracks in bones, detection of tumors,
stone in kidney and gall bladder, etc. X-rays damage living tissues and organisms, therefore
unnecessary exposure of X-rays on human beings must be avoided.
(iii) In engineering they are used for detecting faults, cracks, flaws and holes in final metal products.
(iv) In customs department they are used to detect explosives, diamond, gold, etc. in the possession of
smugglers.
7. Y-rays: They are used to study the structure of atoms nuclei, treatment of cancer cells.

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. The Direction of em wave is same as in direction of
(a) 𝐸⃗ 𝑋𝐵
⃗
⃗ 𝑋𝐸⃗
(b) 𝐵
⃗
(c) 𝐵
(d) 𝐸⃗
2. The phase difference between electric field and magnetic field at any instant in EM waves
𝜋
(a) 2
(b) π
𝜋
(c) 4
(d) 0
3. A propagating Electromagnetic wave can be produced by
(a) Charge moving at a constant speed
(b) Collision of charged particles
(c) Stationary charge
(d) An accelerating charge

4. The relative permeability of glass is 0.375 and relative permittivity is 8,its refractive index is
(a) 1.33 (B)1.41 (C)1.72 (D)1.50
5. The penetrating power is maximum for
(a) Gamma rays (b)X Rays (c)UV rays (d)Radio wave
6. An EM wave is travelling in vacuum. Amplitude of the electric field vector is 6 × 104 V/m. The amplitude of
magnetic field vector is
(a) 18 X 1012T (b)2 X 10-4T (c)2 X 10-9T (d)Zero

1 2 3 4 5 6
a d d c a b

103
 2 MARKS QUESTIONS
1. How is electromagnetic wave produced? Draw a sketch of a plane e.m. wave propagating
along X-axis depicting the directions of the oscillating electric and magnetic fields.
2. Give one use of each of the following (i) MICROWAVE (ii) X-RAY
3. How are the following types of electromagnetic waves produced : (i) Microwaves (ii) Infra-red
waves. Write two important uses of each of the above electromagnetic radiations.
4. An EM wave has amplitude of electric field E0 and amplitude of magnetic field is B0. The electric
field at some instant become half of its amplitude3 . 4 E What will be magnetic field at this
instant? (Wave is travelling in vacuum).
5. Identify the part of the electromagnetic spectrum to which the following wavelengths belong
and write one use of each:
(i) 10–5 m (ii) 10–10 m
6. A parallel plate capacitor is being charged by a time varying current. Explain briefly how
amperes circuital law is generalized to incorporate the effect due to the displacement current.
7. The oscillating magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given by

BY = 8 X 10-6 sin (2 x 1011 t + 300πx)] T

a. Calculate the wavelength of electromagnetic wave?
b. Write down the expression for the oscillating electric field.

3 MARKS QUESTIONS
1. (a) Which one of the following electromagnetic radiations has least frequency: UV radiations,
X-rays, Microwaves (b) How do you show that electromagnetic waves carry energy and
momentum?
(c) Write the expression for the energy density of an electromagnetic wave propagating
in free space.
2. How are electromagnetic waves produced? What is the source of energy of these waves? Write
mathematical expressions for electric and magnetic fields of an electromagnetic wave
propagating along the z-axis. Write any two important properties of electromagnetic waves.
3. Identify the parts of the e.m. spectrum which have the wavelengths  in the range:
(i) 10–3 m <   10–1 m (ii) 10–6 m <  ≤ 10–4 m (iii) 10–9 m <  < 10–7 m.
Write one important use of each of these waves.
4. Write Maxwell’s generalization of Ampere’s Circuital Law. Show that in the process of charging a
𝑑𝛷𝐸
capacitor, the current produced within the plates of the capacitor is 𝐼𝑑 = 𝜀0 ( ) where ΦE is the
𝑑𝑡
electric flux produced during charging of the capacitor plates.

5. Arrange the following electromagnetic waves in the order of their increasing wavelength:
(a) -rays (b) Microwaves (c) X-rays (d) Radio waves How are infra-red waves produced?
What role does infra-red radiation play in (i) maintaining the Earth’s warmth and (ii)
physical therapy?

104
 6. An EM wave travelling through a medium has electric field vector.
Ey = 4 × 105 cos (3.14 × 108 t – 1.57x) N/C.
Here x is in m and t in s. Then find:
(i) Wavelength (ii) Frequency (iii) Direction of propagation (iv) Speed of wave (v) Refractive
index of medium (vi) Amplitude of magnetic field vector.

CASE STUDY BASED QUESTIONS

The radio spectrum includes frequencies between 3 kilohertz (kHz) and 300 gigahertz (GHz). Early
cellular networks, including 1G, operated at a frequency of 850 MHz and 1900 MHz Then, 2G and 3G
networks operated at additional frequency bands and spectrum around 2100 MHz, and 4G LTE
technology operated at additional frequency bands and spectrum around 600 MHz, 700 MHz, 1.7/2.1
GHz, 2.3 GHz, and 2.5 GHz. Verizon’s 5G Ultra-Wideband network operates at considerably higher radio
frequencies than its early mobile counterparts. 5G, the newest generation of cellular.
(i) What is the wavelength range of cellular network 1G.
(ii) What is electromagnetic spectrum of cellular spectrum?
(iii) Why high radio frequency is preferred for communication?
(iv) For the Newest generation of cellular 5G more numbers of towers antennae required, Why?

105
 UNIT-VI
CHAPTER -9
OPTICS AND OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS RAY
Lens maker formula Total internal reflection REFRACTION THROUGH A
For refracting surface ABC, Mirage, Totally reflecting PRISM
prisms, Fiber optic-Used in
endoscopy and
communication, Sparkling of
(𝒏𝟐 −𝒏𝟏)
the diamonds.
𝒏𝟐 𝒏𝟏
− = …………….(1)
𝒗′ 𝒖 𝑹𝟏

For refracting surface ADC,

MIND MAP
 = (𝑖 + 𝑒) – 𝐴
RAY OPTICS At minimum deviation,
MIND MAP 𝒊 = 𝒆 and 𝒓𝟏 = 𝒓𝟐 = 𝒓
𝑨+𝒎
𝒔𝒊𝒏𝒊 𝒔𝒊𝒏{ }
𝟐
𝒏𝟏 𝒏𝟐 (𝒏𝟐 −𝒏𝟏) 𝒏𝟐𝟏 = = 𝑨
− = ………..(2) 𝒔𝒊𝒏𝒓 𝒔𝒊𝒏
𝒗 𝒗′ −𝑹𝟐 𝟐
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
= (𝒏𝟐𝟏 − 𝟏) [ − ]
𝒇 𝑹𝟏 𝑹𝟐
GIST OF RAY OPTICS
Compound microscope Telescope Reflection of light: - The
Reflecting type telescope:- bouncing of light back into the
Advantages are (1) Image is same medium from a surface is
much brighter (2) No
called reflection of light.
chromatic aberration and (3)
Less mechanical support and
When image is formed at near point D ➢ Laws of reflection: - i) Angle
high resolution.
(Near point adjustment) of incidence is equal to the angle
When image is formed at far point i.e.
Magnifying power – at infinity of incidence.
( Normal adjustment) ii) The
𝜷 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝜷 incidence ray, the reflected ray
𝒎= = = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒 Magnifying power –
𝜶 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝜶 and normal to the surface at
𝑣𝑜 𝐷 𝜷 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝜷 −𝑓𝑜 the point of incidence all lie in
= (1 + ) 𝒎= = 𝑚=
−𝑢𝑜 𝑓𝑒 𝜶 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝜶 𝑓𝑒 the same plane.
𝑂𝑅 Note:-tube length=f0+fe ➢ Types of spherical mirrors:
𝐿 𝐷 Concave and Convex.
𝑚 = − (1 + )
𝑓𝑜 𝑓𝑒 ➢ The relation between
object distance, image distance
and the focal length of a mirror is
called mirror formula.
➢ The ratio of size of image to the size of object is called the magnification produced by the
mirror.

106
 Derivation of mirror formula:
∆𝐴𝐵𝐶 and ∆𝐴´𝐵´𝐶 are similar
A’B’/AB = B’C/CB = PC-PB’)/ (PB-PC) …..(1)
∆𝐴𝐵𝑃 and ∆𝐴´𝐵´𝑃 are also similar
A’B’/AB =PB’/PB …..(2)
Compare eqn (1) and (2) …
PB’/PB = (PC-PB’)/ (PB-PC)
-v/-u = (2f + v )/ (-u+2f)
2𝑢𝑣 = 2𝑣f + 2𝑢f
Dividing by 2𝑢𝑣f on both sides we get,

Refraction of light: - Bending of light from its actual path, when it passes obliquely from one medium to
another having different optical densities.

Snell's Law: -The ratio of the sine of the incident Examples :- 1. Sun can be seen before actual
angle to the sine of the refracted angle is a constant. sunrise and after actual sunset due to
Sin i / sin r = n2 / n1 OR Atmospheric refraction
Sin i / Sin r = n21 2. An object under water (any medium ) appears
n1 sin i = n2 sin r to be raised due to refraction when observed
OR inclined
v2 sin i = v1 sin r n = (Real depth / Apparent depth) and Shift
 1
in the position (apparent) of object is x = t 1 − 
 n
Where t is the actual depth of the medium

Critical angle (ic): - The angle of incidence in denser medium for which the
angle of refraction in rarer medium is 90° is called the critical angle.
𝟏 𝒏𝒓
𝒔𝒊𝒏 𝒊𝒄 = 𝒏𝒂𝒘 = Note:- If rarer medium is not air then 𝒔𝒊𝒏 𝒊𝒄 =
𝒏𝒘𝒂 𝒏𝒅

Total internal reflection: - When angle of

incidence of the ray incident on rarer medium
from denser medium, is greater than the
critical angle, the incident ray does not refract
into rarer medium but is reflected back into
denser medium. This phenomenon is called
total internal reflection
107
Applications of Total internal reflection:
Totally reflecting prisms:- Bend the light at
either 900 fig (a) or 1800 fig (b)

Fiber-optic: -Fine fiber of glass or quartz in which 2

light enter from one end and comes out from another 1

end due to total internal reflection is called optical

fiber.
Used in endoscopy and communication Here ncore >n clading

Refraction through Spherical surface:

From fig, in  MOC, 𝒊 = 𝜶 + 𝜸 ----------
(1)
and in  MCI, 𝜸 = 𝒓 + 𝜷 ⇒ 𝒓 = 𝜸 − 𝜷 ------(2)
𝒔𝒊𝒏 𝒊 𝒏
From laws of refraction,𝒔𝒊𝒏 𝒓 = 𝒏𝟐 --------(3)
𝟏
𝒊 𝒏𝟐
For small angles, = 𝒏 ⇒ 𝒏𝟏 𝒊 = 𝒏𝟐 𝒓---------(4)
𝒓 𝟏
Using (1) and (2) in (4),
𝒏𝟏 (𝜶 + 𝜸) = 𝒏𝟐 ( 𝜸 − 𝜷) -----------(5)
𝑴𝑳 𝑴𝑳 𝑴𝑳 𝑴𝑳
𝒏𝟏 ( + ) = 𝒏𝟐 ( − )
𝑷𝑶 𝑷𝑪 𝑷𝑪 𝑷𝑰
𝒏𝟏 𝒏𝟏 𝒏𝟐 𝒏𝟐 𝒏𝟐 𝒏𝟏
⇒ + = − ⇒ +
𝑷𝑶 𝑷𝑪 𝑷𝑪 𝑷𝑰 𝑷𝑰 𝑷𝑶
𝒏𝟐 𝒏𝟏
= –
𝑷𝑪 𝑷𝑪
𝒏 𝒏 (𝒏𝟐 −𝒏𝟏)
⇒ 𝑷𝑰𝟐 + 𝑷𝑶𝟏 = 𝑷𝑪 -----------(6)
𝒏𝟐 𝒏𝟏 (𝒏𝟐 −𝒏𝟏)
Using sign convention, − =
𝒗 𝒖 𝑹

Thin lens formula:-

Let, O = optic centre, F1 and F2 be the principal
focii. Object AB is place beyond F2 and the real
image formed by it is A'B' beyond F2
From fig,  A’B’F2 ONF2,
𝑨′ 𝑩′ 𝑨′ 𝑩′ 𝑭𝟐 𝑨′ 𝑶𝑨′ −𝑶𝑭𝟐 𝒗−𝒇
= = = = ------(1)
𝑶𝑵 𝑨𝑩 𝑶𝑭𝟐 𝑶𝑭𝟐 𝒇
Again,  A’B’O  ABO,
𝑨′ 𝑩′ 𝑶𝑨′ 𝒗
= 𝑶𝑨 = −𝒖 ----(2)
𝑨𝑩
Note:- If f>4D (D is separation between object
From (1) and (2),
𝒗−𝒇 𝒗 and screen) then we obtain two conjugate
= −𝒖 ⇒ 𝒖𝒇 − 𝒗𝒇 = 𝒖𝒗 positions of lens for which sharp images of object
𝒇
Dividing by uvf
𝟏 𝟏
−𝒖 =𝒇
𝟏
------(3) can be obtained on screen. In such case focal
𝒗 𝑫𝟐 − 𝑿𝟐
𝑨′ 𝑩′ 𝒗 length of lens is f=
Magnification m = = 𝒖 ………….. (4) 𝟒𝑫
𝑨𝑩
where X is separation between two conjugate
positions of lens

108
Lens maker formula:-
For refracting surface ABC,
𝒏𝟐 𝒏𝟏 (𝒏𝟐 −𝒏𝟏)
− = …………….(1)
𝒗′ 𝒖 𝑹𝟏
For refracting surface ADC,
𝒏𝟏 𝒏𝟐 (𝒏𝟐 −𝒏𝟏)
− = ………..(2)
𝒗 𝒗′ −𝑹𝟐
Adding (1) and (2)
𝒏𝟏 𝒏𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
− = (𝒏𝟐 − 𝒏𝟏 ) [ − ]
𝒗 𝒖 𝑹𝟏 𝑹𝟐
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
𝒗 − 𝒖 = (𝒏𝟐𝟏 − 𝟏) [𝑹 − 𝑹 ]
𝟏 𝟐
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
𝒇 = (𝒏𝟐𝟏 − 𝟏) [𝑹 − 𝑹 ] ………(3)
𝟏 𝟐

Lens Immersed in a Liquid:−If a lens

(made of glass) of refractive index ng is
immersed in a liquid of refractive index nl
then its focal length in liquid, fl is given by
1  1 1 
= ( l n g − 1)  − 
fl  R1 R2 
f l ( a n g − 1)
 =
f a ( l n g − 1)
Note:- If nl > ng Lens changes its nature
and if nl < ng Lens doesn’t change
nature.

Power of lens:- The power of a lens is its ability to deviate the rays towards its principal axis. It is
defined as the reciprocal of focal length in metre. Its S.I. unit is dioptre (D).
1 1 1
So P = 𝑓 = (𝑛21 − 1) [𝑅 − 𝑅 ]
1 2
Note:- Since ƛr > ƛv and n α 1/ƛ so fr > fv and Pr < Pv
Combination of thin lenses:- 𝟏
𝒇𝒄
=
𝟏
𝒇𝟏
+
𝟏
𝒇𝟐
, Net Power P = P1 + P2 ,

Net magnification m = m1 x m2

REFRACTION THROUGH A PRISM:-

From  QMR,
 = (𝑖 − 𝑟1 ) + (𝑒 − 𝑟2 ) = (𝑖 + 𝑒) − ( 𝑟1 + 𝑟2 )--------(1)
From Quad. AQNR,
A+900+900+QNR=3600A +QNR=1800 -----(2)
From  QNR,
𝑟1 + 𝑟2 +QNR=1800 ----------(3)
from (2)&(3),𝐴 = 𝑟1 + 𝑟2 ----------(4)
Using (4) in (1), = (𝑖 + 𝑒) – 𝐴 ------------(5)

109
 At angle of minimum deviation, refracted ray inside
the prism is parallel to the base of the prism.
At 𝒎 , refracted ray inside the prism is parallel to
the base of the prism.
therefore,𝒊 = 𝒆 and 𝒓𝟏 = 𝒓𝟐 = 𝒓-------(6)
𝐴+
Using (6) in (5),𝑚 = 2𝑖 – 𝐴 𝑖 = 2 𝑚 --------(7)
Also using (6) in (4),𝐴 = 2𝑟 ⇒ 𝑟 = 𝐴/2-------(8)
On applying Snell’s Law at surface AB,
𝑨+𝒎
𝒔𝒊𝒏𝒊 𝒔𝒊𝒏{ }
𝟐
𝒏𝟐𝟏 = = 𝑨 --------(9)
𝒔𝒊𝒏𝒓 𝒔𝒊𝒏
𝟐

DISPERSION OF WHITE LIGHT BY A GLASS PRISM :-

When a ray of white light enters the prism, Due to
the angle of the prism and due to different
wavelengths of different components of white light;
the emergent ray gets segregated into seven
different colours(VIBGYOR). Finally, a colourful
band of seven colours is obtained. This
phenomenon is called dispersion of white light by
the prism.
OPTICAL INSTRUMENTS
Simple Microscope:- It is a simple magnifier converging lens of small focal length.
For near point adjustment
Magnification m = 1 + D / f

For normal adjustment

Magnification m = D / f

Compound microscope:- - It is used to obtain magnified images of tiny or micro objects. A compound
microscope consists of two converging lenses (fe>fo). The object to be magnified is placed just beyond
the focus of the objective lens which forms a real, inverted image. This image is either at the focus or
within the focus of the eye lens. The eye lens acts as a simple microscope and forms final image that is
virtual, erect and magnified (at D or at infinity).

110
 When image is formed at far point i.e. at infinity
( Normal adjustment)

Magnifying power –
𝜷 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝜷
𝒎 = 𝜶 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝜶 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒
𝐿 𝐷 𝑣𝑜 𝐷
𝑚 = − OR 𝑚 =
𝑓𝑜 𝑓𝑒 −𝑢𝑜 𝑓𝑒
Note:- tube length = 𝑣𝑜 + [−𝑢𝑒 ]
When image is formed at near point D (Near
point adjustment)

Magnifying power –
𝜷 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝜷
𝒎 = 𝜶 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝜶 = 𝑚𝑜 𝑚𝑒
𝑣𝑜 𝐷 𝐿 𝐷
𝑚= (1 + ) 𝑂𝑅 𝑚 = − (1 + )
−𝑢𝑜 𝑓𝑒 𝑓𝑜 𝑓𝑒

Telescope:-A telescope is an optical instrument to observe distant objects. It increases the angular
size of the final image many times the angular size of the object, which is far away.
(A) Refracting telescope These telescopes consist of two lenses, one objective of long focal length,
which forms a real image of the distant object and the other eyepiece of small focal length.
When image is formed at far point i.e. at
infinity ( Normal adjustment)

Magnifying power –
𝜷 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝜷
𝒎 = 𝜶 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝜶
−𝑓𝑜
𝑚= Note:- tube
𝑓𝑒
length=f0+fe
When image is formed at near point D
(Near point adjustment)

Magnifying power –
𝜷 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝜷
𝒎 = 𝜶 = 𝐭𝐚𝐧 𝜶
−𝑓 𝑓
𝑚 = 𝑓 𝑜 [ 1 + 𝐷𝑒 ]
𝑒

Note:- Two main considerations for manufacturing an astronomical telescope are- (1) Light gathering
power, which is proportional to square of aperture of objective (2) Resolving power which is
proportional to aperture of objective. So in telescope the size of objective is kept large.
(B) Reflecting type telescope:- Advantages are (1) Image is much brighter (2) No chromatic
aberration and (3) Less mechanical support and high resolution (4) No spherical aberration.

111
 Magnifying power
𝑓𝑜 𝑅/2
𝑚= =
𝑓𝑒 𝑓𝑒

Note :- spherical aberration occurs when a lens can't focus a single color of light, chromatic aberration
occurs when a lens can't focus the various colors (wavelengths) at a single point. Each lens has what's called a
refractive index (its ability to bend light).

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

1. An equiconvex lens of focal length 15 cm is cut into two halves as shown in figure. Find thefocal length
of each part?

(a) -30cm (b) -20cm (c) 30cm (d) -15cm

2. How does the focal length of a convex lens changes if mono
chromatic red light is used instead of violet light?
(a)Focal length is increased when red light is used (b) Focal length is decreased when red light is used
(c)Focal length is remain same when red light is used (d) Not depends on color of light.

3. A glass lens is immersed in water. What will be the effect on the power of lens?
(a) Increase (b) decrease (c) constant (d) not depends

4. How does the magnifying power of a telescope change on increasing the linear diameter of its
objective?
(a) Power increases on increasing diameter (b) Power decreases on increasing diameter
(c) Power remain constant on increasing diameter (d) Power doesn’t depends on diameter
5. What is the magnification and focal length of a plane mirror.
(a) 1, ∞ (b) 1, 0 (c) -1, ∞ (d) 0,1
6. An object approaches a convergent lens from the left of the lens with a uniform speed 5 m/sand
stops at the focus. The image
(a) moves away from the lens with an uniform speed 5 m/s.
(b) moves away from the lens with an uniform acceleration.
(c) moves away from the lens with a non-uniform acceleration.
(d) moves towards the lens with a non-uniform acceleration.

7. An astronomical telescope has a large aperture to:

(a) increase span of observation (b) have low dispersion
(c)reduce spherical aberration (d) have high resolution

112
8. The optical density of turpentine is higher than that of water while its mass density is lowershows a
layer of turpentine floating over water in a container. For which one of the four rays incident on
turpentine in the path shown is correct?

(a) 1 (b) 2 (c) 3 (d) 4

9. When diameter of objective of an astronomical telescope is

doubled , its limit of resolution is
(a) Doubled (b) one fourth (c) halved (d) unaffected
10. A short pulse of white light incident from air to glass slab at normal incidence. After travelling
through the slab the first colour to emerge is
(a) Violet (b) blue (c) green (d) red
11. Two lenses of focal lengths 20 cm and - 40cm are held in contact. If an object lies at infinity,image
formed by the lens combination will be at
(a) Infinity (b) 20cm (c) 40cm (d) 60cm

12. Optical fibers are based on the phenomenon of

(a) Reflection (b) refraction (c)dispersion (d) total internal reflection

13. The characteristic feature of light which remains unaffected on refraction is

(a) Speed (b) frequency (c)wavelength (d) velocity of light
14. The velocity of light in a medium is half its velocity in air. If ray of light emerges from such a medium
into air, the angle of incidence, at which it will just suffer total internal reflection, is

(a) 15o (b)30 o (c) 45 o (d) 60 o

15. Relation between critical angles of water and glass is
(a) Cw > Cg (b) Cw < Cg (c) Cw = Cg (d) Cw = Cg = 0
16. If Fo and Fe are the focal length of the objective and eye-piece respectively of a telescope, then its
magnifying power will be
1
(a) Fo + Fe (b) Fo  Fe (c) Fo / Fe (d) (Fo + Fe )
2

17. The radius of curvature for a convex lens is 40 cm, for each surface. Its refractive index is 1.5. The focal
length will be
(a) 40 cm (b) 20 cm (c) 80 cm (d) 30 cm
18. A thin lens focal length f1 and its aperture has diameter d. It forms an image of intensity I. Now the
d
central part of the aperture up to diameter is blocked by an opaque paper. The focal length and image
2
intensity will change to
f I I 3f I 3I
(a) and (b) f and (c) and (d) f and
2 2 4 4 2 4

113
19. A lens of power + 2 diopters is placed in contact with a lens of power – 1 dioptre. The combination will
behave like
(a) A convergent lens of focal length 50 cm (b) A divergent lens of focal length 100 cm
(c) A convergent lens of focal length 100 cm (d) A convergent lens of focal length 200 cm
20. Two lenses are placed in contact with each other and the focal length of combination is 80 cm. If the
focal length of one is 20 cm, then the power of the other will be
(a) 1.66 D (b) 4.00 D (c) –1.00 D (d) – 3.75 D
21. A glass convex lens (g = 1.5) has a focal length of 8 cm when placed in air. What would be the focal length
of the lens when it is immersed in water ( n w = 1.33 )
(a) 2m (b) 4 cm (c) 16 cm (d) 32 cm
22. The ray diagram could be correct
(a) If n1 = n2 = ng (b) If n1 = n2 and n1  ng

(c) If n1 = n 2 and n1  ng (d) Under no circumstances ng

n1
n2
Lens
23. Focal length of a convex lens will be maximum for
(a) Blue light (b) Yellow light (c) Green light (d) Red light
24. A point object O is placed in front of a glass rod having spherical end of radius of curvature 30 cm. The
image would be formed at
(a) 30 cm left (b) Infinity (c) 1 cm to the right (d) 18 cm to the left
O Air Glass
30 cm
15 cm

25. A parallel beam of monochromatic light is incident at one surface of a equilateral prism. Angle of incidence
is 55° and angle of emergence is 46°. The angle of deviation will be (a) Less than
41° (b) Equal to 41° (c) More than 41° (d) None of the above
Answer key
1 c 6 c 11 C 16 c 21 d
2 a 7 d 12 d 17 a 22 c
3 b 8 b 13 b 18 d 23 d
4 d 9 c 14 B 19 c 24 a
5 a 10 d 15 a 20 d 25 b

Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R).
Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given
below. (a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A (b) Both A and R
are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A ( c) A is true but R is false ( d) A is false
and R is also false.

114
33. Assertion : The air bubble shines in water.
Reason : Air bubble in water shines due to refraction of light
34. Assertion : The refractive index of diamond is 6 and that of liquid is 3 . If the light travels from
diamond to the liquid, it will totally reflected when the angle of incidence is 50o.
1
Reason : n= , where n is the refractive index of diamond with respect to liquid
sin C
35. Assertion : Dispersion of light occurs because velocity of light in a material depends upon its colour.
Reason : The dispersive power depends only upon the material of the prism, not upon the refracting
angle of the prism.
36. Assertion : The focal length of lens does change when red light is replaced by blue light.
Reason : The focal length of lens does depend on colour of light used.
37. Assertion : If objective and eye lenses of a microscope are interchanged then it can work as telescope.
Reason : The objective of telescope has small focal length.
38. Assertion : If the angles of the base of the prism are equal, then in the position of minimum deviation,
the refracted ray will pass parallel to the base of prism.
Reason : In the case of minimum deviation, the angle of incidence is equal to the angle of emergence.
39. Assertion : There is no dispersion of light refracted through a rectangular glass slab.
Reason : Dispersion of light is the phenomenon of splitting of a beam of white light into its constituent
colours.
40. Assertion : A double convex lens (n= 1.5) has focal length 10 cm. When the lens is immersed in water (n =
4/3) its focal length becomes 40 cm.
1 nl − nm  1 1 
Reason : Because the focal length of lens in liquid =  − 
f nm  R1 R2 
41. Assertion : The frequencies of incident, reflected and refracted beam of monochromatic light incident
from one medium to another are same
Reason : The incident, reflected and refracted rays are coplanar
42. Assertion : If the angles of the base of the prism are equal, then in the position of minimum deviation,
the refracted ray will pass parallel to the base of prism.
Reason : In the case of minimum deviation, the angle of incidence is equal to the angle of emergence.
Answer key
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
c a b a d a b a b a
2 marks numerical
Q.1 A double convex lens is made of a glass of refractive index 1.5, with both faces of the same radius of
curvature. Find the radius of curvature required, if the focal length is 20cm.
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
Ans. From lens maker formula:- = (𝒏𝒈 − 𝟏) [𝑹 − 𝑹 ]
𝒇 𝟏 𝟐

115
 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟐
For convex lens R1 = +R and R2 = -R so :- = (1.5 − 𝟏) [ − ]  = x  R = 20 cm
𝟐𝟎 R −R 𝟐𝟎 𝟐 R

Q.2 A screen is placed at a distance of 100 cm from an object . The image of the object is formed on the
screen by a convex lens for two different locations of the lens separated by 20 cm. calculate the
focal
length of the lens used .
𝑫𝟐 − 𝑿𝟐
Ans. For two conjugate positions of lens f =
𝟒𝑫

Here D = 100 cm and X = 20 cm so f = (1002 - 202 )/4x100 = 9600 /400

= 24 cm.
Q.3 A ray PQ incident on the refracting face BA is refracted in the prism BAC
as shown in the figure and emerges from the other refracting face AC as RS
such that AQ=AR .If the angle of prism =60° and refractive index of material
of prism is √3, calculate angle ϴ.
Ans. Here AQ=AR So the ray QR within the prism will be parallel to the base BC. Thus angle ϴ is the
angle of minimum deviation. So from prism formula-
𝑨+𝒎 60°+ϴ
𝒔𝒊𝒏{ } 𝒔𝒊𝒏{ 𝟐 }
𝒏𝟐𝟏 = 𝟐
𝑨  √3 = 60°  √3 x Sin 30° = Sin (30°+ ϴ/2)
𝒔𝒊𝒏
𝟐
𝒔𝒊𝒏 𝟐

 √3/2 = Sin (30°+ ϴ/2)  30°+ ϴ/2 = 60° So ϴ = 60°

Q4. A converging lens is kept coaxially in contact with a diverging lens - both the lenses being of equal
focal lengths. What is the focal length of the combination?
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
Ans. For combination of two lenses 𝒇 = 𝒇 + 𝒇 Now for convex lens f1= +f and for concave lens f2 = -f
𝒄 𝟏 𝟐

so 𝑓 = 𝑓 − 𝑓 = 0  f = Infinity i.e. The combination does behave as plane surface.

1 1 1
𝑐

Q5. The image obtained with a convex lens is erect and its length is four times the length of the object. If
the focal length of the lens is 20 cm, calculate the object and image distances.
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 −𝟑 𝟏
Ans. Given m = 𝑢 = 4  v = 4u Now from    u = - 15 cm
𝑣
− = − = =
𝒗 𝒖 𝒇 4u 𝒖 𝟐𝟎 4u 𝟐𝟎

 v = 4 x – 15 = - 60 cm
Q6. A thin converging lens and a thin diverging lens of power 5 D and 2.5 D are placed in contact. What is
the focal length of the combination?
Ans. For converging lens P1 = + 5 D and for diverging lens P2 = - 2.5 D
So net power of combination P = P1+P2 = 5 - 2.5 = +2.5 D

Now from P = 1/f  f = 1/P  f = 1 / 2.5 = 0.4 m or 40 cm.

116
Q7. A right angle prism is placed as shown in the figure. Given that the prism is made of glass with R.I. as
1.5, trace the path of the ray P incident normal to the face AC.

Ans. From 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑖𝑐 = 1/𝑛  𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑖𝑐 = 1/1.5 = 2/3

So ic = 420

Here angle of incidence at interface AC is 450 i.e i > ic

So the ray undergoes TIR.
Q8. A convex lens made up of glass of refractive index 1.5 is dipped, in turn,
in (i) a medium of refractive index 1.65, (ii) a medium of refractive index 1.33. Will it behave as a
converging or a diverging lens in the two cases?
( a n g − 1)
Ans. The focal length of lens in a liquid is fl = fa
( l n g − 1)

So if nl > ng then fl will have opposite sign to fa and if nl < ng then fl will have same sign to that of fa.

Thus for (i) n = 1.65 convex lens changes its nature and behaves as diverging while (ii) n =1.33 convex
lens does not change its nature and behaves as converging.
Q9. Compound microscope uses an objective lens of focal length 4 cm and eyepiece lens of focal length
10 cm. An object is placed at 6 cm from the objective lens. Calculate the magnifying power of the
compound microscope if final image is formed at infinity. Also calculate the tube length of the
microscope.
Ans. Given f0 = 4 cm and u0 = -6 cm so from vo = u0 f0 /(u0 + f0 ) = -6 x 4 /( -6 + 4) = + 12 cm
𝑣 𝐷
So magnification 𝑚 = 𝑜 = (12 x 25)/[-(-6)x10] = 5
−𝑢𝑜 𝑓𝑒
Since image is formed at infinity so ue = - fe = - 10 cm Thus tube length = v0 + |-ue| = 22 cm.
Q10. Velocity of light in a liquid is 1.5 x 10 8 m/s and in air, it is 3 x 10 8 m/s. If a ray of light passes
from liquid into the air, calculate the value of critical angle.
Ans:- Since Sin ic = na /nl and n α 1/v Thus Sin ic = vl /va = 1 / 2 So ic = 300

3 Marks Numerical
Q1. An object AB is kept in front of a concave mirror as shown in the figure.
A

B C F

(i) Complete the ray diagram showing the image formation of the object.
(ii) How will the position and intensity of the image be affected if the lower half of the mirror’s
reflecting surface is painted black? ( Hint :- Full image is formed but intensity is reduced)
Q2. You are given three lenses as L1, L2 & L3 each of focal length 20 cm. An object is kept at 40 cm in front of L1
as shown. The final image is formed at focus I of L3. Find the separation between L1, L2 & L3.

117
Ans :- For lens L1 :- u = - 40 cm and f = +20 cm so image distance v = u f /(u + f) = (-40 x 20)/(- 40 +20)

 v = 40 cm. Now final image is formed at focus of L3 so incident rays for this lens should be parallel to the
principal axis which is possible only if the image formed by lens L1 is at the focus F1 of lens L2. So the
separation between lens L1 & L2 is = 40 + 20 = 60 cm. The separation between L2 and L3 may be any distance
and separation between L1 & L3 should be greater than 60 cm. Q3. A
beam of light converges to a point P. A lens is placed in the path of the convergent beam 12 cm from what
point does the beam converge if the lens is (a) a convex lens of f =20cm (b) a concave lens of f = 16 cm?
Ans. (a) For convex lens u = + 12 cm and f = + 20 cm so v = u f /(u + f) = (12 x 20) / (12 + 20) = 7.5 cm
(b) For concave lens u = + 12 cm and f = - 16 cm so v = u f /(u + f) = (12 x -16) / (12 - 16) = 48 cm

Q4 . A small bulb is placed at the bottom of a tank containing water to a depth of 80

cm. What is the area of the surface of water through which light from the bulb can
emerge out? Refractive index of water is 1.33. Consider the bulb to be a point source.
Ans. As shown in figure the light from the bulb comes out only if the angle of
incidence at water-air interface should be equal or less than critical angle ic. So let the
radius of area of water surface through which light emerges out is ‘r’ then in right
angle triangle AOB

tan ic = r/h  r = h tan ic So the area A = πr2 =π h2 tan2ic = πh2 ( sin2ic /cos2 ic)

A = πh2 [sin2ic / (1-sin2ic) But sin ic = 1 / n = 1 / 1.33 = 3/4

So A = 3.14 x (0.8)2 x (9/16) / (1 – 9/16) = 2.6 m2
Q5. A compound microscope consists of an objective lens of focal length 2 cm and an eye piece of focal length
6.25 cm separated by a distance of 15 cm. How far from the objective an object be placed to obtain the final
image at infinity? Also find the magnification power of microscope.

118
 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
Ans. When final image is formed at infinity then ve = ∞ and fe = 6.25 cm so from − =
𝒗𝒆 𝒖𝒆 𝒇𝒆

ue = - fe = - 6.25 cm

Now tube length of microscope = v0 + |-ue| = 15 cm  v0 = 15 - |-ue| = 8.75 cm

𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
So for objective lens − =  − =  u0 = - 17.5 / 6.75 = - 2.59 cm
𝒗𝒐 𝒖𝒐 𝒇𝒐 𝒗𝒐 𝒇𝒐 𝒖𝒐

𝑣𝑜 𝐷 8.75 𝑋 25
Now magnifying power 𝑚 = = = 13.5
−𝑢𝑜 𝑓𝑒 2.59 𝑋 6.25

Q6. A ray of light incident normally on the face AB of a right angled glass prism of
refractive index 1.5. The prism is partly immersed in a liquid of unknown refractive
index. (a) Find the value of refractive index of the liquid so that the ray grazes along the
face BC after refraction through the prism.
(b) Trace the path of ray if it were incident normally on the face AC.
Ans. (a) Here the critical angle for interface BC is also 600 so from
𝒏𝒓
𝒔𝒊𝒏 𝒊𝒄 = we have nl = nd x 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑖𝑐 = 1.5 x √3/2 = 1.299
𝒏𝒅

(b) If ray is incident normally on the face AC then angle of incidence on interface BC
will be 300 i.e. i < ic and since the R.I. of liquid is less than that of prism so it refracts
away from normal.
Q7. Figure shows an biconvex lens (of refractive index 1.5) in contact with a liquid
layer on top of a plane mirror. A small needle with its tip on the principal axis is
moved along the axis until its inverted image is found at the position of the needle.
The distance of the needle from the lens is measured to be x cm. The liquid is
removed and the experiment is repeated. The new distance is measured to be y
cm. What is the refractive index of the liquid?

Ans. In first case

Distance of needle from lens = Focal length of combination of convex lens and
planoconcave liquid lens. So f = x
In second case Distance of needle from lens = Focal length of convex lens = y
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
= (𝒏𝒈 − 𝟏) [𝑹 − 𝑹 ]  ]  y = R ………. (1)
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
So from = (1.5 − 𝟏) [ −
𝒇𝟏 𝟏 𝟐 𝒚 R −R
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
If focal length of liquid lens is f2 then from 𝒇𝒄
= 𝒇 +𝒇 we will have = 𝒚 + 𝒇 or − 𝒚 = 𝒇 …… (2)
𝟏 𝟐 𝒙 𝟐 𝒙 𝟐

𝟏
Now for planoconcave lens R1 = -R = -y and R2 = ∞ so from lens maker formula =
𝒇𝟐

−𝑹 ]  − 𝒚 = (𝑛𝑙 − 1)(-1/y – 0) 
𝟏 𝟏 𝟏 𝟏
(𝒏𝒍 − 𝟏) [ 𝑛𝑙 = (2x – y) / x
𝑹𝟏 𝟐 𝒙

119
Q8. A small telescope has an objective lens of focal length 150 cm and an eye piece of focal length5 cm. If this
telescope is used to view a 100 m high tower 3 km away, find (a) magnifying power of telescope and (b) the
height of the final image, when it is formed 25 cm away from the eye piece.
−𝑓 𝑓
Ans. (a) When image is formed at near point the magnifying power is 𝑚 = 𝑓 𝑜 [ 1 + 𝐷𝑒]
𝑒

150 5
So |m| = (1+ ) = 36
5 25

(b) Now in case of telescope:-

tan α = (Height of object/object distance) = (Height of image by objective / focal length of objective)

so (100/3000) = ( h / 1.5)  h = 5 cm

Now magnification produced by eye piece is 𝑚𝑒 = (1+D/fe) = 1+ 25/5 = 6

So the height of final image = h x me = 5 x 6 = 30 cm.

………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………………..

QUESTIONS BANK
Q1 (a)Define refractive index of a transparent medium. How does it depend on wavelength of light
(b) When light travels from a rarer to a denser medium, the speed decreases. Does this decrease in speed
imply a decrease in the energy carried by the light wave? Justify your answer.
Hint- (a) n α 1/ (b) No
Q2. For the same value of angle of incidence, the angles of refraction in three media A, B and C are 15°,25°
and 35° respectively. In which medium would the velocity of light be minimum?
Hint- v α 1 / n and here nA > nB > nC
Q3..A glass lens of refractive index 1.5 is placed in a trough of liquid. What must be the refractive index of the
liquid in order to make the lens disappear? (Ans. n = 1.5 )
Q4. Monochromatic light of wavelength 589 nm is incident from air on a water surface. What are the
wavelength, frequency and speed of refracted light? Refractive index of water is 1.33.
Hint-  α 1 / n , Frequency doesn’t change in refraction and v = c /nw
Ans. 442.85 nm, 6.77 x1014 Hz, v = 2.25 x 108 m s–1
Q5. (a) Write the necessary conditions for the phenomenon of total internal reflection to occur.
(b) Write the relation between the refractive index and critical angle for a given pair of optical media.
(c) Does critical angle depend on the colour (wavelength)of light? Explain. (Yes)
Q6. (i) State the principle on which the working of an optical fiber is based. (TIR)
(ii) Explain with the help of a diagram, how the above principle is used for transmission of video signals using
optical fibers.
Q7. Write the expression for refraction of light by a spherical surface. Use this relation to obtain the condition
on the position of object and radius of curvature in terms of n1 and n2 when the real image is formed.
(Hint- For real image v > 0, Ans:- u > n1R /(n1- n2)
Q8.A screen is placed 90cm away from an object. The image of the object on the screen is formed by convex
lens at two different locations separated by 20cm. Determine the focal length of the lens.
𝑫𝟐 − 𝑿𝟐
Hint- f = Ans. 21.4 cm
𝟒𝑫

120
Q9 . A converging lens has a focal length of power +5D in air. It is made of a material of refractive index 1.6. It
is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.3. Calculate its new focal length
f ( a n g − 1)
Hint- f = 1/P and l = (Ans:- 64 cm)
f a ( l n g − 1)
Q10. Find the position of the image formed of the object 'O’ by the lens combination given in the figure
Hint:- Use thin lens formula (Ans. .+30cm from third lens)

Q11. In the figure given below, light rays of blue, green, red wavelengths are
incident on an isosceles right-angled prism. Explain with reason, which ray of light
will be transmitted through the face AC. The refractive index of the prism for red,
green, blue light are 1.39, 1.424, 1.476 respectively. Justify your answer. Trace the
path of these rays after passing through face AB. Hint :- For n =
0 0 0
1.41 , ic = 45 so if n < 1.41 then ic > 45 and here i = 45 for all three rays (Ans:- Red)
Q12.A compound microscope uses an objective lens of focal length 4 cm and eyepiece lens of focal length 10
cm. An object is placed at 6 cm from the objective lens. Calculate the magnifying power of the compound
microscope for near point adjustment. Also calculate the length of the microscope. Hint;-
𝑣𝑜 𝐷
𝑚= (1 + ) Use thin lens formula to obtain 𝑢𝑒 = - 7.14 cm and tube length = 𝑣𝑜 + [−𝑢𝑒 ] (Ans: -
−𝑢𝑜 𝑓𝑒
7, 19.14cm)
Q13. A compound microscope has an objective of focal length 1.25 cm and eyepiece of focal length 5cm. A
small object is kept at 2.5 cm from the objective. If the final image formed is at infinity, find the distance
between the objective and the eyepiece.
Hint:- Use thin lens formula to obtain v0 = 2.5 cm and tube length = 𝑣𝑜 + [−𝑢𝑒 ] (Ans:- 7.5cm)
Q14. An astronomical telescope uses two lenses of powers 10 D and 1 D. What is its magnifying power in
−𝑓𝑜
normal adjustment? Hint:- 𝑚 = and f = 1/P ( Ans:- 10)
𝑓𝑒
Q15. An astronomical telescope uses an objective lens of focal length 15 m and eye-lens of focal length 1 cm.
What is the angular magnification of the telescope? If this telescope is used to view moon, what is the
diameter of the image of moon formed by the objective lens?(Diameter of moon 3.5 x 106 m and radius of
lunar orbit 3.8 x108 m). (Ans:- 1500,13.7cm)

−𝑓𝑜
Hint:- 𝑚 = and
𝑓𝑒
tan α = (Height of object/object distance) = (Height of image by objective / focal length of objective)
Q16. Draw ray diagrams to represent the behaviour of a double convex lens(converging lens) of refractive
index n1 when it is placed in a liquid of refractive index n2 when
(i) n1 >n2 (ii) n1 <n2 (iii) n1 = n2
Q17. You are given following three lenses. Which two lenses will you use as an eyepiece and as an objective to
construct an astronomical telescope and compound microscope.
121
 Lenses Power(P) Aperture(A)
L1 3D 8 cm
L2 6D 1 cm
L3 10 D 1 cm
Q18. Draw a ray diagram to show the working of a compound microscope. Explain briefly its working. Write an
expression for the total magnification when the final image is formed at the near point.
Q19. The objective of a telescope is of larger focal length and of larger aperture (compared to the eyepiece).
Why? Give reasons
Q20. How does focal length and power of a lens change when red light incident on it is replaced by violet
light? Give reason for your answer. (Hint:- P=1/f α n α 1/ƛ)
Q.21 (a) A mobile phone lies along the principal axis of a concave mirror. Show, with the help of a suitable
diagram, the formation of its image. Explain why magnification is not uniform.
(b) Suppose the lower half of the concave mirror's reflecting surface is covered with an opaque material.
What effect this will have on the image of the object? Explain.
Q22. Use the mirror equation to show that
(a) an object placed between f and 2f of a concave mirror produces a real image beyond 2f.
(b) a convex mirror always produces a virtual image independent of the location of the object.
(c) an object placed between the pole and focus of a concave mirror produces a virtual and
enlarged image

Q23. (a) (i) Draw a labelled ray diagram to show the formation of image in an astronomical telescope for a
distant object.
(ii) Write three distinct advantages of reflecting type of telescope over a refracting type of telescope.
(b) A convex lens of focal length 10 cm is placed coaxially 5 cm away from a concave lens of focal length
10 cm if the object is placed 30 cm in front of the convex lens. Find the position of the final image formed
by the combined system.

Case base study

Q1.REFRACTION
When a beam of light encounters another transparent medium, a part of light
gets reflected back into the first medium while the rest enters the other. A ray
of light represents a beam. The direction of propagation of an obliquely
incident ray of light that enters the other medium, changes at the interface of the two media. This
phenomenon is called refraction of light.

(i) For the same value of angle of incidence, the angles of refraction in three media A, B and C are 15°,25° and
35° respectively. In which medium the velocity of light would be minimum?

(ii) A glass lens of refractive index 1.5 is placed in a trough of liquid. What should be the refractive index of the
liquid in order to make the lens disappear?
(iii) State snell’s law for refraction of light.

122
 OR
In the following ray diagram, find the speed of light in liquid.

Q2.TOTAL INTERNAL REFLECTION

When light travels from an optically denser medium to a
rarer medium at the interface, it is partly reflected back
into the same medium and partly refracted to the second
medium. This reflection is called the internal reflection.
When a ray of light enters from a denser medium to a
rarer medium, it bends away from the normal. If the angle
of incidence is greater than critical angle then the incident
ray is totally reflected.

(i) What is relation between critical angle and refractive index of medium?
(ii) If the velocity of light in glass is 2 x 108m/s and in air is 3 x 108 m/s. find critical angle for glass-air
interface.
(iii) What are the essential conditions for total internal reflection to take place?
OR
In the figure given below, light rays of blue, green, red wavelengths are incident on an isosceles right-angled
prism. The refractive index of the prism for red, green, blue light are 1.39, 1.424,
1.476 respectively. Explain with reason which ray(s) will be transmitted through
the face AC.

Q3. LENS MAKER’S FORMULA

Lens maker's formula is the relation between the focal length of a lens to the refractive index of its material
and the radii of curvature of its two surfaces. Lens maker formula is used to construct a lens with the specified
focal length. A lens has two curved surfaces, but these are not exactly the same. If we know the refractive index
and the radius of the curvature of both the surface, then we can determine the focal length of the lens by using
the given lens maker’s formula:
1 1 1
= (𝑛21 − 1) ( − )
𝑓 𝑅1 𝑅2

(i) An air bubble is immersed in water, will it behave as converging or diverging nature?
(ii) If the blue light is replaced by red light, how does the power of lens change?
(iii) A converging lens has a focal length of power +5D in air. It is made of a material of refractive index
1,6. It is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.3. Find the focal length of lens in liquid.
OR
A diverging lens of refractive index 1.5 and of focal length 15 cm in air has the same radii of curvature for
both sides. If it is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.7, find the focal length of the lens in the
liquid.
123
 Q4.Telescope
The telescope is used to provide angular magnification of distant objects. It also has an objective and an
eyepiece. But here, the objective has a large focal length and a much larger aperture than the eyepiece.
Light from a distant object enters the objective and a real image is formed in the tube at its second focal
point. The eyepiece magnifies this image producing a final inverted image. The magnifying power m is the
ratio of the angle β subtended at the eye by the final image to the angle α which the object subtends at
the lens or the eye.

(i)An astronomical telescope uses two lenses of powers 10 D and 1 D. Find magnifying power in normal
adjustment .
(ii) Write any two differences between microscope and telescope.
(iii) What are the advantages of reflecting type telescopes over refractive type telescopes?
OR
What are the two main considerations while fabricating an astronomical telescope?

124
 CHAPTER-10
WAVE OPTICS
A wavefront is a surface of Huygen’s principle of
constant phase the secondary
wavelets-Each point on
the wavefront is the
source of a secondary
wavelets.

WAVE
OPTICS
MIND
MAP

Interference of light

Diffraction
Path difference
𝑫

𝐧𝐃𝜆
Position of nth bright fringe 𝒙 =𝒏 (where
𝒅
n=0,1,2,3…)

Path difference Position of nth dark fringe 𝒙 =𝒏

(𝟐𝐧−𝟏)
( where
𝟐𝒅
𝗈= BP-AP = BE =a sin ɵ n=1,2,3…
𝝀𝑫
Position of minima- Fringe width 𝛽 = 𝒙 −
𝒏 𝒙 𝒏−𝟏 = 𝖰𝒃𝒓𝒊𝒈𝒉𝒕 = 𝖰𝒅𝒂𝒓𝒌 =
𝒅
Position of nth dark
𝖰𝒗𝒂𝒄
Fringe width in medium =
fringe 𝒎𝒆𝒅 𝝁

a sin ɵn = nλ 𝖰 𝝀
Angular width of fringe 𝜽 = =
𝑫 𝒅
(where n =1,2,3… )
3.Position of secondary
maxima-

a sin ɵn’ = (2n+1) λ/2

where n =1,2,3…
4.angular width of
central maxima = 2ɵ

=2λ/a

125
 GIST OF THE LESSON

1. Wavefront-It is defined as the continuous locus of all the particles of the medium
vibrating in the same phase at any instant. A wavefront is a surface of constant phase. The
speed with which the wavefront moves outwards from the source is called the phase speed
(wave speed).
Note-1. Rays are perpendicular to wavefront. .2. No backward wavefront is possible.

2. Types of wavefront-It depends on the source of disturbance.

Spherical Wavefront formed by the point

wavefront
source

Cylindrical Wavefront formed by linear or

wavefront
cylindrical shape source

As a spherical or cylindrical
Plane wavefront advances, its curvature
wavefront
decreases, so small portion of such a
wavefront at a large distance from
the source will be a plane wavefront

3. Huygen’s principle of the

secondary Wavelets-It is the
basis of wave theory oflight. It
describes how does a wavefront
propagate through a medium. It
is based on the following
assumptions
i) Each point on a wavefront
acts as new source of light which emits secondary wavelets. These secondary wavelets
spread out in all directions with the speed of light in the given medium.
ii) The wavefront at any later time is given by the forward envelope of the secondary
wavelets at that time.

126
4. During refraction- Frequency of light remains constant, wavelength and speed oflight
get changed depending on the refractive index. (λ’= λ/n and v’= v/n) (here n is the refractive
index)

5. Behaviour of a prism, lens and mirror-

6.

Reflection on the basis of wave theory Refraction on the basis of wave theory
i)

In ⧍ ABC and ⧍ DCB From ⧍ ABC, sin i =BC/AC

∠BAC=∠CDB (Each From ⧍ ADC, sin r = AD/AC
90o) BC=BC So sin i /sin r = BC / AD = V1/V2
AC=BD (each equal to ct) Or sin i /sin r = n2/n1 = n21 (R.I. of second
ii) ∴⧍ABC ≌ ⧍DCB medium w.r.t first medium)
Hence ∠i=∠r

Note-for denser to rarer medium

8. Coherent and Incoherent Sources-

Two sources are coherent if they have thesame frequency and with a constant phase
difference. They are incoherent if phase difference is not constant.

9.Interference of light-When two light waves of the same frequency and having constant
127
phase difference(coherent), travelling in the same direction superpose each other,the intensity
gets redistributed, becoming maximum at some points and minimum at others, this
phenomenon is called interference of light.

Let two waves from two coherent source of light be 𝑦1 = 𝑎 cos 𝜔𝑡 and 𝑦2 = a cos(𝜔𝑡 + Ø)

Where a is amplitude of each wave and Ø is the phase difference, then from principle of
superposition
Y = y1 + y2 = 𝑎 cos 𝜔𝑡 + a cos(𝜔𝑡 + Ø) = 2a Cos (Ø/2) Cos(𝜔t + Ø/2 )
So Y= R Cos (𝜔t + Ø/2 )
Here resultant amplitude :-
R = 2a Cos Ø/2
and resultant intensity is:- I = KR2 so
I = 4 I0 Cos2 Ø/2 where I0 = K a2 is intensity of each wave
Note:- If amplitudes are not same, then

Let two waves from two coherent source of light be 𝑦1 = 𝑎 sin 𝜔𝑡 and 𝑦2 = 𝑏 sin(𝜔𝑡 + Ø)

Where a and b are amplitudes and Ø is the phase

difference So y = y1 + y2 after solving

y = Rwe get + 𝜃)
sin(𝜔t

• Where A is the resultant amplitude so Rnet = √(a2 + b2 + 2abcosØ

• And Resultant intensity is Inet = I1 + I2 + 2√I1I2 cosØ

• Resultant amplitude when a = b

• Resultant intensity when I1=I2=I

NOTE- Ratio of maximum intensity to minimum intensity……

Imax/Imin = (a + b)2/(a-b)2 OR (√I1 + √I2 )2 / (√I1 - √I2 )2

10. Types of Interference-

128
 s.no Constructive interference Destructive interference
1 Point where resultant intensity is max Point where resultant intensity is minimum
2 FOR IMAX cos ∅ = +1 FOR Imin cos ∅ = -1
Phase difference Phase difference
∅ = 0,2π,4π,6π……… 2nπ ∅ = π,3π,5π……… (2n-1)π
Path difference Path difference
⧍ = 0,ƛ,2 ƛ,3 ƛ………..n ƛ ⧍ = ƛ/2, 3 ƛ/2, 5 ƛ/2 ………..(2n – 1 )ƛ/2
Here n = 1,2,3…… Here n = 1,2,3……
Note:-
path differnce=( ƛ/2π) x phase R𝑚in = a - b
differnce
I𝑚in = (√I1 - √I2 )2
R𝑚ax = a+b

I𝑚ax = (√I1 + √I2 )2

3 Resultant intensity at a point is Resultant intensity at a point is
maximum when the phase difference minimum when the phase difference is
is even multiple of π or path odd multiple of π or path difference is
difference is an integral multiple of an odd multiple of wavelength λ/2
wavelength λ

11. Young’s Double Slit Experiment-It is the practical verification of interference. In this
we get two coherent sources by dividing wavefront. We always get bright fringe at the center
of the screen and both side alternately bright and dark fringes are made.
Fringe width in YDSE-

a) Path difference

where n=0,1,2,3…
b) Position of nth bright fringe

c) Position of nth dark fringe

where n=1,2,3…

d) Fringe width –Separation between position two consecutive maxima or minima. Widthof
bright and dark fringe will be same.
129
e) Fringe width in medium

f) Angular width of fringe

Or 𝜃 = ƛ / d

g) Overlapping of fringes
if n1th bright fringe overlapped on n2th bright fringe then n1λ1=

n2λ2 if bright overlapped dark n1λ1= (2n2 -1) λ2/2

h) (β α λ, (β α D, β α 1/d, β α ƛ)
𝐷
i)Dependence of fringe width 𝛽= ƛ
𝑑

(j) Intensity distribution curve

130
 Condition for sustained interference-
i) Two source of light must be coherent(ii) Having same frequency (iii)source should be
monochromatic (iv)wave must travel in same direction(v) for a better contrast amplitude of
waves should be approximately equal

12. Diffraction

It is the phenomena of bending of light around corners of an obstacle or aperture in

the path of light. Due to this bending, light goes into the geometrical shadow region
of the obstacle or aperture.
This bending becomes more when the dimensions of the aperture or the obstacle
are comparable of the wavelength of light.
i.e. a~ƛ
13. Diffraction of light from a single slit-

a) Central maxima-maximum intensity at point o because path difference at o is zero.

b) Path difference 𝗈= BP-AP = BE =a sin ɵ

c) Position of minima- Position of nth dark fringe a sin ɵn = nλ ƛ where n =1,2,3…

d) Position of secondary maxima- a sin ɵn’ = (2n+1) ƛ/2
where n =1,2,3…

(e) Width of central maxima- the direction of first

minima ɵ=λ/a, this angle is called halfangular
width of central maxima Note-width of secondary
)angular width of central maxima = 2ɵ =2λ/a maxima α
(f) Linear width of central maxima= 2x or D(2ɵ) = 2λD/a

131
 (g) Graph:-

MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Q1. In a Young’s double slit experiment, the separation between the slits is 0.1 mm, the wavelength of light
used is 600nm and the interference pattern is observed on a screen 1maway. Find the separation between
bright fringes.
(a) 6.6 mm (b) 6.0 mm (c) 6 m (d) 60 cm
Q2. In the Young double slit experiment, the fringe pattern as seen on the screen is:
(a) Parabola (b) Hyperbola (c) Ellipse (d) Spiral
Q3. What is the effect on the angular width of interference fringes in a Young’s double slitexperiment
when the screen moved near to the plane of slits.
(a) Increases (b) decreases (c) constant (d) not defined
Q4. The phase difference between two waves at the place of constructive interference is given asa multiple of:
(a) multiple of π (b) multiple of(2n-1) π
(c) even multiple of π (d) odd multiple of π
Q5. The path difference between two waves at the place of destructive interference is given by:
(a) multiple of π (b) multiple of π /2
(c) even multiple of π /2 (d) odd multiple of π /2
Q6. The wave-front due to source situated at the infinity is
(a) Spherical (b) Plane
(c) Cylindrical (d) Rectangular
Q7. Colours appears on a thin film of a soap and a soap bubble is due to
(a) Diffraction (b) Refraction (c) Dispersion (d) Interference

Q8. The ratio of intensities of two waves is 9 : 1. They are producing interference. The ratio of maximum and
minimum intensities will be
(a) 10 : 8 (b) 9 : 1 (c)4 : 1 (d) 2 : 1
Q9. A slit of size 0.15 cm is placed at 2.1 m from a screen. On illuminated it by a light of wavelength 5  10–5 cm. The width
of central maxima will be
(a) 70 mm (b) 0.14 mm (c) 1.4 mm (d) 0.14 cm
132
Q10. Conditions of diffraction is
a a a
(a) =1 (b)  1 (c)  1 (d) None of these
  
Q11. Diffraction and interference of light suggest :-
(a) Nature of light is electro-magnetic (b) Wave nature (c) Nature is quantum (d) Nature of light is
transverse
Q12. The bending of beam of light around corners of obstacles is called
(a) Reflection (b) Diffraction (c) Refraction (d) Interference
ANSWER KEY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
b b c c d b d c b a
11 12
b b
Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to
these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below. (a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct
explanation of A (b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A ( c) A is true but R is false ( d) A
is false and R is also false.
1. Assertion : When a light wave travels from a rarer to a denser medium, it loses speed. The reduction in speed
imply a reduction in energy carried by the light wave.
Reason : The energy of a wave is proportional to velocity of wave.
2. Assertion : No interference pattern is detected when two coherent sources are infinitely close to each other.
Reason : The fringe width is inversely proportional to the distance between the two slits.
3. Assertion : For best contrast between maxima and minima in the interference pattern of Young’s double slit
experiment, the intensity of light emerging out of the two slits should be equal.
Reason : The intensity of interference pattern is proportional to square of amplitude.
4. Assertion : When a tiny circular obstacle is placed in the path of light from some distance, a bright spot is seen
at the centre of shadow of the obstacle.
Reason : Destructive interference occurs at the centre of the shadow.
5. Assertion : Thin films such as soap bubble or a thin layer of oil on water show beautiful colours when
illuminated by white light.
Reason : It happens due to the interference of light reflected from the upper surface of the thin film.
6. Assertion : Interference pattern is made by using blue light instead of red light, the fringes becomes narrower.
D
Reason : In Young’s double slit experiment, fringe width is given by relation B= .
d

7. Assertion : In Young’s experiment, the fringe width for dark fringes is different from that for white fringes.
Reason : In Young’s double slit experiment the fringes are performed with a source of white light, then only
black and bright fringes are observed.
133
 ANSWER KEY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
d b b c c a d

Important Questions (with answers)

Q1. Define a wavefront. How is it different from a ray ?
Ans. Wavefront : Continuous locus of all the particles of a medium vibrating in the same phase is called wavefront
Difference from a ray :
(i) A ray is always normal to the wavefront at each point.
(ii) A ray gives the direction of propagation of light wave while the wavefront is the surface of constant phase
Q2. What are the essential conditions for two light sources to be coherent ?
[ Ans. (i) Two sources must produce waves of same frequency, and
(ii) phase difference between the waves must be constant
Q3. In the Young’s double slit experiment, how does the fringe width get affected if the entire experimental
apparatus is immersed in water (refractive index 4/3) ?

Ans:- 𝛽w = 𝛽a /n = ¾ 𝛽a
Q4. State two differences between interference and diffraction patterns.
Ans.
Interference Diffraction
1. It is due to superposition of two waves from 1. It is due to superposition of secondary wavelets
two coherent sources from different parts of the same wavefront
2. Width of fringes/ bands is equal 2. Width of fringes/bands is not equal
3. All maxima have same intensity 3. Maxima have different intensity and intensity
decreases rapidly with the order of maxima

Q5. When a low flying air craft passes over the head we sometimes notice slight shaking of the
picture on our TV screen. Explain.

Ans: Interference of the direct signal received by the antenna with the signal reflected by
the aircraft.

Q6. Two slits are made 1 𝑚𝑚 apart and the screen is placed 1 𝑚 away. What should be the width of each
slit toobtain 10 maxima of the double slit pattern within the central maximum of the single slit pattern?

Ans. For double slit β = ƛD/d and for single slit X = 2 ƛD/a

Given X = 10 β so 2 ƛD/a = ƛD/d ⇨ a = d / 5 ⇨ a = 0.5 mm

Q7. In Young’s double slit experiment, using monochromatic light of wavelength 𝜆, the intensity of light
at a point on the screen where path difference is 𝜆, is K units. Find out the intensity of light at a point
where path difference is 𝜆/3.

134
 Ans. When (i) ∆𝑥 = 𝜆 ⇨ ɸ = 2𝜋/ 𝜆 X 𝜆 = 2𝜋

⇨ I1 = 4𝐼0 𝑐o𝑠2 (ɸ2) = 4𝐼0 𝑐o𝑠2(𝜋) = 4𝐼0 (−1)2 = 4𝐼0 = 𝐾 (given)

So when (ii) ∆𝑥 = 𝜆/3 ⇨ ɸ = 2𝜋/ 𝜆 X 𝜆/3 = 2𝜋/3

⇨ I2 = 4𝐼0 𝑐o𝑠2 (ɸ/2) = 4𝐼0 𝑐o𝑠2(𝜋/3 ) = 4𝐼0 (1/2)2 = 𝐼0 = 𝐾/4
Q8. A monochromatic light of wavelength 600nm is incident on a water surface havingrefractive
index 4/3. Find the velocity, frequency and wavelength of light in water.
Ans. Use n = c/v , and V = vƛ and V/ƛ = Constant

(2.25 × 108 m s–1, 5x1014Hz, 450nm)

Q9. What is the effect on the interference fringes in Young’s double slit experiment if,
(a) The screen is moved away from the plane of the slits.
(b) Source is replaced by another source of shorter wavelength.
Ans (a) Angular separation of the fringes remains constant and linear fringe width increases.
(b) Separation of the fringes decreases
Q.10 What happens to the energy at the points of destructive interference?

Ans: The energy which disappears at the points of destructive interference will reappear at
the points of constructive interference. Thus, interference is the phenomenon of
redistribution of energy and energy remains conserved.
Q11. What will be effect on the fringe width if entire YDSE set up is immersed in water?

Ans: As β = Dλ/d. In water D and d remains unchanged whereas λ decreases therefore

β also decreases.
Q12. In YDS experiment two independent bulbs of same power and material are used. What will be observed
on the screen? Ans: Two
independent sources of light can never be coherent as the phase difference between them changes quickly
and randomly, thus the position of maxima and minima also changes. Thus, there will be general illumination
of the screen without interference.
Question bank
Q1. What is the effect in interference pattern in Young’s double slit experiment due to each of the
following operation (i) separation between slit is increased (ii) Whole apparatus is kept in denser
medium? Q2.
Find out an expression for width of central maxima during diffraction of light.
Q3. The ratio of the intensities at minima to maxima in the interference pattern is 9:25. What will
be the ratio of the widths of the two slits in the Young’s double slit experiment?
Q4.Define the term ‘wave front’. Using Huygens’s construction of a wave front, explain the
refraction of a plane wave front at a plane surface and hence deduce Snell’s law.

135
Q5. (a) Consider a point at the focal point of a convergent lens. Another convergent lens of
short focal length is placed on the other side. What is the nature of the wave fronts
emerging from the final image?
(b)What is the shape of the wave front on earth for sunlight?
(c)Is Huygens principle valid for longitudinal sound waves?
Q6.What is interference? Draw the Intensity distribution curve during interference of light. How
does interference pattern changes (i) increasing the separation between the slits (ii) increasing
the screen distance and (iii) using white light?
Q7. What is diffraction? Write the essential condition for it. Draw the Intensity distribution curve.
Obtain an expression for the width of central maximum. How does diffraction pattern changes on
using white light?

136
 CASE STUDY QUESTIONS
Q1. INTERFERNCE OF LIGHT:-
According to superposition principle, the resultant displacement produced
due the number of waves at a particular point is the vector sum of displacement produced by the each vector at
that point. The two sources of light are said to be coherent only when the phase difference between the light
waves produced by them is zero or constant. The point at which two waves are in phase or if trough of one
wave coincides with the trough of other or crest of one wave coincides with the crest of other then the
resultant intensity produced at that point will be larger and amplitude also maximum. Such points are the
points where constructive interference takes place. While there are some points where two light waves are not
in phase with each other and crest of one wave coincides with the trough of other and vice versa due to which
resultant intensity at that point is minimum and amplitude also get decreased. Such points are the points where
destructive interference takes place.

(a) What do you mean by phase coherent source?

(b) Write two differences between constructive and destructive interference.
(c) Obtain the essential conditions for constructive and destructive interference.
OR
If the ratio of amplitudes of two waves is 1:3, find ratio of max. to min. intensities in interference
pattern.

Q2. DIFFRACTION OF LIGHT:-

When light from a monochromatic source is incident on a single narrow slit,
it gets diffracted and a pattern of alternate bright and dark fringes is obtained on screen, called "Diffraction
Pattern" of single slit. In diffraction pattern of single slit, it is found that
(I) Central bright fringe is ·of maximum intensity and the intensity of any secondary bright fringe decreases with
increase in its order.
(II) Central bright fringe is twice as wide as any other secondary bright or dark fringe .

(a) Diffraction is common in sound but not common in light waves why ?
(b) How would the diffraction pattern due to a single slit be affected when the width of the slit is decreased ?
(c) Draw the intensity pattern for single slit diffraction and double slit interference.
OR
State two differences between interference and diffraction patterns.

137
 UNIT-VII
CHAPTER-11: DUAL NATURE OF RADIATION AND MATTER
Hertz observation:
Whenever ultraviolet light is incident on the metallic sphere, the electrons are emitted.

Hallwachs’ observation:

Electrons were emitted from the zinc plate under the action of ultraviolet light.
Irradiation of ultraviolet light on-
(a) uncharged zinc
plate
(b) negatively charged
plate
(c) positively charged
plate

Lenard's observations:
Experimental setup for the study of photoelectric effect:
• S is a source of EM waves of known and variable frequency ν and intensity I.
• C isthe negative electrode, made up of photosensitive material which emit electrons.
• The positive electrode A collects the electrons emitted from C.
• An evacuated glass tube with a quartz window, that permits the passage of ultraviolet and visible
light.

138
Photoelectric effect:
The ejection of electrons from a metal plate, when illuminated by the light of a suitable frequency (or wavelength),
is called the photoelectric effect.

Work Function:−Minimum energy of radiation required to just eject photo electrons from a metal surface
(with K.E=0) is called work function of the metal.

Threshold frequency (0): It is the minimum frequency of incident light that causes photoemission with
zero K.E. of photoelectrons
Threshold wavelength: The maximum wavelength required to extract the photoelectrons of zero kinetic energy
from a metal is known as threshold wavelength.

Photosensitive materials:The materials which eject photoelectrons upon irradiation of electromagnetic

waves of suitable wavelength are called photosensitive materials.

• Metals like cadmium, zinc, magnesium, etc show photoelectric emission for ultraviolet light, alkali metals
lithium, sodium, caesium shows photoelectric emission for visible light.

Effect of intensity of incident light on photoelectric current:

• To study the effect of the intensity of incident light on

photoelectric current, the frequency of the incident
light and the potential V of the anode are kept constant.
• The number of electrons emitted per second
(Photocurrent) is directly proportional to the intensity
of the incident light.

139
Effect of potential difference on photoelectric current:

• The frequency and intensity of the

incident light are kept constant.
• As the potential of A is increased,
photocurrentis also increased
• When a negative (retarding)potential
is applied to A, the photocurrent starts
to decrease
• The photocurrent becomes zero at a
particular negative potential V0, called
stopping or cut-off potential.
• The cut-off potential does not depend
on the intensity of incident light.

Effect of frequency of incident light on stopping potential:

• The intensity of the incident light is kept

constant.
• Greater the frequency of the incident
radiation, larger is the corresponding
stopping potential.
• This implies that as the frequency is
increased, the photoelectrons are emitted
with greaterkinetic energies so that the
greaterretarding potentialis needed to
stop the photoelectrons.

Variation of stopping potential with frequency

• stopping potential varies

linearly with frequency.
• Below a certain frequency
called threshold frequency, no
electrons are emitted; hence
stopping potential is zero.
• The slope of this graph (h/e) is
a constant and does not depend
on the material.

140
Einstein’s explanation of photoelectric equation:When a photon of energy hν is incident on a metal
surface, it is completely absorbed by a single electron and the electron is ejected.

A part of the photon energy is used for the ejection of the electrons from the metal surface (photoelectric work
function ϕ0) and the remaining energy as the kinetic energy of the ejected electron. From the law of conservation
of energy:

• E = 0 + K.E.
1
• h = ho + mv 2
2
eV0=
1 2 1 1 
mv max = h −  = h − h 0 = hc − 
2   0 

Dual nature of radiation:

Light has dual nature. It manifests itself as a wave in diffraction, interference, polarization etc.while it
shows particle nature in photoelectric effect,Compton scatteringetc.

DE BROGLIE’S HYPOTHESIS: -
According to De-Broglie hypothesis material particles in motion display wave like properties.This
hypothesis was based on (i) de-Broglie concept of nature loves symmetry, and (ii) matter can be converted
into energy and vice versa. So moving particles like protons, neutrons, electrons etc.are associated with de-
Broglie waves and their wavelength is given by

λ=h/p=h/mv
Every moving particle is associated with a wave is called matter-waveor de Broglie wave.
Derivation: According to Planck’s quantum theory, the energy of a photonE = h v ...(i)
ℎ𝑐
Einstein's energy-mass relationE = m c 2 ...(ii)Thereforeh v = m c 2 or = m c2  = h / p
𝜆

 = h/ p P: Momentum
ℎ M: mass, v : velocity
λ=
𝑚𝑣
ℎ E: kinetic Energy
λ=
√2𝑚𝐸
ℎ Q: charge, V: Accelerating Potential difference
λ=
√2𝑚𝑞𝑉

141
 ℎ 12.27 V: Accelerating Potential difference for
λe= = Å electron
√2𝑚𝑞𝑉 √𝑉

Characteristics of matter waves :(i) Matter waves are not electromagnetic in nature.
(ii) de-Broglie or matter wave is independent of the charge on the material particle.
Characteristics of photons:
• The photons of light of frequency ν and wavelength λ will have energy, given by E =hv= hc/λ
• The energy of a photon is determined by the frequency of the radiation and not by its intensity and the
intensity has no relation with the energy of the individual photons in the beam.
• The photons travel with the velocity of light and its momentum is given by P=h/λ
• Since photons are electrically neutral, they are unaffected by electric and magnetic fields.

Multiple Choice Questions ( One Marks)

1. The work function of a metal is hc/𝝀0. If light of wavelength 𝝀 is incident on its surface , then the
essential condition for the electron to come out from the metal surface is
(a) 𝝀≥ 𝝀0 (b) 𝝀≥ 2𝝀0 (c) 𝝀≤ 𝝀0 (d) 𝝀≤ 2𝝀0
2. A photon of energy 3.4 eV is incident on a metal surface whose work function is 2 eV. Maximum
kinetic energy of photoelectron emitted by the metal surface will be
(a) 1.4 eV (b) 1.7 eV (c) 5.4 eV (d) 6.8eV
3. The work function of caesium is 2.14eV.The threshold frequency for caesium is
(a) 5.16 x 1014Hz (b) 2.08 x 1014 Hz (c) 5.16 x 1013Hz (d) 5.16 x 1010Hz
4. Which of the following waves can produce photoelectric effect?
(a) Ultrasound (b) infrared (c) radio waves (d) X – rays
5. In photoelectric effect the kinetic energy of electrons emitted from the metal surface depends upon
(a) Intensity of light (b) Frequency of incident light

(c) velocity of incident light (d) both intensity and velocity of light
6. A light having wavelength 300nm falls on a metal surface. Work function of metal is
2.54 eV. Stopping potential will be
(a) 2.3 V (b) 2.59 V (c) 1.60 V (d) 1.29 V.
7. When photons of energy hγ are incident on the surface of photosensitive material of
work function h υ 0, then
(a) the K.E. of all emitted electron is hγ0
(b) kinetic energy of emitted electros is h(υ - υ 0)
(c) kinetic energy of the fastest electros is h(υ - υ 0)
(d) kinetic energy all of emitted electros is less than h υ0

142
 8. The de- Broglie wavelength of electron having energy 40 keV is
(a) 0.12 Å (b) 1.2 Å (c) 12.2 Å (d) none of these
9. Electron volt is unit of
(a) energy (b) potential (c) current (d) charge

10. Which of the following has the longest wavelength if they are moving with the sane velocity?
(a) neutron (b) proton (c) α- particle (d) β- particle
11. The work function for a metal is 3 eV. To emit a photoelectron of energy 2 eV from the surface of this
metal, the Wavelength of the incident light should be:
(a) 6187 Ao (b) 4125 Ao (c) 12375 Ao (d) 2486 Ao

12. A proton, a neutron, an electron and alpha particle have same energy. Then their de-
Broglie wavelength compare as
(a) λp= λn>λe> λα (b) λα<λp = λn>λe
(c) λe<λp= λn> λα (d) λp= λn = λe= λα
13. According to Einstein’s photoelectric equation, the graph between the kinetic energy
of photoelectron ejected and the frequency of incident radiation is

14. The kinetic energy of a proton and that of an alpha particle are 4 eV and 1 eV
respectively. The ratio of the de- Broglie wavelength associated with them will be
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 1 (c) 1: 2 (d) 4 : 1
15. If an electron and a photon propagate in the form of waves having same wavelength,
it implies that they have same
(a) speed (b) momentum (c) energy (d) all the above

ANSWERS MCQ:
1. b 2. a 3. a 4. d 5. b
143
 6. c 7. c 8. a 9. a 10. d
11. d 12. b 13. d 14. b 15. b

ASSERTION AND REASONING QUESTIONS:

For these questions two statements are given-one labeled Assertion (A) and the other labeled
Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given
below.
a. Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b. Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c. A is true but R is false
d. A is false and R is also false.

43. Assertion : The energy (E) and momentum (p) of a photon are related by p = E / c .
Reason : The photon behaves like a particle.
44. Assertion : Photoelectric effect demonstrates the wave nature of light.
Reason : The number of photoelectrons is proportional to the frequency of light
45. Assertion : Mass of moving photon varies inversely as the wavelength.
Reason : Energy of the particle = Mass  (Speed of light)2
46. Assertion : Kinetic energy of photo electrons emitted by a photosensitive surface depends
upon the intensity of incident photon.
Reason : The ejection of electrons from metallic surface is possible with frequency of
incident photon below the threshold frequency.
47. Assertion : Photosensitivity of a metal is high if its work function is small.
Reason: Work function = hf 0 where f0 is the threshold frequency
48. Assertion : The de-Broglie wavelength of a molecule varies inversely as the square root
of temperature.
Reason : The root mean square velocity of the molecule depends on the temperature.
49. Assertion : Though light of a single frequency (monochromatic) is incident on a metal,
the energies of emitted photoelectrons are different.
Reason : The energy of electrons emitted from inside the metal surface is lost in
collision with the other atoms in the metal.
50. Assertion : The threshold frequency of photoelectric effect supports the particle nature of
sunlight.
Reason : If frequency of incident light is less than the threshold frequency, electrons are not emitted from
metal surface.
51. Assertion : In photoemissive cell inert gas is used.
Reason : Inert gas in the photoemissive cell gives greater current.
144
52. Assertion : In photoelectric effect, on increasing the intensity of light, both the number of electrons emitted
and kinetic energy of each of them get increased but photoelectric current remains unchanged.
Reason : The photoelectric current depends only on wavelength of light.

ASSERTION AND REASONING: ANSWER

1.a 2.d 3.b 4. d 5.b
6.a 7.a 8.b 9.a 10.d

Short Answer Questions ( Two Marks)

1. An electron and alpha particles have the same de-Broglie wavelength associated with them. How are
their kinetic energies related to each other? Ans: Electron has higher KE
2. Calculate the work function of a metal in eV if its threshold wavelength is 6800Å
Ans: Work function = hc / λ0 = 1.825eV.
3. The de-Broglie wavelength associated with an electron accelerated through a potential difference V
is . What will be the de-Broglie wavelength when the accelerating p.d. is increased to 4V? Ans: Half
4. Plot a graph showing the variation of stopping potential with the frequency of incident radiation for
two different photosensitive materials having work functions w1 and w2 (w1 > w2).
5. If the radiations of wavelength 5000 A ̊ are incident on a surface having work function 1.2 eV then
find the value of stopping potential.. Ans: 1.275 V
6. Two metals A and B have work functions 4 eV and 10 Ev respectively. Which metal has the higher
threshold wavelength? Ans: Metal A
7. Write Einstein’s photoelectric equation and point out two characteristic properties of photons on
which this equations is based.
8. The De-Broglie wavelength associated with an electron anda proton are equal. Prove that the kinetic
energy of electron is greater than that of the proton.
9. An EM wave of wavelength λ1 is incident on a photosensitive surface of negligible work function. If
the photo-electrons emitted from this surface have the de-Broglie wavelength prove that λ= (2mc/h)
λ1
10. A photon and a proton have the same de-Broglie wavelength λ . Prove that the energy of the photon
is (2mλc/h) times the kinetic energy of the proton.

Short Answer Questions ( Three Marks)

145
1. Define the terms threshold frequency and stopping potential in relation to the phenomenon of
photoelectric effect. How is the photoelectric current affected on increasing the (i) frequency (ii)
intensity of the incident radiations and why?
2. (a) Define the term’ Intensity of radiation’ in photon picture.
(b) Plot a graph showing the variation of photo current vs collector potential for three different
intensityI1>I2>I3, two of which (I1 & I2) have the same frequency f and the third has frequency f1
>f
(c) Expalin the nature of the curves on the basis of Einstein’s equation.
3. Write three characteristics feature in photoelectric effect which cannot be explained on the basis of wave
theory of light, but can be explained only using Einstein’s equation.
4. A proton and an electron have same velocity. Which one has greater de-Broglie wavelength and why?
5. The given graph shows the variation of photoelectric current I, with the applied voltage V0for two
different materials and for two different intensities of the incident radiation . Identify and explain using
Einstein’s photo electric equation for the pair of curves that correspond to (i) different materials but
same intensity of incident radiation ,(ii) different intensities but same materials.

6. A proton and alpha particle have same de Broglie wavelength. Determine the ratio of (i) their
accelerating potential (ii) their speed. Ans : Potential : 8 : 1, speed : 4 : 1
7. A proton and a deuteron are accelerated through same accelerating potential. Which of the two has
(i) Greater value of de-Broglie wavelength associated with it and
(ii) Less momentum
Give reason to justify your answer
Ans: (i) proton has greater wavelength (ii) proton has less momentum
8. Sketch the graph showing variation of stopping potential with frequency of incident radiations for two
photosensitive materials A and B having threshold frequency fA>fB
9. An electron and a proton each have de-Broglie wavelength of 1.00 nm.
(a) Find the ratio of their momenta.
(b) Compare the kinetic energy of the proton with that of the electron
Ans: (a) Ratio of momenta: 1 : 1, (b) Ratio of KE: 5.4 x 10-4
10. Use Einstein’s photoelectric equation to find the expression for (i) Planck’s constant and (iii) work

146
 function of the given photosensitive material in terms of the parameters l, n and mass m of the electron.

CASE BASED QUESTIONS(4 MARKS)

Reade the paragraph given below and answer the questions that follow:
1. Photoelectric effect: Wihelm Hallwach and Philipp Lenard investigated the phenomenon of
photoelectric effect emission in detail during 1886-1902. After the discovery of the electron in 1897,
it became evident that the incident light cause electrons to be emitted from the emitter plate. Due to
negative charge , the emitted electrons are paused towards the collector plate by electric field, when
the frequency of the incident light was greater then a certain minimum value, called threshold
frequency. This minimum frequency depends on the nature of the material of the emitter plate. All
these photosensitive substance emit electrons when they are illuminated by light. After the discovery
of electrons, these electros were termed as photoelectrons. The phenomenon is called photoelectric
effect.
(i) Define photoelectric effect.
(ii) Name the minimum frequency required to eject the electrons from the metal surface.
(iii) Write the factors on which threshold frequency depends.
OR
How photoelectric current depends on the intensity of incident radiation.

2. The concept of ‘wave nature of matter’ was postulated by de Broglie in 1924. It was confirmed
experimentally by Davisson and Germer a few years after its postulation.Therefore, the realization was that
‘wave nature’ and ‘particle nature’ can be viewed as the ‘two sides of a coin’. Both matter and radiation can
exhibit either of these ‘natures’, depending on the experimental situation. The phenomena of photoelectric
effect and the concept of ‘matter waves’, have been put to very useful and interesting practical applications. We
are aware of photocells, automatic doors at shops and malls, automatic light switches that turn on the lights as
soon as the intensity drops.

147
(i) Who confirmed experimentally the wave nature of electron?

(ii) A proton and an electron have same kinetic energy. Which one has greater de-Broglie

wavelength ?

(iii) An electron is accelerated through a potential difference of 100 volts. What is the de-

Broglie wavelength associated with it?

OR

The de-broglie wavelength ,associated with a proton and neutron are found to be

equal. Which of the two has a higher value of K.E?

148
 UNIT- VIII
CHAPTER 12& 13
ATOMS AND NUCLIE
Thomson’s model of atom- Every atom consists of uniformly positively charged
sphere in which electrons are embedded like seeds in water melon.
Drawbacks: couldn’t explain large angle scattering of alpha particles & the origin of
spectral series.

Rutherford’s model of atom-

(i) Every atom consists of a tiny central core, called the atomic nucleus, in which the entire positive charge and
almost entire mass of the atom are concentrated.
(ii) The size of nucleus is of the order of 10-15m , which is very small as compared to the size of the atom which is
of the order of 10-10m.
(iii)The atomic nucleus is surrounded by certain number of electrons. As atom on the whole is electrically neutral,
the total negative charge of electrons surrounding the nucleus is equal to total positive charge on the nucleus.
(iv)These electrons revolve around the nucleus in various circular orbits as do the planets around the sun. The
centripetal force required by electron for revolution is provided by the electrostatic force of attraction between
the electrons and the nucleus.

Limitations:
couldn’t explain the stability of the nucleus & the emission of
line spectra of fixed frequencies

Distance of closest approach (Nuclear dimension) :

The minimum distance from the nucleus up to which the -
particle approach, is called the distance of closest approach (r0).
2𝑍𝑒 2
r0 = 1
4𝜋𝜀0 ( 𝑚 𝑣 2 )
2

149
 Impact parameter :-The perpendicular distance of the velocity
vector ( v ) of the -particle from the centre of the nucleus when
it is far away from the nucleus is known as impact parameter. It
is given as
𝑍𝑒 2 cot𝜃⁄2
b= 1
4𝜋𝜀0 ( 𝑚 𝑣 2 )
2
Bohr’s Model-Postulates of Bohr’s theory
(i) Bohr’s first postulate - an electron in an atom could revolve around the nucleus in certain stable orbits
without the emission of radiant energy. Each atom has certain definite stable states in which it can exist, and
each possible state has definite total energy called the stationary states of the atom.
(ii) Bohr’s second postulate - the electron revolves around the nucleus only in those orbits for which the angular
momentum is some integral multiple of h/2π where h is the Planck’s constant
i.e. L=mvr = nh/2π ,n= 1,2,3…..
(iii) Bohr’s third postulate when an electron make a transition from one of its specified non-radiating orbits to
another , a photon is emitted or absorbed having energy equal to the energy difference between the final and
initial states. The frequency of the emitted photon is then given by hν=| Ef – Ei |
Limitations
1. Bohr’s model applicable only for hydrogen like atoms and not for the atoms or ions having more than one
electron.
2. Splitting of spectral lines was not explained in Bohr’s postulates.
3. Orbits were taken as circular but according to Sommerfield these are elliptical
Radius of orbit : For an electron around a Speed of electron : From equation (i) and (ii) , speed
stationary nucleus the electrostatics force of
of electron in nth orbit can be calculated as
attraction provides the necessary centripetal force
1 (Ze )e m v 2 2kZe 2 Ze 2  c  Z Z
i.e. = ………..(i) vn = = = . = 2.2  10 6 m / sec
2 0 nh  137  n
4 0 r 2 r nh n
nh
Also mvr = ………(ii) where (c = speed of light 3  108 m/s)
2
From equation (i) and (ii) radius of nth orbit
n2h2 n 2 h 2 0 n2 n2
rn = = = 0.53 Å  rn  ,
4 kZm e
2 2
m Ze 2
Z Z

1
(k = )
4 0

Energy of the electron :- Total energy : Total energy (E) is the sum of potential
P.E. of the electron in nth orbit energy and kinetic energy
(Ze ) (−e ) kZe 2 i.e. E=K+U
U = k. =−
rn rn kZe 2 n 2 h 2 0
 E=− also rn = .
K.E. of the electron in nth orbit 2rn m ze 2
m v 2 k . (Ze ) (e )  me 4  z2  me 4  z2
As we know = Hence E = −  .   ch
rn rn2  n 2 = −  8  2 ch 3  n2
 8 0 h
2 2
  0 
kZe 2 | U |
 Kinetic energy K = = Z2 Z2 m e4
2rn 2 = − R ch = −13.6 2 eV , where R=
n 2
n 8  02ch3
Short Cut Formula –
R= Rydberg's constant = 1.09  107 per m.
K.E. = - ( Total Energy )

150
 P.E. = - 2 K.E. = 2( Total Energy ) For hydrogen atom, total energy of the electron in nth
𝟏𝟑.𝟔
orbit En = − 𝒏𝟐
eV

Spectral series of Hydrogen atom :-

When electron makes transition from higher energy
level (n2) to lower energy level (n1),the frequency of
emitted photon is given by
hν =En2 – En1
1 1 1
𝜈̅ = = 𝑅 [ 2− ]
𝜆 𝑛
1 𝑛2 2
where 𝜈̅ is called wave number.
(a) Lyman Series: 1=1, 2 = 2, 3, 4 …. (Ultraviolet
region)
(b) Balmer Series: 1=2, 2 =3, 4, 5 … (visible region)
(c) Paschen Series: 1=3, 2 =4, 5, 6…. (Infrared
region)
(d) Brackett Series: 1=4, 2 =5, 6, 7…. (Mid infrared
region)
(e) Pfund Series: 1=5, 2 =6, 7, 8… (Far infrared
region
Composition of Nucleus:
An atom is almost empty. If an atom is enlarged to the size of a classroom, the nucleus would be of the size of
pinhead. Nevertheless, the nucleus contains most (more than 99.9%) of the mass of an atom. Nucleus of an atom
contain neutrons and protons. ZX
A
Here, X is any element, Z = atomic no. A = mass no. No of electron = No of proton = Z
No of Neutrons = A – Z
Size (Radius) of Nucleus
R = R0 A1/3
where A = mass number and R0=constant. Where, R0 = 1.2 x 10 -15 m
Nuclear Density (ρ)
Nuclear density is independent of mass number A.
Nuclear density, ρ = Mass of nucleus / nuclear volume
= mA / (4/3)π(R0A 1/3) 3
=3 m / 4πR03
=2.3 X 10 17 Kg/m3 (constant)
Atomic Mass Unit (u) :- One atomic mass unit is Electron Volt (eV) :- It is the energy acquired by an
1
defined as th of the actual mass of c-12 atom. electron when it is accelerated through a potential
12
1 difference of 1 volt.
1 u = 12 X mass of C-12 atom 1 eV = 1.6 X 10-19 J
1
= X 1.992678 X 10-26 kg & 1 MeV = 1.6 X 10-13 J
12
= 1.66 X 10-27 kg.
Isotopes :- The atoms of an element, which have Isotones :- The nuclids having the same number of
the same atomic number but different mass numbers neutrons are called isotones.
are called isotopes. For examples (i) 37 17𝐶𝑙 & 19𝐾 ,
39

(ii) 198
80𝐻𝑔 & 79𝑃𝑢
197
For examples Isobars :- The atoms having the same mass number
(i) Isotopes of helium Hydrogen 11𝐻, 2
1𝐻 & 31𝐻 but different atomic numbers are called isobars.

151
 (ii) Isotopes of helium--- 32𝐻𝑒 , 42𝐻𝑒 For examples (i) 31𝐻 & 32𝐻𝑒
(iii) Isotopes of Carbon-- 126𝐶 , 136𝐶 , 146𝐶 (ii) 37
17𝐶𝑙 & 16𝑆
37

(iii) 20𝐶𝑎 & 40

40
18𝐴𝑟
Nuclear Force: The nuclear force is the force that
Potential energy of a pair of nucleons as a separation
holds protons and neutrons together in a nucleus.
between two nucleons
Properties of nuclear Forces :-
(i) Nuclear forces are very short range attractive
forces.
(ii) Nuclear forces are charge independent.
(iii) Nuclear forces are non-central forces.
(iv) Nuclear forces do not obey inverse square law
(v) Nuclear forces is attractive for distances larger
than 0.8 fm and repulsive for less than 0.8 fm.
(vi) Nuclear forces are saturated forces.
(vii) Nuclear forces are strongest forces in nature.

Mass -Energy Relation :- E = mc2

Relation between amu & MeV : 1amu=931.5MeV
Mass Defect (∆M) :-
Mass defect is the difference in the mass of nucleus and its constituents nucleon (neutrons and protons).
Mass Defect ∆M = [Z mp + (A – Z) mn ] − M
Where mp = mass of proton , mn = mass of neutron , M = mass of nucleus
Binding Energy ( Eb) :-
The binding energy of a nucleus may be defined as the energy required to break up a nucleus in to its constituent
protons and neutrons and to separate them to such a large distance that they may not interact with each other.
It is equivalent energy of mass defect.
i,e, Eb = ∆𝑀 c2
⇨ Eb = [{Z mp + (A – Z) mn} − M ] c2
Binding Energy per nucleon ( Ebn) :-
Ebn = Eb /A
Binding energy curve :-

152
From the binding energy curves the following conclusions can be drawn
(i)The binding energy per nucleon has a low value for both very light and very heavy nuclei.
(ii) In the region A < 20, the B.E./A of the nuclei is quite low except for the nuclei He, cl and O. In an attempt to
have greater value of B.E./A, the nuclei in the region A < 20 unite to form a heavier nucleus and therefore, the
nuclei in this region are prone to nuclear fusion.
(iii) In the region A > 210, the B.E./A of the nuclei is again quite low. The nuclei in this region have a tendency to
split so as to improve the value of their B.E./A. Hence, in region A > 210, the nuclei are prone to nuclear fission.
(iv) In the region 40 < A < 120, the nuclei are most stable. It is indicated by the flat shape of the graph. The value
of the B.E./A in this region is maximum (= 8:8 MeV per nucleon)

Nuclear fission: - Nuclear fission is the process

by which a nucleus breaks up in such a way that the
two products obtained are of comparable sizes.
Fission of 92U 235 by fast moving neutrons is
represented as,
92 U
235
+ 0 n1 → 92 U
236
→ 56 Ba141 + 36 Kr
92
+ 3 0 n1 + Q
(unstable nucleus)

The energy released in U235 fission is about 200 MeV or 0.8

MeV per nucleon.
Nuclear fusion: - A fusion reaction is one in which
two lighter nuclei get fused together to form a heavy
nucleus. It is a highly exothermic reaction and
produces energy, on a scale, much higher than that
produced in fission.
1
1H + 11 H → 12 H +  + +  e
2
1H + 11 H → 32 He + 
3
2 He + 32 He → 42 He + 11 H + 11 H

4 1 H 1 →2 He 4 + 2  + + 2 + 26.73 MeV

153
 MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Q. NO Questions
1 13 . 6
In the nth orbit, the energy of an electron En = − eV for hydrogen atom. The energy required to take the
n2
electron from first orbit to second orbit will be
(a) 10 .2 eV (b) 12 . 1 eV
(c) 13 .6 eV (d) 3 .4 eV
2 Which one of the series of hydrogen spectrum is in the visible region
(a) Lyman series (b) Balmer series
(c) Paschen series (d) Bracket series
3 Energy levels A, B, C of a certain atom corresponding to increasing values C
1
of energy i.e. E A  E B  E C . If 1 ,  2 ,  3 are the wavelengths of radiations B
corresponding to the transitions C to B, B to A and C to A respectively, which
2 3
of the following statements is correct
1  2 A
(a)  3 = 1 +  2 (b) 3 =
1 +  2
(c) 1 +  2 +  3 = 0 (d) 23 = 12 + 22
4 Ratio of the wavelengths of first line of Lyman series and first line of Balmer series is
(a) 1: 3 (b) 27 : 5
(c) 5 : 27 (d) 4 : 9
5 Nuclear binding energy is equivalent to
(a) Mass of proton (b) Mass of neutron
(c) Mass of nucleus (d) Mass defect of nucleus
6 Size of nucleus is of the order of
(a) 10 −10 m (b) 10 −15 m
(c) 10 m
−12
(d) 10 −19 m
7 Which of the following is quantised according to Bohr’s theory of hydrogen atom
(a) Linear momentum of electron (b) Angular momentum of electron
(c) Linear velocity of electron (d) Angular velocity of electron
8 The average binding energy per nucleon in the nucleus of an atom is approximately
(a) 8 eV (b) 8 KeV
(c) 8 MeV (d) 8 J
9 In a nuclear reaction, which of the following is conserved
(a) Atomic number (b) Mass number
(c)Atomic number, mass number and energy (d) None of these
10 Boron rods in nuclear reactor are used as a
(a) Moderator (b) Control rods
(c) Coolants (d) Protective shield

154
 ANSWERS MULTIPLE CHOICE QUESTIONS

Q. NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ANSWER a b b c d b b c c b

ASSERTION REASONING BASED QUESTION

For question numbers 1 to 10, two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason
(R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true but R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false

Q. NO. Questions
1 Assertion – Balmer series lies in visible reason of electromagnetic spectrum.
Reason – Balmer means visible, hence series lies in visible region.
2 Assertion – Large angle of scattering of alpha particles led to the discovery of atomic nucleus.
Reason – Entire positive charge of atom is concentrated in the central core.
3 Assertion – Impact parameter for scattering of alpha particles by 1800 is zero.
Reason – Zero impact parameter means alpha particle tends to hit to the centre of the nucleus.
4 Assertion – Distance of the closest approach of alpha particle to the nucleus is always greater than the
size of the nucleus.
Reason – Strong nuclear repulsion does not allow alpha particle to reach the surface of the nucleus.
5 Assertion – Energy of an electron in an orbit is independent of n.
Reason – Momentum of an electron revolving in an orbit is directly proportional to n2.
6 Assertion – Wave number is reciprocal of frequency.
Reason – Total energy of an electron revolving in an orbit is always positive.
7 Assertion – Nuclei of different atoms have same size.
Reason – Volume of nucleus is proportional to A 1/3.
8 Assertion – Density of nuclear matter is same for all nuclei.
Reason – Density has nothing to do with mass and size of the nucleus.
9 Assertion – isotopes are the elements having same mass number.
Reason –Isobars are the elements having same atomic number.
10 Assertion – Energy is released when heavy nuclei undergo fission or light nuclei undergo fusion.
Reason – For both process, binding energy per nucleon increases due to mass defect.

ANSWERS ASSERTION REASONING QUESTIONS

Q. NO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
ANSWER c a a a d d d b d a

155
 CASE STUDY QUESTIONS
Q. NO Questions
1 Read the following paragraph and answers the questions:
Spectral emission occurs when an electron transitions, or jumps, from
a higher energy state to a lower energy state. To distinguish the two
states, the lower energy state is commonly designated as n1, and the
higher energy state is designated as n2. The energy of an emitted
photon corresponds to the energy difference between the two states.
Because the energy of each state is fixed, the energy difference
between them is fixed, and the transition will always produce a
photon with the same energy

(i). In which region of hydrogen spectrum of Lyman series lie .?

(ii). What is the total energy of electron correspond to second excited state in hydrogen atom.?
(iii). The radius of innermost electron orbit of a hydrogen atom is 5.3 × 10-11 m. what is the radius of orbit in
the second excited state?
(iv) Find the ratio of photons produced due to transition of an electron of hydrogen atom by its
(a)Second permitted energy level to the first level and
(b)The highest permitted energy level to the first permitted level.
2 Read the following paragraph and answers the questions:
A heavy nucleus breaks into comparatively lighter nuclei which more stable compared to the original
heavy nucleus. When a heavy nucleus like uranium is bombarded by slow moving neutrons, it splits into
two parts releasing large amount of energy. The typical fission reaction of
92 U
235
+ 0 n1 → 92 U 236 → 56 Ba141 + 36 Kr 92 + 3 0 n1 + Q
(unstable nucleus)

The fission of 92U 235 approximately released 200MeV of energy.

(i) If 200MeV energy is released in the fission of a single nucleus of 92U235, what is the number of fissions
which are required to produce a power of 1KW .
(ii) Name the physical quantities that remain conserved in a nuclear reaction?
(iii) Name the phenomenon by which the energy is produced in stars.
(iv). By what factor must the mass number change for the nuclear radius to become twice?

ANSWERS CASE STUDY QUESTIONS

Q. NO ANSWERS
1 (i) ultraviolet region
(ii) -1.51 eV
(iii) r = 32 ×r0 = 9×5.3× 10-11 , r = 4.77 × 10-11 m
(iv) (a) Since, the second permitted energy level to the first level
Energy of photon released = E2 – E1 = (-3.4 eV) – (-13.6 eV) = 10.2 eV
(b) The highest permitted energy level to the first permitted level
=E∞ - E1 = - (13.6) = 13.6 eV
˳˚˳Ratio of energies of photon
= 10.2/13.6 = ¾ = 3:4
2 (i) 3.125x1013
(ii) Charge and momentum
(iii) Uncontrolled Nuclear fusion

156
 (iv) 8 times
Two marks questions
Q. NO. Questions
1 State Bohr’s quantization condition of angular momentum. Calculate the shortest wavelength of the
Bracket series and state to which part of the electromagnetic spectrum does it belong.
2
Obtain the expression for the ratio of de-Broglie wavelengths associated with the electron
orbiting in the second and third excited states of hydrogen atom.
Ans. For De-Broglie wavelength 2πrn = n λn
λn=2πrn / n , And rn = n2 r1 , λ3/λ4 =¾
3 Calculate the shortest wavelength of light emitted in the Paschen series of hydrogen spectrum.
Rydberg’s constant = 1.1 x 107m-1.
4 The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is -13.6 eV. If an electron makes a transition from an energy
level -1.51 eV to -3.4 eV, calculate the wavelength of the spectral line emitted and the series of hydrogen
spectrum to which it belongs.
5 Calculate the radius of the first Bohr’s orbit of an electron in a singly ionized helium atom (Z=2) and also
the velocity of the electron in this orbit.
6 State three properties of nuclear forces. Show that the density of nuclear matter is independent of mass
number A.
7 Using Bohr’s second postulate of quantization of orbital angular momentum show that the
circumference of the electron in the nth orbital state in hydrogen atom is n times the de-Broglie
wavelength associated with it.

8 .In the ground state of hydrogen atom, its Bohr radius is given as 5.3 × 10-11 m. The atom is excited such
that the radius becomes 21.2 × 10-11 m. Find the value of the principal quantum number.
9 Distinguish between nuclear fission and fusion.
10 Draw a plot of potential energy of a pair of nucleons as a function of their separation. Write two
important conclusions which you can draw regarding the nature of nuclear forces.

Three marks questions

Q. Questions
NO.
1 Using Bohr model of the atom, derive expression for the total energy of the electron in hydrogen atom.
What is the significance of total negative energy possessed by the electron?
2 Using Rydberg’s formula, calculate the wavelength of the spectral lines of the first member of the Lyman
series and of the Balmer series.
3 Find the ratio of energies of photons produced due to transition of an electron of hydrogen atom from
its (i) Second permitted energy level to the first level, and (ii) The highest permitted energy level to the
first permitted level
4 Define distance of closest approach and impact parameter. A hydrogen atom initially in the ground state
absorbs a photon which excites it to the n = 4 level. Find the frequency of the photon.
5 In the scattering of an α – particle due to gold (Z=79) nucleus, the closest distance of approach is 42fm.
Calculate the energy of α – particle.
Ans- Hint Ek = 2𝑧𝑒2/4𝜋𝜀0 𝑟
6 The radius of the electron in the first Bohr’s orbit of hydrogen is 0.053 nm. Calculate the kinetic
energy, potential energy and hence the total energy of the electron in the orbit.

157
 7 Define Nuclear forces and gives their important characteristics/properties.
8 Define atomic mass unit (a.m.u.) and calculate its value in SI unit of mass. Also find energy equivalent in
MeV corresponding to it.
9 When a slow neutron is captured by a U 235nucleus, a fission results in the release of 200 MeV energy. If
the output of nuclear reactor is 1.6 MW then find the number of fission per second of the nuclei.
Ans.- Output power = 1.6 MW = 1.6x106 J/s
Energy released/fission = 200MeV = 200 ×1.6 x 10 -13 J
No. of fission required/sec = 1.6 x106 / 200 x 1.6 x 10 -13 = 5 x10 16
10 A neutron is absorbed by a 3Li6 nucleus with the subsequent emission of an alpha particle. i) Write the
corresponding nuclear reactions. ii) Calculate the energy released in MeV, in this reaction.
Given mass 3Li6= 6.0151264; mass (neutron) = 1.00966544
Mass (alpha particle) =4.00260444 and mass(triton)=3.01000004
11 The energy levels of an atom are as shown in
Fig. Which one of these transitions will result
in the emission of a photon of wavelength 275
nm?

12 Determine the speed of electrons in n = 3 orbit of Hydrogen atom

13 A nucleus of mass number 240 and having binding energy/nucleon 7.6 MeV splits into two fragments Y,
Z of mass numbers 110 and 130 respectively. If the binding energy/nucleon of Y, Z is equal to 8.5 MeV
each, calculate the energy released in the nuclear reaction.
14 Explain, in brief, why Rutherford’s model cannot account for the stability of an atom.
15 Draw a schematic arrangement of the Gieger-Marsden experiment. How did the scattering of α-particle
by a thin foil of gold provide an important way to determine an upper limit on the nucleus? Explain briefly.

Five marks questions

Q NO. Questions
1 Using Bohr’s postulates, derive the expression for the frequency of radiation emitted when electron in
hydrogen atom undergoes transition from higher energy state quantum no.(ni) to the lower state(nf).
When electron in hydrogen atom jumps from energy state ni = 4 to nf = 3 ,2,1, identify the spectral series
to which the emission lines belong.
2 A hydrogen-like atom of atomic number Z is in an excited state of quantum number 2n. It can emit a
maximum energy photon of 204 eV. If it makes a transition to quantum state n, a photon of energy 40.8
eV is emitted. Find n, Z and the ground state energy (in eV) of this atom. Also calculate the 256 minimum
energy (in eV) that can be emitted by this atom during de-excitation. Ground state energy of hydrogen
atom is -13.6 eV.
3 Draw the curve showing the variation of binding energy per nucleon with the mass number of nuclei.
Using it, explain the fusion of nuclei lying on ascending part and fission of nuclei lying on descending
part of this curve.
4 (a)Draw the plot of binding energy per nucleon (B.E./A) as a function of mass number A.
Write two important conclusions that can be drawn regarding the nature of nuclear force.
(b)Use this graph to explain the release of energy in both the processes of nuclear fusion and fission.
Write one typical reaction for each.
5 Define the Q-value of a nuclear process. When can a nuclear process not proceed spontaneously? If both
the no. of protons and the no. of neutrons are conserved in a nuclear reaction, in what way is mass
converted into energy (vice – versa)in the nuclear reaction?

158
 UNIT-IX
CHAPTER -14
Semiconductor Electronics: material, Devices and Simple Circuits
Differences Between Conductors, Semiconductors & Insulators:
Characteristics Conductor Insulator Semiconductor
Definition A conductor is a material An insulator is a material A semiconductor is a
that allows the flow of that does not allow the flow material whose conductivity
current when applied of current lies between conductor &
with a voltage. insulator
Conductivity very high conductivity very low conductivity intermediate
(102 -108 Ʊ /m) (10-11 -10-19 Ʊ /m), conductivity
((105 Ʊ /m -10-6 Ʊ /m)
Resistivity Low (10-2 -10-8 Ω/m) Very High (1011-1019 Ω/m) Normal
(10-6Ω/m -105 Ω/m)
Temperature Resistance increases with Resistance decreases with an Resistance decreases with
an increase in increase in temperature. an increase in temperature.
temperature.
Examples Gold, Copper, Silver, Rubber, Glass, Wood, Air, Silicon, Germanium,
Aluminum etc Mica, Plastic, Paper etc. Selenium, antimony, Gallium
Arsenide etc.
Energy gap Eg=0eV Eg>3eV Eg<3eV
Energy Band
diagrams

Energy Bands: This theory is based on the Pauli Exclusion Principle.

Valence band: The energy band formed by a series of energy
levels containing valence electrons is known as valence band.
At 0 K, the electron fills the energy levels in valence band
starting from lowest one.
(i) This band is always filled with electrons.
(ii) This is the band of maximum energy.
(iii) Electrons are not capable of gaining energy from external
electric field.
(iv) No flow of current due to electrons present in this band.
(v) The highest energy level which can be occupied by an
electron in valence band at 0 K is called fermi level.

159
Forbidden energy gap (Eg) : Energy gap Conduction band : The higher energy level band is called the
between conduction band and valence conduction band.
band E g = (C.B.) min − (V.B.) max (i) It is also called empty band of minimum energy.
(ii) This band is partially filled by the electrons.
max. (iii) In this band the electrons can gain energy from external
C.B.
min. electric field.
Eg (iv) The electrons in the conduction band are called the free
max.
V.B.
min.
electrons. They are able to move anywhere within the volume
of the solid.
(i) No free electron is present in forbidden
(v) Current flows due to such electrons.
energy gap.
(ii) Width of forbidden energy gap depends
upon the nature of substance.
(iii) As temperature increases (),
forbidden energy gap decreases () very
slightly.

Intrinsic Semiconductors: Extrinsic Semiconductors:

160
(1) A pure semiconductor is called intrinsic (1) An impure semiconductor is called extrinsic
semiconductor. It has thermally generated semiconductor
current carriers . (2) When pure semiconductor material is mixed with small
(2) They have four electrons in the amounts of certain specific impurities with valency different
outermost orbit of atom and atoms are from that of the parent material, the number of mobile
held together by covalent bond . electrons/holes drastically changes. The process of addition
(3) Free electrons and holes both are
charge carriers and n e (in C.B.) = n h (in V.B.) of impurity is called doping.
(4) In pure semiconductor, impurity must (3) Pentavalent impurities : The elements whose atom has
be less than 1 in 10 8 parts of five valance electrons are called pentavalent impurities e.g.
semiconductor. As, P, Sb etc. These impurities are also called donor impurities
(5) In intrinsic semiconductor ne = n h = ni ; because they donate extra free electron.
where ne = Electron density in (4) Trivalent impurities : The elements whose each atom
has three valance electrons are called trivalent impurities e.g.
conduction band, nh = Hole density in
In, Ga, Al, B, etc. These impurities are also called acceptor
V.B., ni = Density of intrinsic carriers. impurities as they accept electron.
(6) The fraction of electrons of valance (5) The compounds of trivalent and pentavalent elements
band present in conduction band is given also behaves like semiconductors e.g. GaAs, InSb, In P, GaP etc.
by f  e − Eg / kT ; where Eg = Fermi energy or k (6) The number of atoms of impurity element is about 1 in 10 8
= Boltzmann's constant and T = Absolute atoms of the semiconductor.
temperature (7) In extrinsic semiconductors n e  n h , ne nh = ni2
(7) Because of less number of charge (8) Their conductivity is high and they are used for practical
carriers at room temperature, intrinsic purposes.
semiconductors have low conductivity so (9) Extrinsic semiconductors are of two types
they have no practical use. (i)N-type semiconductor (ii) P-type semiconductor.

Holes in Semiconductors :
• A hole is considered as a seat of positive charge, having magnitude of equal to that of an electron.
• Holes acts as virtual charge, although there is no physical charge on it.
• Effective mass of hole is more than electron.
• Mobility of hole is less than electron.
Energy bands in semiconductors:-

161
Intrinsic Semiconductors: Extrinsic Semiconductors:

Pure semiconductor N-type P-type

At T<0K At T>0K

N-type Semiconductors P-type semiconductors

• Majority charge carriers – electrons • Majority charge carriers – holes
• Minority charge carriers – holes • Minority charge carriers – electrons
• ne > nh; ie >> ih • nh >> ne; ih >> ie
• N-type semiconductor is electrically • P-type semiconductor is also electrically neutral (not
neutral (not negatively charged) positively charged)
• Impurity is called Donar impurity • Impurity is called Acceptor impurity.
because one impurity atom generate • Acceptor energy level lies just above the valence band.
one electron.
• Donor energy level lies just below the
conduction band.
P-N Junction diode :
A p-n junction is an arrangement made Diffusion process : due to high concentration of charge
by adding N-Type and P-Type Impurities carriers
in a single semiconducting crystal. Drift Process:-due electric field at junction.

Diffusion current = the movement caused

by variation in the carrier concentration.
Drift current = the movement caused by
electric fields.

162
 Depletion Layer : Due to diffusion, neutrality of both N and P-
type semiconductor is disturbed, a layer of negative charge
appear near the junction in the P-crystal and a layer of positive
charge appears near the junction in N-crystal. This layer is
called depletion layer
– +
VB

P N
Depletion layer
• The thickness of depletion layer is 1 micron = 10–6 m.
• Width of depletion layer 
1
Dopping

• Depletion is directly proportional to temperature.

P-N Junction Biasing: - It means the way of connecting battery
Potential Barrier : The potential to P-N junction diode. It is two types
difference created across the P-N 1. Forward Biasing
junction due to the diffusion of electron 2. Reverse Biasing
and holes is called potential barrier. Forward Biasing: Positive terminal of the battery is connected
On the average the potential barrier to the P-Type and negative terminal connected to N- Type.
in P-N junction is ~ 0.5 V and the width of
depletion region ~ 10–6m.
So the barrier electric field
V 0 .5
E= = = 5  10 5 V / m
d 10 −6
Forward current in mA

• Forward biasing width of depletion layer decreases.

P N
• In forward
Idf biasing resistance offered RForward minimum.
Idr
Inet
Knee
voltage Forward voltage

Fig. 27.21

163
Reverse Biasing : Positive terminal of • Forward bias opposes the potential barrier and for V >
the battery is connected to the N-Type VB a forward current is set up across the junction.
and negative terminal connected to P- • Cut-in (Knee) voltage : The voltage at which the current
Type. starts to increase rapidily. For Ge it is 0.1 V and for Si it is 0.7 V.

• In reverse biasing width of

depletion layer increases.
• In reverse biasing resistance

Forward current in mA
P N
offered RReversehigh.
• Reverse bias supports the
potential barrier and no current
Knee voltage
flows across the junction due to Forward voltage
the diffusion of the majority
carriers.
• (A very small reverse currents
may exist in the circuit due to the
drifting of minority carriers
across the junction)

Reverse voltage

Break down Reverse current

voltage
r

P-N junction Diode as a rectifier:- Full wave rectifier:- When the P-N junction diode rectifies full
Rectifier is a device which converts ac to of the ac wave, it is called full wave rectifier.
dc. It is of following two types
1. Half wave rectifier
2. Full wave rectifier
Half wave rectifier : When the P-N
junction diode rectifies half of the ac
wave, it is called half wave rectifier

164
 frequency : The ripple frequency of full wave rectifier = 2 
(Frequency of input ac)

The frequency () for half wave rectifier

is same as that of ac.
Assertion Reason Type Questions:
Two statements are given –one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select the
answer to these questions from the codes (a) , (b) , (c ) and (d) as given below.
i) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A,
j) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A,
k) A is true but R is false,
l) A is false and R is also false.
1. Assertion : If the temperature of a semiconductor is increased then it's resistance decreases.
Reason :The energy gap between conduction band and valence band is very small.
2. Assertion : An N-type semiconductor has a large number of electrons but still it is electrically neutral.
Reason : An N-type semiconductor is obtained by doping an intrinsic semiconductor with a
pentavalent impurity.
3. Assertion : Current is determined by the rate of flow of charge carriers.
Reason : Semiconductors do not Obey's Ohm's law.
4. Assertion : P-N junction diode behave as conductor at room temperature.
Reason : V-i characteristic of P-N junction diode is same as that of any other conductor.
Answers:
1 a 2 b 3 b 4 c

Actual separation of
165 atoms in the crystal
E
 Multiple Choice Type Questions
1. If the following input signal is sent through a PN-junction diode, then the output signal across RL
will be
10 V
P N
0V
RL

–10 V

2. In the half-wave rectifier circuit shown. Which one of the following wave forms is true for VCD , the
output across C and D?

A C

P Q VCD RL

B D

3. The i-V characteristic of a P-N junction diode is shown below. The approximate dynamic resistance
of the P-N junction when a forward bias of 2volt is applied
i (mA)
800

(a) 1  (b) 0.25  400

(c) 0.5  (d) 5

2 2.1 V (volt)

4. A N-type semiconductor is
(a) Negatively charged (b)Positively charged
(c) Neutral (d) None of these
5. The forbidden energy band gap in conductors, semiconductors and insulators are EG 1 , EG 2 and EG 3

respectively. The relation among them is

(a) EG 1 = EG 2 = EG 3 (b) EG 1  EG 2  EG 3

(c) EG 1  EG 2  EG 3 (d) EG 1  EG 2  EG 3

6. Let nP and ne be the number of holes and conduction electrons respectively in a semiconductor.
Then

166
 (a) n P  n e in an intrinsic semiconductor

(b) n P = n e in an extrinsic semiconductor

(c) n P = n e in an intrinsic semiconductor

(d) n e  n P in an intrinsic semiconductor

7. In the depletion region of an unbiased P-N junction diode there are;

(a) Only electrons

(b) Only holes

(c) Both electrons and holes

(d) compensated ions

8. The cause of the potential barrier in a P-N diode is

(a) Depletion of positive charges near the junction

(b) Concentration of positive charges near the junction

(c) Depletion of negative charges near the junction

(d) Concentration of positive and negative charges near the junction

9. Which is reverse biased diode

–20V
(a) (b)
5V
–10V

15V 10V
(c) 10V (d) – 5V

1 c 4 c 7 d
2 b 5 b 8 d
3 b 6 c 9 b
One Mark Questions
1. At what temperature would an intrinsic semiconductor behave like a perfect insulator?
2. Give the ratio of number of holes and number of conduction electrons in an intrinsic
semiconductor.
167
 3. How does the energy gap in a semiconductor vary, when doped with a pentavalent
impurity?
Two marks Questions
1. How much current is draw through the resistance ?

2. Which one of following diodes D1 and D2 in the given fig.

and
3. What type of extrinsic semiconductor is formed when
(i) Germanium is doped with indium?
(ii) Silicon is doped with bismuth?
4. Write two characteristic feature to distinguish between n-type and p-type semiconductors.
5. What happens to the width of depletion layer of a p-n junction when it is
(i)forward biased? (ii)reverse biased?
6. Draw the energy band diagram of
(i) n-type and, (ii) p-type semiconductor at temperature, T > OK
Three Marks Question
1. Draw a labelled diagram of a half wave rectifier circuit. State its working principle. Show the
input- output waveforms.
2. Draw a labelled diagram of a full wave rectifier circuit. State its working principle. Show the
input output waveforms.
3. Draw the circuit diagram showing how a p-n junction diode is
(i)forwardbiased (ii)reversebiased.
How is the width of depletion layer affected in the two cases?
4. What type of extrinsic semiconductor is formed when
(i) Germanium is doped Arsenic? (ii) Silicon is doped with aluminium.

Five Marks Question

1. Explain reverse biasing of a p-n junction diode. How is forward biasing different from
reverse biasing in a p-n junction diode? With the help of a circuit diagram, explain the use
of this device as a half-wave rectifier.
168
 Case Study Type Questions
When the diode is forward biased, it is found that beyond forward voltage V = Vk, called knee voltage, the
conductivity is very high. At this value of battery biasing for p-n junction,the potential barrier is
overcome and the current increases rapidly with increase in forward voltage. When the diode is reverse
biased, the reverse bias voltage produces a very small current about a few microamperes which almost
remains constant with bias. This small current is reverse saturation current.
(i) Is it forward or reverse biased P-N junction?

(ii) Which types of impurity we add to obtain N- type Semiconductor?

(iii) . Two semiconductor materials A and B shown in the given figure, are made by doping germanium crystal
with arsenic and indium respectively. The two are joined end connected to a battery as shown in figure.

(a) will the junction be forward biased or reverse biased?

(b) (b)sketch a V-I graph for this arrangement.
OR
(iii) The V-I characteristic of a diode is shown in the figure. Find out the value of forward bias dynamic
resistance.

169
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGTHAN, R.O, JAIPUR
SAMPLE PAPER-1, 2022-23
CLASS-XII
SUBJECT- PHYSICS (042)
Time : 3 Hrs Max. Marks : 70
General Instructions :
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section E. All the sections are
compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQ of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questions of two marks each, Section C
contains five questions of three marks each, section D contains three long questions of five marks each and Section E
contains two case study based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B, C, D and E. You have to attempt
only one of the choices in such questions.
5. Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A
Q.No. Marks
1 Three positive charges of equal value q are placed at the vertices of an equilateral triangle. 1
The resulting lines of force should be sketched as in
(A) (B)

(C) (D)

2 Two point charges +q and −q are held fixed at (−d , 0 ) and (d , 0 ) respectively of a (X , Y ) 1
coordinate system. Which statement is correct-
(A) E at all points on the Y − axis is along î
(B) The electric field E at all points on the X − axis has the same direction
(C) Dipole moment is 2qd directed along î
(D) Work has to be done in bringing a test charge from infinity to the origin

170
3 A cell of emf E and internal resistance r is connected across an external resistor R. The 1
graphshowing the variation of P.D. across R versus R is-

4 The direction of magnetic lines of forces close to a straight conductor carrying current is- 1
(A) Along the length of the conductor (B) Radially outward
(C) Circular in a plane perpendicular to the conductor (D) Helical
5 A circular coil ‘A’ has radius R and the current flowing through it, is I. Another circular coil ‘B’ 1
has a radius 2R and if 2I is the current flowing through it, then the ratio of magnetic fields at
the centre of two circular coil is-
(A) 4 : 1 (B) 2 : 1
(C) 3 : 1 (D) 1 : 1
6 Among the following properties describing diamagnetism, identify the property which 1
is wrongly stated -
(A) Diamagnetic material do not have permanent magnetic moment
(B) Diamagnetism is explained by orbital theory of electrons
(C) Diamagnetic materials have a small positive susceptibility
(D) The magnetic moment of individual electrons neutralize each other
7 If A and B are identical bulbs which bulb will glow brighter 1
(A) A 100 mH A

(B) B 10 pF B

(C) Both equally bright

(D) Both bulbs will not glow
8 Which of the following statement is NOT true about the properties of electromagnetic 1
waves?
(A) These waves do not require any material medium for their propagation
(B) Both electric and magnetic field vectors attain the maxima and minima at the same time
(C) Both electric and magnetic field vectors are parallel to each other
(D) The energy of electromagnetic wave is equally contributed by both electric and magnetic
fields

171
9 The magnetic field in the cylindrical region shown in figure increases at a constant rate of 20 1
mT/sec. Each side of the square loop ABCD has a length of 1 cm and resistance of 4. Find the

current in the wire AB if the switch S is closed C   
B 
    
(A) 1 .25  10 −7 A , (anti-clockwise)
 S    
(B) 1 .25  10 −7 A (clockwise)
 D   
A 
(C) 2 .5  10 −7 A (anti clockwise)
(D) 2 .5  10 −7 A (clockwise)

10 In Young's double slit experiment, if one of the slit is closed fully, then- 1
(A) A bright slit will be observed, no interference pattern will exist
(B) The bright fringes will become more bright
(C) The bright fringes will become fainter (D)None of the above
11 A dielectric slab of thickness d is inserted in a parallel plate capacitor whose negative plate is 1
at x = 0 and positive plate is at x = 3d . The slab is equidistant from the plates. The capacitor is
given some charge. As one goes from 0 to 3d ,which of the following statement is INCORRECT-
(A) The magnitude of the electric field changes.
(B) The direction of the electric field remains the same.
(C) The electric potential increases continuously.
(D) The electric potential increases at first, then decreases and again increases.

12 The work function of metal is 1 eV. Light of wavelength 3000 Å is incident on this metal 1
surface. The velocity of emitted photo-electrons will be
(A) 10 m/sec (B) 1  10 3 m/sec
(C) 1  10 4 m/sec (D) 1  10 6 m/sec
13 The energy level diagram of an element is given:- , which transition does correspond 1
to the emission of a spectral line of wave length 102.7 nm-

(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D

14 Binding energy of a nucleus is- 1

(A) Energy given to its nucleus during its formation
(B) Total mass of nucleus converted to energy units
(C) Release of energy from the nucleus during its formation
(D) Total K.E. and P.E. of the nucleons in the nucleus
172
 15 The r.m.s. voltage of the wave form shown is- 1

(A) 10 V (B) 7 V
(C) 6.37 V (D) 12 V

16 Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select 1
the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(B) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(C) A is true but R is false
(D) A is false and R is also false
Assertion : V-I characteristic of P-N junction diode is same as that of any conductor.
Reason : P-N junction diode behaves as conductor at room temperature.
17 Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select 1
the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(B) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(C) A is true but R is false
(D) A is false and R is also false
Assertion : For best contrast between maxima and minima in the interference pattern of
Young’s double slit experiment, the intensity of light emerging out of the two slits should be
equal.
Reason :The intensity of interference pattern is proportional to square of amplitude.
18 Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R). Select 1
the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
(A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(B) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(C) A is true but R is false
(D) A is false and R is also false
Assertion : In photoelectric effect, on increasing the intensity of light, both the number
of electrons emitted and kinetic energy of each of them get increased but photoelectric
current remains unchanged.
Reason : The photoelectric current depends only on wavelength of light.

SECTION B
19 (A)What is the nature of the magnetic materials used for making these two bars X and Y ?
2
173
 (B) How is the magnetic susceptibility of specimen X different from that of specimen Y ?
20 The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is –13.6 eV. What is the kinetic energy and
Potential energy of an electron in the 2nd excited state? 2

OR
The nuclear reaction 2 H + 2 H → 4 He (mass of deuteron = 2.0141 a.m.u. and mass of He = 4.0024
a.m.u.) is a kind of fusion reaction. How much energy will release in this process (in MeV)?
21 Electromagnetic waves with wavelength -
(i) λ1 is suitable for radar systems used in aircraft navigation. 2
(ii) λ2 is used to improve visibility in runways during fog and mist conditions.
(iii) λ3 is used to kill germs in water purifiers.
Identify and name the part of the electromagnetic spectrum to which these radiations
belong.Also arrange these wavelengths in ascending order of their magnitude.
22 A right angle prism is placed as shown in the figure. Given that the
prism is made of glass with R.I. as 1.5, 2
trace the path of the ray P incident normal to the face AC.

23 A diode having potential difference 0.5 V across its junction which does not depend on current,
2
is connected in series with resistance of 20  across source. If 0.1 A passes through resistance
then what is the voltage of the source

24 You are given three lenses as L1, L2 & L3 each of focal length 20 cm. An object is kept at
40 cm in front of L1 as shown. The final image is formed at focus I of L3. Find the 2
separation between L1,
L2 & L3.

25 A parallel plate capacitor is charged by a battery. After some-times, the battery is

2
disconnected and a dielectric slab of dielectric constant K is inserted between the plates.
How would (i) the electric field between plates (ii) the energy stored in the capacitor, be
affected? Justify your answer.

174
SECTION C
26 (a) An ammeter and a milliammeter are converted from the same galvanometer. Out of
the two, which has greater resistance? 3
(b) An α-particle and a proton of equal kinetic energy are moving in uniform magnetic field
acting perpendicular to plane of motion of them. What would be the ratio of the radii
of their trajectories in the field?
27 A metallic rod of length ′l′ is rotated with a
Frequency ′ν′, with one end hinged at the centre in a 3
uniform magnetic field B as shown.
Derive an expression for-
(a) induced emf and induced current in the rod
(b) magnitude and direction of the force acting
on the rod
28 Draw a graph showing the variation of stopping potential with frequency of incident radiation
in relation to photoelectric effect. Deduce an expression for the slope of graph using Einstein’s 3
photo electric equation.
OR
An electromagnetic wave of wavelength 𝜆 is incident on a photosensitive surfaceof negligible
work function. If the photoelectrons emitted from the surface have de-Broglie wavelength 𝜆1 .
Prove that
2𝑚𝑐
𝜆 = ( ℎ )𝜆21 .
29 State Bohr’s postulate for the permitted orbits for the electron in a hydrogen atom. Use this
postulate to prove that the circumference of the nth permitted orbit for the electron can 3
contain exactly ‘n’ wavelengths of the de-Broglie wavelength associated with the electron in
that orbit.
30 Explain the term 'inductive reactance'. Show graphically the variation of inductive reactance
with frequency of the applied alternating voltage. An a.c. voltage E = E0 sin ωt is applied 3
across a pure inductor of inductance L. Show mathematically that the current flowing through
it lags behind the applied voltage by a phase angle of π/2.
OR
Explain the term 'capacitive reactance'. Show graphically the variation of capacitive reactance
with frequency of the applied alternating voltage. An a.c. E = E0 sin ωt voltage is applied across
a pure capacitor of capacitance C. Show mathematically that the current flowing through it
leads the applied voltage by a phase angle of π/2.

SECTION D
31 An electric dipole is held in uniform electric field
(A)Show that no translator force acts on it. 5
(B)Derive an expression for the torque acting on it
(C)State the conditions for stable and unstable equilibrium.
OR
(A) State Gauss Theorem. A thin charged wire of infinite length has line charge density ‘λ’. Derive
expression for electric field at a distance ‘r’.
175
 (B) Two point charges +3µC and -3µC are placed 5cm apart
(i) Draw equipotential surface of the system.
(ii) Why do equipotential surface get closer near the point charge ?
32 (A) State Kirchhoff’s laws used in the analysis of electric circuits and explain them.
(B) Derive the equation of the balanced state in a Wheatstone bridge using Kirchhoff’s laws. 5
OR
(A)Write the mathematical relation for the resistivity of a material in terms of relaxation time,
number density, and mass and charge carries in it.
Explain using this relation, why the resistivity of a metal increases and that of a semiconductor
decreases with rise in temperature.
(B) Two cells of EMF 1V, 2V and internal resistances 2Ω and 1Ω respectively are connected in
(i) series, (ii) parallel. What should be the external resistance in the circuit so that the current
through the resistance be the same in the two cases? In which case more heat is generated in
the cells?
33 (A) State and explain Huygen’s principle
(B) Derive Snell’s law using this principle
(C) Write the essential conditions for constructive and destructive interference to take place.
OR 5
What is diffraction of light? Draw a graph showing the variation of intensity with angle in a single
slit diffraction experiment. Write one feature, which distinguish the observed pattern from the
double slit interference pattern. How would the diffraction pattern of single slit be affected
when
(a) The width of the slit is decreased? (b)The monochromatic source of light is replaced by
source of white light. 5

SECTION E
34 Case Study : p-n Junction
When the diode is forward biased, it is found that beyond forward voltage V = Vk, called knee 4
voltage, the conductivity is very high. At this value of battery biasing for p-n junction, the
potential barrier is overcome and the current increases rapidly with increase in forward voltage.
When the diode is reverse biased, the reverse bias voltage produces a very small current about a
few microamperes which almost remains constant with bias. This small current is reverse
saturation current.
(A) Identify the biasing of diodes in given figures.

176
 (B) The V-I characteristic of a p-n junction diode is shown in the figure. Find the ratio of forward
to reverse bias resistances.

(C) Explain the terms depletion layer and potential barrier in formation of junction diode.

OR

Write any two differences between p-type and n-type semiconductors.

35 Case Study : Compound Microscope

A compound microscope is an optical instrument used for observing highly magnified images 4
of tiny objects. The magnifying power of a compound microscope is defined as the ratio of the
angle subtended at the eye by the final image to the angle subtended at the eye by the object
when both the final image and the object are situated at the least distance of distinct vision
from the eye. It can be given that: m = m e × mo, where me is magnification produced by eye
lens and mo is magnification produced by the objective lens.
(A) Why should the focal lengths of objective and eye-piece of compound microscope be
short?
(B) State any two differences between compound microscope and astronomical telescope.
(C) Draw a ray diagram of compound microscope for near point adjustment. Write the
expression for its magnifying power.
OR
A compound microscope consists of an objective lens of focal length 2.0 cm and an eyepiece
of focal length 6.25 cm separated by a distance of 15 cm. Find the distance of object from
objective, so that final image is formed at the least distance of distinct vision.

177
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGTHAN, R.O, JAIPUR
SAMPLE PAPER-1, 2022-23
CLASS-XII
SUBJECT- PHYSICS (042)
MARKING SCHEME

Q.No. Marks
1 (C) 1

2 (A) 1
3 (A) 1
4 (C) 1
5 (D) 1
6 (C) Susceptibility of diamagnetic substance is negative and it does not change with 1
temperature.
7 (A)  (XC) >> (XL) 1

8 (C) Both electric and magnetic field vectors are parallel to each other. 1
9 e A dB (1  10 −2 )2 1
(A) i= = . =  20  10 − 3 = 1.25  10 −7 A
R R dt 16
(Anti-clockwise).
10 (A) 1
11 (D) 1

12 (D) E = W0 + K max ; E =
12375
= 4 . 125 eV
1
3000
 K max = E − W0 = 4 .125 eV − 1 eV = 3 . 125 eV
1
 2
mv max = 3 .125  1 .6  10 −19 J
2
2  3 .125  1 .6  10 −19
 v max = = 1  10 6 m / s
9 .1  10 − 31

13 (D) E = hC/ƛ = ( 12.42 X 10-7)eV /(1.027 X 10-7) = 12.1 eV 1

14 (C) Energy released while forming a nucleus is known as binding energy (by definition). 1

15 (C) 1
16 (D) 1

178
17 (B) 1

18 (D) 1
19 X - diamagnetic ½
Y- paramagnetic ½
The magnetic susceptibility of X is small and negative and that of A is small and positive. 1
20 Given E1 = -13.6 eV
For 2nd excited state n = 3 so E3 = -13.6 / 32 = -1.51 eV 1
Thus K.E. = - E3 = + 1.51 eV and P.E. = 2 E3 = - 3.02 eV 1/2
1/2
OR
Total mass of reactants = (2 .0141 )  2 = 4 .0282 amu
Total mass of products = 4 . 0024 amu

Mass defect = 4 . 0282 amu − 4 . 0024 amu = 0 . 0258 amu

 Energy released E = 931  0 .0258 = 24 MeV

2
21 λ1 –Microwave ½
λ2 – infrared ½
λ3- ultraviolet ½
Ascending order – λ3<λ2<λ1 ½
22 From 𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑖𝑐 = 1/𝑛  𝑠𝑖𝑛 𝑖𝑐 = 1/1.5 = 2/3 1
So ic = 420
Here angle of incidence at interface AC is 450 i.e i > ic
So the ray undergoes TIR. 1

23 (c) V ' = V + IR 2
= 0.5 + 0.1  20
= 2.5 V

24 For lens L1 :- u = - 40 cm and f = +20 cm so image distance v = u f /(u + f) = (-40 x

20)/(- 40 +20)
 v = 40 cm. Now final image is formed at focus of L3 so incident rays for this lens 1
should be parallel to the principal axis which is possible only if the image formed by
lens L1 is at the focus F1 of lens L2.
So the separation between lens L1 & L2 is = 40 + 20 = 60 cm. The separation between L2
and L3 may be any distance and separation between L1 & L3 should be greater than 60
cm. 1

25 (i) (E = V/d ) is decreased 1

(ii) U = Q2/2C is also decreased 1

179
26 (i) Milliammeter 1
(ii) r = √2mK / q B
so r α √m/q
2
r = (√4/1) X (1/2) = 1:1

27 (a) As the rod is rotated, due to Lorentz force, free electrons in the rod move towards the 2+1
outer end and get distributed over the ring. Thus, an emf is induced across the ends of the
rod induced emf across the length dl of the rod
de = Bv dl = B(lω) dl = Bωldl
l
l l l2 1
⇨e = ∫0 Bωldl = Bω ∫0 l dl e = Bω [ 2 ] = 2 Bω(l2 − 0)
0
1 1
⇨e = 2 Bωl2 = 2 B(2πν)l2 = πνBl2
Induced current, IThus, an emf is induced across the ends of the rod
induced emf across the length dl of the rod
e 1 Bωl2 πνBl2
= = =
R 2 R2 R
1 Bωl 1 B2 l3 ω πνB2 l3
(b) Force on the rod, F = BIl sin 90 = B (2 R ) l = 2 R = R

28 Correct Graph 1
Correct Explanation and Derivation 2
OR
Correct Explanation 3
29 Electrons can revolve only in those circular orbits in which the angular momentum of an
h
electron is an integral multiple of 2π where h being the Planck’s constant.
h
i,e, mvr = n 2π where n = 1,2,3,4,----------& is principal quantum number. 1
This is called Bohr’s quantum condition . While revolving in these permissible orbits , an
electron does not radiate energy. These non-radiating orbits are called stationary orbits. And
for these orbits 2πr = n λ

h
But λ = mv
h
⇨ 2πr = n mv
h
⇨ mvr= n 2π n= 1,2,3 ---
This is famous Bohr’s quantum condition . 2

30 Correct Explanation and Derivation 3

31 (A) correct explanation 2
(B) correct derivation 2
(C) correct conditions 1
180
 OR
(A) Correct statement and derivation ½&
2½
(B) (i) Correct diagram 1
(ii) Correct explanation 1

32 (A) Correct statements 2

(B) Derivation and Explanation 3
OR
(A)Correct Derivation 1+2
5

(B) For series combination, I S = 3

3+ R and For parallel combination, I P = 2
3
= 5
3R+2
+R
3
Given I S = I P  R = 94 = 2.25 Ω . 2
In series combination more heat is generated in the cells.
33 Correct statement 1
Correct derivation 3
Correct expression 1
OR
Correct definition
Correct graph 1
One correct feature 1
(a) Width increases 1
(b) Only central maxima of white colour will be formed 1
1
34 (A) Both are in reverse bias ½ +½
(B) Rf/Rr=10-6 1
(C )Correct Explanation OR differences 2

35 (A) Magnifying power of a compound microscope increases when focal length of both 1
objective and eye-piece are decreased.
(B) Correct differences 1
(C) Correct diagram and expression OR Correct calculation up to u = -2.5 cm 2

181
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGTHAN, R.O, JAIPUR
SAMPLE PAPER-1
CLASS-XII
SUBJECT- PHYSICS (042)
BLUE-PRINT
S. UNIT MCQ SA SA CASE BASED LONG ANS. TOTAL
NO (1-MARK) (2-MARKS) (3-MARKS) QUESTIONS (5-MARKS) 70(35)
(4-MARKS)
1 ELECTROSTATICS 3(3) 2(1) 5(1)

2 CURRENT 1(1) 5(1)

ELECTRICITY
16 (7)
3 MOVING CHARGES 3(3) 2(1) 3(1)
AND MAGNETISM

4 EMI & A.C. 3(3) 6(2) 17(10)

5 E.M. WAVES 1(1) 2(1)

6 OPTIC 2(2) 4(2) 4(1) 5(1) 18(8)

7 DUAL NATURE OF 2(2) 3(1)

RADIATIONS AND
MATTER
8 ATOM & NUCLEI 2(2) 2(1) 3(1) 12(7)

9 SEMICONDUCTER & 1(1) 2(1) 4(1)

ELECTRONIC
DEVICES 7(3)
10 Total Questions 18 7 5 2 3 70(35)

182
183
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN REGIONAL OFFICE JAIPUR
SAMPLE PAPER-2
CLASS : XII
SESSION : 2022-2023
PHYSICS 042 (THEORY)
Max. Marks : 70 Marks Max. Time Allowed : 3 Hrs
_________________________________________________________________________________________
General Instructions :
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section E. All the
sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQ of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questions of two marks
each, Section C contains five questions of three marks each, section D contains three long questions
of five marks each and Section E contains two case study based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B, C, D and E. You
have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5). Use of calculators is not allowed.

Section A
Q.No. Marks
1. The velocity of electromagnetic radiation in a medium of permittivity ε0 and 1
permeability μ0 is given by
a. 1/  0 2 0 b.  0  0 c.  0 /  0 d. 1 /  0  0
2. In microscope the objective lens with focal length fo = 1.0 cm, and an eyepiece with 1
focal length fe = 2.0 cm, and a tube length of 20 cm, the magnification is
a. 250 , b. 50 , c. 150 d. 300

3. The field lines of a positive point charge is 1

shown in fig. ,Give the signs of the
potential difference Vp – VQ;
a. Positive
b. Negative
c. Zero
d. None of them

4. The total energy of an electron in the first excited state of the hydrogen atom is about 1
–3.4 eV. The kinetic energy of the electron in this state is
a. -3.4 eV, b. 3.4 eV, c. 6.8eV , d. -6.8 eV
5. When a forward bias is applied to a p-n junction, it 1
(a) raises the potential barrier. (b) reduces the majority carrier current to zero.
(c) lowers the potential barrier. (d) None of the above
6. In an n-type silicon, which of the following statement is true: 1
184
 (a) Electrons are majority carriers and trivalent atoms are the dopants.
(b) Electrons are minority carriers and pentavalent atoms are the dopants.
(c) Holes are minority carriers and pentavalent atoms are the dopants.
(d) Holes are majority carriers and trivalent atoms are the dopants
7. Two wires each of radius of cross-section r but of different materials are 1
connected together end to end (in series). If the densities of charge carriers in
the two wires are in the ratio 1:4, the drift velocity of electrons in the two
wires will be in the ratio:

a. 1:2, b. 4:1, c. 2:1 , d.1:4

8 A coil having an area A 0 is placed in a magnetic field which changes from B0 to 4 B0 in 1

a time interval t. The e.m.f. induced in the coil will be
3 A0 B0 4 A0 B0 3 B0 4 B0
a. b. c. d.
t t A0 t A0 t
9 A convex lens has radii of curvature ,20 cm each, if the refractive index of material 1
is 1.5 , The power of lens is

a. 2 D, b. 5D, c. infinity, D. 2.5 D

10 In half-wave rectification, what is the output frequency if the input frequency is 50 1
Hz. What is the output frequency of a full-wave rectifier for the same input
frequency.
a. 50Hz, b. 100Hz, c. 150Hz, d. 25Hz
11 1. The voltage across a pure inductor is represented by the following diagram. 1
Which one of the following diagrams will represent the current V

i i
i
i
(a) (b) (c) (d)
t t
t
t

12 An alpha particle is diverted towards west is deflected towards north by a field. The 1
field is magnetic. What will be the direction of field?
a. Towards south, b. towards east, c. downward, d. upward

13 For a metal having a work function W0, the threshold wavelength is λ. What is the 1
threshold wavelength for the metal having work function 2W0?

a. λ/4, b. λ/2, c. 2λ, d. 4λ

185
14 Calculate the mass defect for a 37Cl atom for which the actual mass is 36.966 1
amu.
Given mp= 1.00727 u, mN= 1.00783u
(a) 0.3141 amu, (b) 0.388 amu, (c) 0.623 amu, (d) 0.264 amu
15 The stopping potential V0 for photoelectric emission from a metal surface is plotted 1
along with the y-axis and frequency v of incident light along the x-axis. A straight
line is obtained as shown. Planck’s constant is given by
a. product of the slope of the line
and charge on the electron
b. intercept along y-axis divided by
the charge on the electron
c. product of the intercept along x-
axis and mass of the electron
d. the slope of the line

(for Questions 16-18)

Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled Reason (R).
Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given
below.
(A) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
(B) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
(C) A is true but R is false
(D) A is false and R is also false

16. Assertion: The drift velocity of electrons in a metallic wire will decrease, if the 1
temperature of the wire is increased.
Reason: On increasing temperature, conductivity of metallic wire decreases.
17. Assertion :The refractive index of a prism depends only on the kind of glass of 1
which it is made of and the colour of light
Reason :The refractive index of a prism depends upon the refracting angle of the
prism and the angle of minimum deviation
18. Assertion :The positively charged nucleus of an atom has a radius of almost 10 −15 m . 1
Reason: In -particle scattering experiment, the distance of closest approach for -
particles is ≃ 10 −15 m .
Section B
19 What is a wave front? What is the geometrical shape of wave front of light 2
emerging out of a convex lens? When a point source is placed at its focus.
20 What will be equipotential surfaces corresponding (i) A constant E-field along in Z- 2
direction.(ii) if the field uniformly increased in magnitude but its direction remains
unchanged along Z-direction.
186
21 A current is flowing in a circular coil of radius ‘r’ and magnetic field at its 2
center is B0. At what distance from the center on the axis of the coil, the
magnetic field will be B0/8?
22 How is an n-type semiconductor formed? Name the majority carriers in it. 2
Draw the energy band diagram of a n-type semiconductor.
23 Red light, however bright, cannot cause emission of electrons from a clean 2
zinc surface. But, even weak ultraviolet radiations can do so. Why?
24 What is rectification? Draw circuit diagram of P-N –Junction as half wave rectifier.. 2
25 A proton and an alpha particle are accelerated through the same potential. Which 2
one of the two has
(i) greater value of de-Broglie wavelength associated with it, and
(ii) less kinetic energy? Justify your answers.
Section C
26 (i) Plot a graph showing the variation of conductivity σ with the temperature T 3
in a metallic conductor.
(ii) How does the drift velocity of electrons in a metallic conductor vary with
increase in temperature?
(iii) if E=3і +4ϳ -5к calculate the electric flux through a surface of area 50
units in z-x plane.
27 Define the terms threshold frequency and stopping potential in relation to the 3
phenomenon of the photoelectric effect. How is the photoelectric current affected
on increasing the
(i) frequency and
(ii) the intensity of the incident radiations and why?
28 (i) A converging lens of refractive index 1.5 is kept in a liquid medium 3
having same refractive index. What would be the focal length of the lens
in this medium?
(ii) How does the power of a convex lens vary, if the incident red light is
replaced by violet light?
(iii) Calculate the speed of light in a medium whose critical angle is 30°.
29 An AC- generator consists of a coil of 50 turns and an area of 2.5m2 rotating at an 3
angular speed of 60 rad/s in a uniform magnetic field of B= 0.3T between two fixed
pole pieces. The resistance of the circuit including that of the coil is 500Ώ
(i) What is the maximum current drawn from the generator?
(ii)What is the flux through the coil when current is zero?
(iii) What is the flux when current is maximum?
30 A cell of emf ‘E’ and internal resistance ‘r’ is connected across a variable load 3
resistor R. Draw the plots of the terminal voltage V versus (i) R and (ii) the current l.
It is found that when R = 4 Ω the current is 1 A and when R is increased to 9 Ω, the
current reduces to 0.5 A. Find the values of the emf E and internal resistance r.
Section D
31 State Gauss theorem. Derive an expression for electric field due to a long straight 5
Wire of infinite length. Draw graph between electric field and distance.
OR

187
 (i) A cube with each side a is kept in electric field given by E = Cx as shown in the
figure where C is a positive dimensional constant. Find
(a) The electric flux through the cube, and
(b) The net charge inside the cube
(ii) An electric dipole of dipole moment 2x10-6 C m is enclosed by a closed surface.
What is the flux passing out of the surface?
32 (a)An A.C source of voltage V= VmSinωt is connected one-by-one to three circuit 5
elements X, Y and Z. It is observed that the current flowing in them
i). is in phase with applied voltage for X
ii). Lags applied voltage in phase by π /2 for elements Y.
iii). Leads the applied voltage in phase by π /2 for element Z.
Identify the three circuit elements
(b) For a given alternating current, 𝐼 = 𝐼0 sin 𝜔𝑡, Show that the average power
dissipated in a resistor 𝑅 over a complete cycle is 1/2 𝐼2𝑅.
OR
(a) A series LCR circuit is connected to an a.c. source of variable frequency. Draw a
suitable phasor diagram to deduce the expressions for the amplitude of the current
and phase angle.
(b) A sinusoidal emf E=200 sin 314t is applied to a resistor of 10 Ω resistance,
calculate
(i) rms value of voltage
(ii) rms value of current

33 A point-object is placed on the principle axis of a convex spherical surface of radius 5

of curvature R, which separates the two media of refractive indices n1 and n2
(n2>n1).Draw the ray diagram and deduce the relation between the distance of the
object (u),distance of the image (v) and the radius of curvature(R) for refraction to
take place at the convex spherical surface from rarer to denser medium.
(a) Use the above relation to obtain the condition on the position of the object
and the radius of curvature in terms of n1 and n2 when the real image is
formed .

OR
(a) Draw a labeled ray diagram showing the formation of image by a compound
microscope in normal adjustment. Derive the expression for its magnifying
power.

(b) How does the magnifying power of a microscope change when the focal
length of the objective lens and eye piece is decreased,

Section E
34 Case Study : 4
INTERFERENCE OF LIGHT

188
 • The phenomenon of redistribution of light energy in the medium due
to superposition of two light waves (from coherent sources) is called
interference of light. It is based on conservation of energy.
• Condition for constructive interference: The phase difference
between the two interfering waves must be even multiple of π or path
difference between them is integral multiple of λ.
• Condition for destructive interference: The phase difference between
the two interfering waves must be odd multiple of π or path
difference between them is odd multiple of λ/2.

(A) . Which fundamental conservation law is obeyed by the interference of light?

(B) The intensity of light emerging from the two slits, in Young’s experiment is in
the ratio 1 : 4. Find the ratio of,the intensity of the minimum to that of the
consecutive maximum.
(C) In Young’s double slit experiment if the distance between the plane of slits
and the screen is doubled and the separation between the slits is reduced to
half, how does fringe width change?
OR
Write any two conditions for sustainable interference.
35 Case Study : 4
Moving coil galvanometer operates on Permanent Magnet Moving Coll (PMMC)
mechanism and was designed by the scientist Darsonval.Moving coil galvanometers
are of two types
(i) Suspended coll
(ii) Pivoted coil type or tangent galvanometer,Its working is based on the fact that
when a current carrying coil is placed in a magnetic field, it experiences a torque.
This torque tends to rotate the coil about its axis of suspension in such a way that
the magnetic flux passing through the coil is maximum.

(i)What is the principle of moving coil galvanometer?

(ii)How to increase the sensitivity of galvanometer?

189
(iii) A galvanometer has resistance of 10 ohms and a full scale deflection is
produced by 5 milli amperes. What is the value of resistance that should be
connected in series with it in order to enable it to read 2V?
OR
When 0.010A current flows through a moving coil galvanometer, it gives full
deflection. Then, it is converted into a voltmeter which gives a reading of 10 V using
an external resistance of 950 Ω. What is the resistance of the galvanometer (G)?

190
 KENDRIYA VIDYALAYA SANGATHAN REGIONAL OFFICE JAIPUR
MARKING SCHEME SAMPLE PAPER-2
CLASS : XII
SESSION : 2022-2023
PHYSICS 042 (THEORY)
Max. Marks : 70 Marks Max. Time Allowed : 3 Hrs

Q. NO. Answer
1 c
2 a
3 a
4 b
5 c
6 c
7 b
8 a
9 b
10 a
11 c
12 c
13 b
14 a
15 a
16 b
17 c
18 a
19 Wave front:-locus of all vibrating particles in same phase at same instant. 1
1

20 (i) (ii)
1
1

191
21 Formula ½
Correct Calculation 1
result x = √3r ½

22 N-Type ½
Majority charge carrier ½
Energy band diagram 1
23 E=hv or Energy of red light is smaller than UV radiation. 1
1
UV radiation has more frequency than Red Light
24 Definition ½
Diagram 1½

25 (i)P=√(2KEmq), wave length of proton :wavelength of alpha is 2√2:1 1

(ii)E=qV 1
26 (i)Graph 1
(ii) Correct cause 1
(iii)200 unit 1

27 Correct Explanation 1½
1½
Correct Explanation

28 (i) F=infinity 1
(ii) P-decreases 1
(iii) Correct Calculation 1

29 (i) 4.5A 1
(ii) 375Wb 1
(iii) zero 1
30 (i) Graphs 1 +1
(ii) Correct Calculation E=5V 1

31 Statement 1
Correct derivation 3
Graph 1
OR
(a) Flux 1½
(b) Charge 1½
(c) Correct Calculation and result 2
32 (a) (i)identify 1
(ii) identify 1
(iii) identify 1
2
192
 (b) Correct calculation and result with unit
OR
Derivation with help of phasor diagram 3
(i) Correct calculation and result 1
(ii) Correct calculation and result 1
33 (a)Correct diagram ½
Correct derivation 3
(b)correct explanation 1½
OR
(a)Correct diagram 1
Correct derivation 3
(b)increases (correct explanation) 1

34 (i)Conservation of energy 1
(ii)correct calculation (1:9) 1
(iii)4 times 2
OR
Any two conditions
35 (i)name of principle 1
(ii)increasing ways (any Two) 1
(iii)correct Calculation and result 2

193
194
 Class: XII SESSION : 2022-2023
CBSE SAMPLE QUESTION PAPER 3 (THEORY)

SUBJECT: PHYSICS

Maximum Marks: 70 Marks Time Allowed: 3 hours.

General Instructions:

(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory

(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D andSection E. All the
sections are compulsory.
(3) Section A contains eighteen MCQ of 1 mark each, Section B contains seven questionsof two marks each,
Section C contains five questions of three marks each, section D contains three long questions of five
marks each and Section E contains two case study based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in sectionB, C, D and E. You
have to attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
5. Use of calculators is not allowed.
SECTION A

Q. NO. MARKS
1 Number of electrons required to remove from a body to 1
build one coulomb charge will be
(a) 5.46 × 1029
(b) 6.25 × 1018
(c) 1.6 × 10+19
(d) 9 × 1011

2 A charge of 𝟐µ𝑪 is given a displacement of 1m. The work 1

done in the process is
10-6J. The potential difference between the two points will
be
(a)2𝑉
(b)0.25𝑉
(c)1𝑉
(d)0.5𝑉

195
3 The resistance of a 5m long wire is 10 . It is uniformly stretched so 1
that its length becomes 10m. The resistance of the wire is

(a) 160 
(b) 80 
(c) 40 
(d) 20 

4 A proton is projected with a uniform velocity v along the axis of a current 1

carrying solenoid, then
(a) the proton will be accelerated along the axis
(b) the proton path will be circular about the axis
(c) the proton moves along helical path
(d)the proton will continue to move with velocity v along the axis.

5 In the given figure current from A to B in the straight wire is increasing. 1

The direction of induced current in the loop is

(a) Clockwise
(b) anticlockwise
(c) changing
(d) nothing can be said
6 The frequency for which 1 Henry inductance offers same impedance as 1 1
μ F capacitor?
(a) 460 Hz
(b) 512 Hz
(c) 1 kHz
(d) 160 Hz

7 The radiations emitted by a human body lies under which region of EM 1

waves

(a) lies in UV region

(b) lie in IR region

(c) Visible region

(d) microwave region

196
8 A substance has critical angle 60° for green light, its refractive index is 1
(a) √2
(b) 1/√2
(c) 2/√3
(d) √3
9 The ratio of the widths of two slits in Young’s double slit experiment is 1
4: 1. The ratio of intensities at maxima and minima in the interference
pattern.
(a) 1:1
(b) 1:4
(c) 3:1
(d) 9:1

10. Threshold frequency for photoelectric effect on sodium corresponds to a 1

wavelength 500 nm. Its work function is
(a) 15 J
(b) 10 × 10–19 J
(c) 4 × 10–19 J
(d) 3.2 × 10–19 J
13.6
11. In the nth orbit, the energy of an electron 𝐸𝑛 = − 𝑒𝑉 for hydrogen atom. 1
𝑛2
The energy required to take the electron from first orbit to second orbit will
be
(a)10.2 𝑒𝑉
(b)12.1 𝑒𝑉
(c)13.6 𝑒𝑉
(d)3.4 𝑒𝑉
12. Two nuclei have mass numbers in the ratio 27: 125.The ratio of their 1
nuclear densities
(a) 3:5
(b) 5:3
(c) 1:1
(d) 27:125
13. The nuclear force is 1
(a) Charge dependent
(b) long range force
(c) Non-conservative force
(d) Obeys inverse square law

197
14 If NP and Ne be the number of holes and conduction electrons in p type 1
semiconductor, then
(a) NP  Ne
(b) NP = Ne
(c) NP  Ne
(d) NP<  Ne

15. The reverse biasing in a PN junction diode 1

(a) Decreases the potential barrier
(b) Increases the potential barrier
(c) Increases the number of minority charge carriers
(d) Increases the number of majority charge carriers

16 Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other 1
labelled Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions
from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d) as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false

ASSERTION(A):
The same amount of current flows through the filament and line wire.
But more heat is produced in filament.
REASON:
Filament is made of material having high resistance and high melting
point.
17 ASSERTION(A): 1
For best contrast between maxima and minima in the interference
pattern of Young’s double slit experiment, the intensity of light emerging
out of the two slits should be equal.
REASON:
The intensity becomes completely zero in minima in the interference
pattern.

18. ASSERTION(A): 1
The radius of the nucleus is directly proportional to atomic mass number
REASON:
The mass density of nucleus is directly proportional to atomic mass
number

198
 SECTION B

19. Derive the expression for the electric potential at any point along the 2
axial line of an electric dipole?

20. A conductor of length ‘l’ is connected to a dc source of potential ‘V’. If the 2

length of the conductor is tripled by gradually stretching it, keeping ‘V’
constant, how will (i) drift speed of electrons and (ii) resistance of the
conductor be affected? Justify your answer.
21. An inductor of unknown value, a capacitor of 100mF and a resistor of 10 2
ohm are connected in series to a 200 V, 50 Hz a.c. source. It is found that
the power factor of the circuit is unity. Calculate the inductance of the
inductor and the current amplitude.
22. The radii of curvature of the faces of a double convex lens are 10 cm and 2
15 cm. If focal length of the lens is 12 cm, find the refractive index of the
material of the lens.
23. Define the terms ‘threshold frequency’ and ‘stopping potential’ in the 2
study of photoelectric emission.
24. Using the curve for the binding energy per nucleon as a function of mass 2
number A, state clearly how the release in energy in the processes of
nuclear fission and nuclear fusion can be explained.
25. Write any two distinguishing features between conductors, 2
semiconductors and insulators on the basis of energy band diagrams.
SECTION C

26. Obtain the expression for the potential energy of an electric dipole of 3
dipole moment 𝑝 placed in an electric field 𝐸⃗ .
27. Distinguish between paramagnetic and diamagnetic substances. A 3
magnetizing field of 1500 A/m produces a flux of 2.4 X10-5 weber in a
bar of iron of cross-sectional area 0.5cm2. Calculate the permeability and
susceptibility of the iron-bar used.
28. In a Geiger– Marsden experiment, calculate the distance of closest
approach to the nucleus of Z =75, when an α-particle of 5 MeV energy
impinges on it before it comes momentarily to rest and reverses its
direction.
How will the distance of closest approach be affected when the kinetic
energy of the α-particle is doubled?
OR
The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is –13.6 eV. If an electron
makes a transition from an energy level – 0.85 eV to – 1.51 eV, calculate

199
 the wavelength of the spectral line emitted. To which series of hydrogen
spectrum does this wavelength belong?
29. With the help of a labelled circuit diagram explain the use of a p-n 3
junction diode as a full wave rectifier. Draw the input and output
waveforms.
30. The oscillating magnetic field in a plane electromagnetic wave is given
by
𝐵𝑦 = (8𝑋10−6 )𝑠𝑖𝑛⌊2𝑋1011 + 300𝜋𝑥⌋T
(i) Calculate the wavelength of the electromagnetic wave.
(ii) Write down the expression for the oscillating electric field.
(iii) Sketch a schematic diagram depicting electric and magnetic fields
for an electromagnetic wave propagating along the Z-direction.
31. (a) Using Gauss law, derive an expression for the electric field intensity
at any point outside a uniformly charged thin spherical shell of radius R
and charge density σ C/m2. Draw the field lines when the charge density
of the sphere is (i) positive, (ii) negative.
(b) A uniformly charged conducting sphere of 2.5 m in diameter has a
surface charge density of 100 µC/m2. Calculate the
(i) charge on the sphere (ii) total electric flux passing through the
sphere.
OR
(a) Derive an expression for the torque experienced by an electric
dipole kept in a uniformly electric field.
(b) Calculate the work done to dissociate the system of three charges
placed on the vertices of a triangle as shown. Here q =1.6X10-10C.

32. State the working principle of an AC generator with the help of a labelled 5
diagram. Derive an expression for the instantaneous value of the emf
induced in coil.
Why is the emf maximum when the plane of the armature is parallel to
the magnetic field?
OR
Draw a labelled diagram of a step-up transformer and explain briefly it’s
working.

200
 Deduce the expressions for the secondary voltage and secondary current
in terms of the number of turns of primary and secondary windings.
How is the power transmission and distribution over long distances
done with the use of transformers?
33. (i) A plane wave front approaches a plane surface separating two media.
If medium 'one’ is optically denser and medium 'two’ is optically rarer,
using Huygens’ principle, explain and show how a refracted wave front
is constructed.
(ii) Hence verify Snell's law.
(iii) When a light wave travels from rarer to denser medium, the speed
decreases. Does it imply reduction its energy? Explain.
OR
(i) A ray of monochromatic light is incident on one of the faces of an
equilateral triangular prism of refracting angle A. Trace the path of ray
passing through the prism. Hence, derive an expression for the
refractive index of the material of the prism in terms of the angle
minimum deviation and its refracting angle.
(ii) Three light rays red (R), green (G) and blue (B) are incident on the
right-angled prism abc at face ab. The refractive indices of the material
of the prism for red, green and blue wavelengths are respectively 1.39,
1.44 and 1.47. Trace the paths of these rays reasoning out the difference
in their behavior.

SECTION-E

34. After the demonstration of Hans Christian Orsted in the year 1820 that 4
is, an electric current can turn aside a magnetized needle, the first
galvanometer was designed. This device was designed by physicist
Johann Schweigger & German mathematician and they named it a
multiplier. Basically, a galvanometer includes a needle, connected to a
coil so that the coil can move freely in a magnetic field. This field can be
created through one or more permanent magnet poles.
Once electricity is supplied throughout the coil in the meter, the
magnetic field will generate through the current-carrying wire that

201
 interacts by the permanent magnet field, so that it generates a twisting
force called torque.
(i) Write the principle of working of a galvanometer?
(ii) What is the need of radial magnetic field in a galvanometer?
(iii) How will you convert a galvanometer into desired range of
voltmeter.
OR
(iii) How can we increase the sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer.
35. Prismatic telescopes solve this problem by use of two prisms to invert 4
the image between the eye piece lens and the objective lens. The first
prism receives parallel rays from distant objects and reflects (total
internal reflection) rays on to another prism which totally internally
reflects rays back towards the eye piece. These rays are now viewed
through eye piece with a large magnification.
The structure of binoculars changes due to prisms. The objective and
eye piece are not aligned. There is a bulge in between them to
accommodate the prisms. Binoculars becomes a bit heavy but its length
is short as compared to a telescope.

(i) What is the need of prism in a binocular?

(ii) Which type of prism is used in binocular?
(iii) Write two conditions for total internal reflection
OR
(iii) Write any two applications of total internal reflection.

202
 SAMPLE QUESTION PAPER-3
MARKING SCHEME
Class: XII
SESSION: 2022-2023
SUBJECT: PHYSICS
Q.no Marks
SECTION A
1 b 1

2 d 1
3 c 1
4 d 1
5 a 1
6 d 1
7 b 1
8 c 1

9 d 1
10 c 1
11 a 1
12 c 1
13 c 1
14 a 1
15 b 1
16 a 1
17 a 1
18 c 1
SECTION B
19 Diagram For the axial line for dipole. ½
Formula for electric potential for a point charge. ½
Net electric potential for positive and negative charge
Final formula ½
½
20 Formula for drift velocity and potential ½
Drift velocity becomes 1/3 ½
Formula for resistance dependence of ½
length ½
Resistance becomes 9 times.
21 For power factor unity, XL = XC ½
1
𝐿 = 𝜔2𝐶=0.10H ½

𝑉0 ½
𝐼0 = At resonance, Z = R 𝐼0 = 28.3𝐴 ½
𝑍

203
22 Lens makers formula ½

Value put with proper sign ½+½

n=1.5
½
23 Definitions 1+1

24. Binding energy curve 1

Explanation Nuclear fusion ½
Explanation Nuclear fission ½

25. Two differences of semiconductors, insulators and conductors 1+1

Section C
26. Diagram of electric dipole in electric field 1
Formula of work done and put value 1
Proper calculation and formula U = - 𝑝. 𝐸⃗ 1

27. Any one difference 1

Formula and calculation of permeability µ= 3.2 X10-4Wb/Am 1
Formula and susceptibility =254 1

28. Formula for distance of closest approach ½

Put values 1
Distance of closest approach = 2.8X10-14m ½
KE becomes half.
½
1
OR
n1= 4 ½

n2= 2 ½
Rydberg formula
½

Put values of n1= 4 n2= 2

½
Wavelength = 4862 Å
1
29. Diagram of full wave rectifier 1

Working 1

Input and output waveform ½+½

204
 1
30. Formula and calculation of wavelength λ=150 𝑚 1
1
𝐸𝑧 = −(2.4𝑋103 )𝑠𝑖𝑛⌊2𝑋1011 + 300𝜋𝑥⌋ V/m 1
Diagram with proper labelling
31. Diagram ½
1
Derivation ½
½
(i) Field lines for positive
(ii) Field lines for negative charge 1
1
(i) charge on the sphere q=1.96mC
(ii) total electric flux passing through the sphere
1
=2.21X108Nm2/C
2
OR
Diagram 2
Work done
Work done to dissociate the charges=2.3X10-8J
32. Diagram of AC generator 1
1
Working Principle 2

expression for the instantaneous value of the emf induced in 1

coil.
the emf maximum when the plane of the armature is parallel to
1
the magnetic field. 1
2
1
OR
Diagram of transformer
Working
Expression for emf
The power transmission and distribution over long distances
done with the use of transformers

33. (i)Ray diagram to show proper refracted wave front 2

construction. 2
1
(ii) Proof of Snell’s Law.

205
 (iii) No change in energy, as no change of frequency. 1
2

2
OR

(i) Ray diagram of prism

Derivation of formula
(II) Only red ray will be transmitted; Blue and Green rays will
be totally reflected. (Justification)

34. (i) Working Principle of galvanometer 1

1
(ii) To keep magnetic field and area vector normal at each 2
position of the coil.
(iii) To connect a high resistance of suitable value in series with
galvanometer. 2

OR
(iii) By increasing no of turns, magnetic field strength of
permanent magnet, to decrease torsional rigidity of wire.
35. (i) To erect the inverted image formed by an ordinary telescope. 1
1
(ii) Triangular right-angled prism. 2

(iii)Two conditions of TIR

2
OR
(iii) Any two applications

206
 SAMPLE QUESTION PAPER – 4
KVS RO JAIPUR
SUBJECT: PHYSICS (THEORY)
CLASS - XII
Maximum Marks: 70 Marks Time Allowed: 3 hours.

General Instructions:
(1) There are 35 questions in all. All questions are compulsory
(2) This question paper has five sections: Section A, Section B, Section C, Section D and Section E. All the sections are
compulsory.
(3) Section A contains 18 MCQ of 1 mark each, Section B contains 7 questions of two marks each, Section C contains 5
questions of three marks each, section D contains 3 long questions of five marks each and Section E contains 2 case
study based questions of 4 marks each.
(4) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section B, C, D and E. You have to
attempt only one of the choices in such questions.
(5) Use of calculators is not allowed.

SECTION A

Q. NO MARKS
1 A soap bubble is given a negative charge, then its radius 1
(a) Decreases (b)Increases
(c) Remains unchanged (d) Nothing can be predicted as information is insufficient
2 A hollow metal sphere of radius 5cm is charged such that the potential on its surface is 10V. 1
The potential at a distance of 2cm from the centre of the sphere
(a) Zero (b) 10 V
(c) 4 V (d) 10/3 V
3 The resistance of a wire is 20 ohms. It is so stretched that the length becomes three times, 1
then the new resistance of the wire will be
(a) 6.67 ohms (b) 60.0 ohms
(c) 120 ohms (d) 180.0 ohms

4 A long copper tube of inner radius R carries a current i. The magnetic field B inside the tube 1
is
0i 0i
(a) (b)
2R 4 R
0i
(c) (d) Zero
2R

207
5 Two light sources are said to be coherent when both the sources of light emit light of 1
(a) The same wavelength and constant phase difference (b)The same intensity and
wavelength
(c)The same speed (d)The same amplitude and phase
6 The current flowing in a coil of self inductance 0.4 mH is increased by 250 mA in 0.1 sec. The 1
e.m.f. induced will be
(a) + 1 V (b) – 1 V
(c) + 1 mV (d) – 1 mV
7  1
If a current I given by I0 sin   t −  flows in an ac circuit across which an ac potential of
 2
E = E0 sin  t has been applied, then the power consumption P in the circuit will be
E0 I0
(a) P = (b) P = 2 E0 I0
2
E0 I0
(c) P= (d) P = 0
2
8 A coil has L = 0.04 H and R = 12  . When it is connected to 220V, 50Hz supply the current 1
flowing through the coil, in amperes is
(a) 10.7 (b) 11.7
(c) 14.7 (d) 12.7
9 By a monochromatic wave, we mean 1
(a)A single ray (b)A single ray of a single colour
(c) Wave having a single wavelength (d)Many rays of a single colour
10 A p-type semiconductor is 1

(a) Uncharged (b)Negatively charged

(c) Positively charged (d)None of the above
11 The ratio of the energies of the hydrogen atom in its first to second excited state is 1

(a) 1/ 4 (b) 4/9

(c) 9/ 4 (d) 4
12 The neutron was discovered by 1
(a) Marie Curie (b) Pierre Curie
(c) James Chadwick (d) Rutherford
13 The temperature coefficient of resistance of a semiconductor 1
(a) Is always positive (b)Is always negative
(c) Is zero (d)May be positive or negative or zero
14 In electromagnetic induction, the induced current in a coil is dependent of 1
(a) Change in the flux (b) Time
(c) Resistance in the circuit (d) All of the above
15 Electromagnetic waves are produced by 1

208
 (a)A static charge (b) An accelerated charge
(c)A moving charge (d) Charged particles
For Q.16 to 18 Two statements are given-one labelled Assertion (A) and the other labelled
Reason (R). Select the correct answer to these questions from the codes (a), (b), (c) and (d)
as given below.
a) Both A and R are true and R is the correct explanation of A
b) Both A and R are true and R is NOT the correct explanation of A
c) A is true but R is false
d) A is false and R is also false
16 Assertion : No interference pattern is detected when two coherent sources are 1
infinitely close to each other.
Reason : The fringe width is inversely proportional to the distance between the two
slits.

17 Assertion : Mass of moving photon varies inversely as the wavelength. 1

Reason : Energy of the particle = Mass  (Speed of light)2
18 Assertion : When the Temperature of a semiconductor is increased, the its resistance 1
decreases Reason : The energy gap between valence band and conduction band is very
small for semiconductors.

SECTION B

19 In the circuit, assuming point A to be at zero potential, use Kirchhoff’s rules to determine the 2
potential at point B.

20 Identify and name the part of electromagnetic spectrum to which these radiation belong. 2
(i), are used to treat muscular strain.
(ii), are used by a FM radio station for broadcasting.
21 2
Obtain the expression for the ratio of de-Broglie wavelengths associated with the
electron orbiting in the second and third excited states of hydrogen atom.
OR
When a slow neutron is captured by a U 235nucleus, a fission results in the release of 200 MeV
energy. If the output of nuclear reactor is 1.6 MW then find the number of fission per second
of the nuclei.
22 The radii of curvature of the faces of a double convex lens are 10 cm and 15 cm. If the focal 2
length if the lens is 12 cm find the refractive index of the material of lens.

209
23 Using Huygen’s principle draw a diagram to show how a plane wave front incident at the 2
interface of the two media gets refracted when it propagates from a rarer to a denser
medium. Hence verify Snell’s law of refraction.
24 A current of 5.0 A flows through each of two parallel long wires. The wires are 2.5 cm 2
apart. Calculate the force acting per unit length of each wire. What will be the nature
of the force, if both currents flow in the same direction?
25 Find the current through the resistance R as shown in the given fig. 2
when R = 10 ohm .

SECTION C

26 State Biot – Savart law. Using this law, find expression for the magnetic field at a point on 3
the axis of a circular current carrying coil.
27 Define mutual inductance. A pair of adjacent coils has a mutual inductance of 1.5 H. If the 3
current in one coil changes from 0 to 20 A in 0.5 s, what is the change of flux linkage with
the other coil?
OR
A resistor of 200 ohm and a capacitor of 15 µF are connected in series to a 220 V, 50 Hz ac
source. Calculate the current in the circuit and rms voltage across the resistor and the capacitor.
Is the algebraic sum of these voltages more than the source voltage? If yes, resolve the paradox
28 Draw properly labelled graphs to show the following concerning photo electric emission: 3
(i) Variation of photo electric current with the intensity of incident radiation.
(ii) Variation of photo electric current with accelerating and stopping potential.
(iii) Variation of stopping potential with frequency of incident radiation.
29 Derive the lens maker’s formula for a thin biconvex lens. 3
OR
Explain diffraction due to single slit . derive relation for the linear width of central maxima.
30 Explain with the help of diagrams, the forward and reverse biasing of a pn junction diode. 3
Also draw their characteristic curves.

SECTION D

31 (a) State gauss’s theorem and derive the expression for electric field due to uniformly charged 5
infinite plane sheet.
(b) Three point charges of + 2 μC, − 3 μC and − 3μC are kept at the vertices A, B and C
respectively of an equilateral triangle of side 20 cm. What should be the sign and magnitude of

210
 the charge to be placed at the mid-point (M) of side BC so that the charge at A remains in
equilibrium?
OR
(a) A Parallel plate capacitor each with plate area A and separation ‘d’ is charged to a potential
difference V. The battery used to charge it is then disconnected. A dielectric slab of
thickness d and dielectric constant K is now placed between the plates. What change if any,
will take place in
(i) Charge on the plates
(ii) Electric field intensity between the plates,
(iii) Capacitance of the capacitor
Justify your answer in each case
(b) Calculate the voltage needed to balance an oil drop carrying 10 electrons when between the
plates of a capacitor which are 5mm apart (g=10 ms-2). The mass of oil drop is 3 x 10-16 kg.
32 Define the term drift velocity. 5
On the basis of electron drift derive an expression for resistivity of a conductor in terms of
number density of free electrons and relaxation time.
On what factors does resistivity of a conductor depend on.
OR
(a) Two cells of emf E1 and E2 are and internal resistances r1 and r2 respectively are
connected in parallel. Obtain expressions for the equivalent emf and internal effective
resistance of the parallel combination .
(b) When a cell is connected directly across a high resistance voltmeter the reading
is 1.50 V. When the cell is shorted through a low resistance ammeter the
current is 2.5 A. What is the emf and internal resistance of the cell?
33 (a)Draw the ray diagram of an compound microscope, when the final image is formed at the 5
least distance of distinct vision. Write the formula for magnifying power in the above noted
case.
(b)A compound microscope uses an objective lens of focal length 4 cm and eye piece lens of
focal length 10 cm. An object is placed at 6 cm from the objective lens. Calculate the
magnifying power of the compound microscope. Also calculate the length of microscope
OR
(a) Draw a neat labelled ray diagram of an astronomical telescope in normal adjustment.
Explain briefly its working. An astronomical telescope uses two lenses of powers 10 D and 1 D.
What is its magnifying power in normal adjustment?
(b) Write any three differences between reflecting type and refracting type telescope

SECTION E

34 A magnet is a material or object that produces a magnetic field. This magnetic field is
invisible but is responsible for the most notable property of a magnet: a force that pulls on
other ferromagnetic materials, such as iron, steel, nickel, cobalt, etc. and attracts or repels
other magnets. A permanent magnet is an object made from a material that is magnetized
and creates its own persistent magnetic field. An everyday example is a refrigerator magnet
used to hold notes on a refrigerator door. Materials that can be magnetized, which are also
the ones that are strongly attracted to a magnet, are called ferromagnetic (or ferrimagnetic).
The resemblance of magnetic field lines for a bar magnet and a solenoid suggest that a bar
magnet may be thought of as a large number of circulating currents in analogy with a
211
 solenoid. Cutting a bar magnet in half is like cutting a solenoid. We get two smaller
solenoids with weaker magnetic properties. The field lines remain continuous, emerging
from one face of the solenoid and entering into the other face. One can test this analogy by
moving a small compass needle in the neighbourhood of a bar magnet and a current-
carrying finite solenoid and noting that the deflections of the needle is similar in both cases.
(i) What happens if a bar magnet is cut into two pieces: (i) transverse to its length, (ii) along 1
its length?
(ii) A magnetised needle in a uniform magnetic field experiences a torque but no net force. 1+1
An iron nail near a bar magnet, however, experiences a force of attraction in addition to a
torque. Why?
(iii) Must every magnetic configuration have a north pole and a south pole? 1
35 Read the following paragraph and answers the
questions:
Spectral emission occurs when an electron transitions, or
jumps, from a higher energy state to a lower energy state.
To distinguish the two states, the lower energy state is
commonly designated as n1, and the higher energy state is
designated as n2. The energy of an emitted photon
corresponds to the energy difference between the two
states. Because the energy of each state is fixed, the energy
difference between them is fixed, and the transition will
always produce a photon with the same energy 1
(i). In which region of hydrogen spectrum of Lyman series lie .? 1
(ii). What is the total energy of electron correspond to second excited state in hydrogen 1+1
atom.?
(iii). The radius of innermost electron orbit of a hydrogen atom is 5.3 × 10-11 m. what is the
radius of orbit in the second excited state?
OR 1
Find the ratio of photons produced due to transition of an electron of hydrogen atom by its 1
(a)Second permitted energy level to the first level and
(b)The highest permitted energy level to the first permitted level.

212
 MARKING SCHEME SAMPLE PAPER -4
CLASS – XII
SUBJECT – PHYSICS

Q. MARK
NO S
.
SECTION A
1 b 1
2 b 1
3 d 1
4 d 1
5 a 1
6 d 1
7 d 1
8 d 1
9 c 1
10 a 1
11 c 1
12 c 1
13 b 1
14 d 1
15 b 1
16 b 1
17 b 1
18 a 1
SECTION B
19 From the loop BDCR1B, 2
we get 2x2+3R1=4 , R1=0
Vb=Vc=2-Va=2-0=2V
20 i). Infrared radiation. 2
ii).VHF/Radio waves.
21 2
For De-Broglie wavelength 2πrn = n λn
λn=2πrn / n , And rn = n2 r1 , λ3/λ4 =¾
OR
Output power = 1.6 MW = 1.6x106 J/s
Energy released/fission = 200MeV = 200 ×1.6 x 10 -13 J
No. of fission required/sec = 1.6 x106 / 200 x 1.6 x 10 -13 = 5 x10 16
22 By lens maker’s formula 2

1 1 1
= (𝑛 − 1) (10 − −15)
12
1 1
= (𝑛 − 1) (6)
12
After simplification n = 1.5

23 Correct explanation 2
213
24 F = µ0i1i2 /2 π R= 2x10-4Nm-1. 2
Force is attractive
25 Due to 6V battery the pn junction becomes reverse biased (Its potential is higher than 4V battery). 2
From the remaining circuit as per kirchoff’s law
4+6 = I (R+10)
When R=10 then I = 0.5A

SECTION C
26 Correct derivation 3
27 Mutual inductance is numerically equal to the magnetic flux linked with a coil when the unit 3
current passes through the neighbouring coil.
Given M = 1.5 H,
dl = 20 – 0 = 20 A, dt = 0.5 s,
Φ = ? Φ = – Mdl/dt
or Φ = – 1.5 × 20/0.5 = – 60 Wb
OR
Given R= 200 ohm , C= 15 ×10-6 F , V=220 V, f=50 Hz
Capacitive reactance, XC = 1/ (2 ×3.14 ×50 × 15 ×10-6 ) = 212 ohm
Impedance of circuit, Z= [R2 + XC 2 ] 1/2 = [(200)2 + (212) 2 ] 1/2 = 291.5 ohm
Irms = Vrms /Z = 220/ 291.5 = 0.75 A
Voltage across resistance, VR = IR = 200 × 0.75= 150 V
Voltage across capacitor, VC = IXC = 212 × 0.75= 159 V
Algebraic sum of VR and VC = VR+ VC = 150+159= 309 V > 212 V
This is because these voltage are not in same phase but VC lags behind VR by an angle 𝝅/2
So V= [VR 2 + VC 2 ] 1/2 = [(150) 2 + (159) 2 ] 1/2 =220 V
28 Correct graph 3
29 Correct derivation 3
OR
Correct explanation and formula
30 Correct diagram and curve 3
SECTION D
31 (a) state and corret derivation 2
(b) use principle of superposition) Force exerted on + 2μC charge by the charge at B,

along AB
Force exerted on + 2μC charge by charge at C,

along AC
The resultant force of F1 and F2 is:

For the equilibrium of charge at A, the charge q placed at point M must be a positive charge so that it
exerts force along MA. Force between charges at A and M
214
 3

OR
(a)
𝜀 𝐴
Initial capacitance 𝐶0 = 0𝑑 , Potential difference = V 1
𝜀0 𝐴
(i)Initial charge 𝑞0 = 𝐶0 𝑉 = 𝑑
V
:. When battery is disconnected the the charge on the capacitor remains unchanged and equal to 𝑞 = 1
𝜀 𝐴
𝑞0 = 0𝑑 V
𝜎 𝑞/𝐴 𝑞
(ii)Initial electric field between the plates, 𝐸0 = 𝜀 = = 𝐴𝜀
0 𝜀0 0 1
After introduction of dielectric; the permittivity of medium become 𝐾𝜀0 ;
𝑞 𝐸
So final electric field between the plates , 𝐸 = = 0 i.e electric field reduces to 1/K times .
𝐴𝐾𝜀0 𝐾
1
(iii)After introduction of dielectric, the capacitance becomes 𝐾𝐶0
1
(b)
Q=ne
also E=v/d
voltage = 9.37 V
32 Correct definition 5
Correct explanation
OR
(a) Correct derivation
(b) E = 1.5 V
E = I r so 1.5 V = 2.5 A r and r = 0.6 

33 5

215
 L  D
a)Magnifying power, M= − 1 + 
fo  fe 

216
OR

Explanati
on
Calculation of magnifying power:

Given: Power of eyepiece = 10 D

Power of objective = 1 D

Magnifying power in normal adjustment

: m = fo/fe =Pe/Po =10/1 = 10
Reflecting Type Refracting Type
The objective is a parabolic mirrored The objective is achromatic converging lens
It is free from chromatic and spherical It suffers from chromatic and spherical aberrations
aberrations
The light gathering power is very large The light gathering power is small, so a faint image
and hence a bright image of a distant of the distant star is observed
star is easily observed.
217
 SECTION E
34 (i)In either case, one gets two magnets, each with a north and south pole. 1
(ii)No force if the field is uniform. The iron nail experiences a non-uniform field due to the bar magnet.
There is induced magnetic moment in the nail, therefore, it experiences both force and torque. The 1+1
net force is attractive because the induced south pole (say) in the nail is closer to the north pole of
magnet than induced north pole.
(iii)Not necessarily. True only if the source of the field has a net non-zero magnetic moment. 1
35 (i) ultraviolet region 1
(ii) -1.51 eV 1
(iii) r = 32 ×r0 = 9×5.3× 10-11 , r = 4.77 × 10-11 m 1+1
OR
(a) Since, the second permitted energy level to the first level
Energy of photon released = E2 – E1 = (-3.4 eV) – (-13.6 eV) = 10.2 eV
1
(b) The highest permitted energy level to the first permitted level
1
=E∞ - E1 = - (13.6) = 13.6 eV
˳˚˳Ratio of energies of photon
= 10.2/13.6 = ¾ = 3:4

218
 SAMPLE QUESTION PAPER-5
SUBJECT:PHYSICS(THEORY)
MaximumMarks: 70Marks Time Allowed:3hours.

GeneralInstructions:
(6) There are35 questionsinall. Allquestionsarecompulsory
(7) Thisquestionpaperhasfivesections:SectionA,SectionB,SectionC,SectionD
and Section E. Allthesectionsarecompulsory.
(8) SectionAcontains18 MCQof1markeach,SectionBcontains7 questions of two
marks each, Section C contains 5 questions of three marks each, section Dcontains
3 long questions of five marks each and Section E contains 2 case studybased
questionsof 4markseach.
(9) There is no overall choice. However, an internal choice has been provided in section
B,C,DandE.Youhavetoattemptonlyoneofthechoicesin suchquestions.
(5)Useofcalculatorsisnotallowed.

SECTION: A
Q.NO. MARKS
1. An electric dipole placed in a non-uniform electric field can experience 1
(a) a force but not a torque (b) a torque but not a force
(c ) always a force and a torque (d) neither a force nor a torque
2. The drift velocity of the free electrons in a conducting wire carrying a current I is v.
If in a wire of the same metal, but of double the radius, the current 2I , then the drift
velocity of the electrons will be
(a) v/4 (b) v/2 (c ) v (d) 4v
3. An electron is released from rest in a region of uniform electric and magnetic fields
acting parallel to each other. The electron will
(a) move in a straight line (b) move in a circle
(c ) remain stationary (d ) move in a helical path
4. The sensitivity of a moving coil galvanometer increases with the decrease in:
(a) number of turns (b) area of coil
(c ) magnetic field (d) torsion conctant
5. The phase difference between the current and the voltage in series LCR circuit at
resonance is
(a) 𝜋 (b) π/2 (c ) π/3 (d) zero
6. If E and B represent electric and magnetic field vectors of the electromagnetic wave
, the direction of propagation of electromagnetic wave is along
(a) E (b) B (c ) B x E (d) E x B

219
7. For the glass prism , the angle of minimum deviation will be smallest for the light of
(a) Red colour (b) blue colour (c ) yellow colour (d) green colour
8. Which of the following is not due to total internal reflection?
(a) working of optical fibre
(b) Difference between apparent and real depth of a pond
(c) Mirage
(d) Brilliance of diamond
9. Two waves having the intensities in the ratio of 9 : 1 produce interference . The
ratio of maximum to minimum intensity is
(a) 10 : 8 (b) 9 : 1 (c ) 4: 1 (d) 2: 1
10. Yellow light is used in a single slit diffraction experiment with slit width of 0.6 mm.
If yellow light is replaced by X-rays, then the observed pattern will reveal
(a) The central maximum is narrower (b) more number of fringes
(c ) less number of fringes (d) no diffraction pattern
11. The work function of a metal is hc/𝝀0. If light of wavelength 𝝀 is incident on its
surface , then the essential condition for the electron to come out from the metal
surface is
(a) 𝝀≥ 𝝀0 (b) 𝝀≥ 2𝝀0 (c) 𝝀≤ 𝝀0 (d) 𝝀≤ 2𝝀0

12. In photoelectric effect the kinetic energy of electrons emitted from the metal surface
depends upon
(a) Intensity of light (b) Frequency of incident light
(c) velocity of incident light (d) both intensity and velocity of light
13. A proton , a neutron , an electron and an alpha particle have same energy. Then their
de-Broglie wavelength compare as
(a) λp= λn>λe> λα (b) λα<λp = λn>λe
(c ) λe<λp= λn> λα (d) λp= λn=λe= λα
14. When photons of energy hγ are incident on the surface of photosensitive
Material of work function h υ 0 then
(a) the K.E. of all emitted electron is hγ0
(b) kinetic energy of emitted electros is h(υ - υ 0)
(c) kinetic energy of the fastest electros is h(υ - υ 0)
(d) kinetic energy all of emitted electros is less than h υ0

15. Paschen series of atomic spectrum of hydrogen gas lies in

(a) Infrared region (b) Ultraviolet region
(c ) visible region (d) Partely in UV and partly in visible region
16. The size of the nucleus is proportional to
(a) A (b) A1/3 (c ) A2/3 (d) A5/3
17. The ratio of number of holes and number of conduction electrons in an intrinsic
semiconductor is
(a) 1 : 2 (b ) 1 : 1 (c)2:1 (d) 3 : 1

220
18. To obtain p-type silicon semiconductor, we need to dope pure silicon with:
(a) aluminium
(b) phosphorus
(c) oxygen
(d)germanium

SECTION: B
Q.NO. MARKS
19. A Potential difference V is applied across the ends of copper wire of length l and
diameter D. What is the effect on drift velocity of electron if
(i) V is halved
(ii) D is halved
Explain with reason.
20. The susceptibility of a magnetic material is – 2.6 x 10-5 . Identify the type of magnetic
material and state its two properties.
21. You are given following three lenses. Which two lenses will you use as an eyepiece
and as an objective to construct an astronomical telescope? Give reason.
Lenses Power (D) Aperture (cm)
L1 3 8
L2 6 1
L3 10 1
OR
A small telescope has an objective lens of focal length 150 cm and eyepiece of focal
length 5 cm. What is the magnifying power of the telescope for viewing distant
objects
22. A proton and an electron have same velocity. Which one has greater de-Broglie
wavelength and why?

23. Draw a graph showing the variation of binding energy per nucleon with mass number
for a large number of nuclei 2 < A <240 . What are the main inference from the
graph?
OR
Show that density of nuclear over a wide range of nuclei is independent of mass
number A.
24. The ground state energy of hydrogen atom is – 13.6 eV. What is the kinetic and
potential energies of the electron in the ground state.
25. Draw the energy band diagrams of an n-type and p-type semiconductor at temperature
T > 0 K.

SECTION: C
Q.No. MARKS
26. Derive an expression for the force acting on a current carrying

221
 conductorplaced in a uniform magnetic field. Write the condition for
which this force will have (1) maximum (2)mamumvalue.

27. Draw the intensity distribution for (i) the fringes produced in interference, and
(ii) the diffraction bands produced due to single slit. Write two points of
difference between the interference and diffraction.
28. Name the parts of the electromagnetic spectrum which is
(i) Suitable for radar systems used in aircraft navigation.
(ii) Used to treat muscular strain
(iii) Used as a diagnostic tool in medicine
Write in brief , how these waves can be produced.
29.
A hollow cylindrical box of length 1m and area of cross-section
25 cm2 is placed in a three-dimensionalcoordinatesystem as shown
in thefigure. The electricfield in the region is given by𝐸→=50𝑥𝑖, t
whereEis in NC–1 andxisinmetres.Find
(i)netfluxthroughthecylinder
(ii) charge enclosed by the cylinder

OR
Two thin concentric and coplanar spherical shells, of radii a and b (b> a) carry
charges , q and Q, respectively. Find the magnitude of the electric field, at a
point distant x, from their common centre for
(i) 0<x<a (ii) a ≤ x ≤ b (iii) b≤ x ≤∞

30. A semiconductor has equal electron and hole concentration of 2 x 108 per m3. On
doping with a certain impurity, the hole concentration increases to 4 x 1010 per
m3 .
(i) What type of semiconductor is obtained on doping?
(ii) Calculate the new electron and hole concentration of the
semiconductor.
(iii) How does the energy gap vary with doping?

SECTION: D
222
Q.No. MARKS
31. (a) Derive an expression for the capacitance of parallel plate capacitor having plate
area A, plate
separation d and having dielectric medium between the plates of dielectric constant k.
(b) A parallel plate capacitor by a battery. When the battery remains connected, a
dielectric slab is
inserted in the space between the plates. Explain what changes if any, occur in
the values of
(i) Potential difference between the plates
(ii) Electric field between the plate
(iii) Capacitance
(iv) Charge on the plates
(v) Energy stored in the capacitor

OR
(a) An electric dipole is held in a uniform electric field. (i) Using suitable diagram
show that it does not undergo any translator motion, and (ii) Derive an
expression for the torque acting on it and specify its direction
(b) For which orientation of the electric dipole placed in uniform electric field , it
is said to
(i) In stable equilibrium (ii) In unstable equilibrium
32. (a) Describe a simple activity to show that the polarity of emf induced in a coil
always such that it tends
to produce an induced current which opposes the changes of magnetic flux that
produces it.
(b ) The current flowing through an inductor of self-inductance L is continuously
increasing. Plot a graph
showing the variation of
(i) Magnetic flux versus the current
(ii) Induced emf versus dI/dt
(iii) Magnetic potential energy stored versus the current

OR
(a) An ac source of voltage V = V0sinwt is connected to a series combination of L,
C and R. Use the phasor diagram to obtain expression for impedance of the
circuit and phase angle between voltage and current. Find the condition when
current will be in phase with the voltage. What is the circuit in this condition
called?
(b) In a series LR circuit XL = R and power factor of the circuit is P1. When
capacitor with capacitance C such that XL = XC is put in series, the power factor
becomes P2. Calculate P1 / P2

223
 33. (a) Draw a ray diagram for formation of image of a point object by a thin double
convex lens having
radii of curvature R1 and R2. Hence derive lens maker’s formula for a double convex
lens.
(b ) A converging lens has a focal length of 20 m in air. It is made of a material of
refractive index 1.6. If
it is immersed in a liquid of refractive index 1.3, find its new focal length.
OR
(a) Draw the labelled ray diagram for the formation of image by a compound
microscope. Define its magnifying power and write its expression.
(b) Why both objective and eyepiece of a compound microscope must have shorter
focal length?

SECTION: E
Q.No. MARKS
34.
Motion of Charged Particle Inside Magnetic Field :A charged particle moving in a
magnetic field experiences a force that is proportional to the strength of the magnetic
field, the component of the velocity that is perpendicular to the magnetic field and the
charge of the particle. This force is given by ⃗𝑭 = 𝒒(𝒗
⃗ × ⃗𝑩
⃗ ) , where q is the electric
⃗⃗ is the magnetic
⃗ is the instantaneous velocity ofthe particle, and 𝑩
charge of the particle, 𝒗
field (in tesla).
The direction of force is determined by the rules of cross product of two vectors.
⃗ × ⃗𝑩
Force is perpendicular to both velocity and magnetic field. Its direction is same as𝒗 ⃗
⃗⃗ if q is negative.
⃗ ×𝑩
if q is positive and opposite of 𝒗
The force is always perpendicular to both the velocity of the particle and the magnetic
field that created it. Because the magnetic force is always perpendicular to the motion,
the magnetic field can do no work on an isolated charge. The direction of force on a
moving charge particle can also be found using Fleming’s Left Hand Rule as shown in
figure below.
(iv) In the expression F = q (V x B) , which two pairs of vectors are perpendicular
to each other.
(v) A beam of positively charged particles moving along +x axis, experience a
force in +y direction due to a magnetic field. What is the direction of magnetic
field ?
(vi) When is the charged particle moving in a uniform magnetic field experience

224
 maximum and minimum force?
OR
An electron does not suffer any deflection while passing through a region of
uniform magnetic field. What is the direction of the magnetic field?

35. Concept of Electric Field: Electric field is an elegant way of characterizing the
electrical environment of a system of charges. Electric field at a point in the space around
a system of charges tells you the force a unit positive test charge would experience if
placed at that point (without disturbing the system). Electric field is a characteristic of the
system of charges and is independent of the test charge that you place at a point to
determine the field.

(i) Define the term ‘Electric Field’

(ii) Give the formula for the Electric field.
(iii) Give the SI unit of Electric field. Is electric field is a vector or scalar quantity?
OR
An electron is placed in an electric field of strength 2 x 104 NC-1. Find the
force acting on the electron.

225
 MARKING SCHEME SAMPLE PAPER -5
CLASS: XII
SUBJECT: PHYSICS (THEORY)

Q.No. ANSWERS MARKS

1. c 1
2. b 1
3. a 1
4. d 1
5. d 1
6. d 1
7. a 1
8. b 1
9. c 1
10. d 1
11. b 1
12. b 1
13. b 1
14. c 1
15. a 1
16. d 1
17. a 1
18. b 1
19. (i) As vdαV , when V is halved the drift velocity halved 1
(ii) As vd is independent of D , so drift velocity remains unchanged 1
20. Diamagnetic 1
Any two properties 1
21. Objectiv: Lens L1 ½
Eyepiece : Lens L2 ½
Correct Reason 1
OR OR
m =fo / fe = 150/5 = 30 1 +1
22. As λ = h / mv, given v = constant so λ α 1/ m 1
As Mass of electron is less then proton so electron has greater de-Broglie 1
Wavelength
23. Correct Graph 1
Main Inference 1
OR OR
Correct derivation for independent of density of all nuclei on mass no A 2

24. KE = - Total energy and Potential Energy = - 2 x Total energy 1

So, KE = 13.6 eV ½
PE = -27.6 eV ½
25. Correct Energy ban diagram of n-type semiconductor 1

226
 Correct Energy ban diagram of p-type semiconductor 1
26. Correct derivation of force F = Il B sinθ 2
Maximum for when θ = 0o and 180o ½
Minimum Force When θ = 90o ½
27. Intensity distribution curve for Interference and 1
Intensity distribution curve for Diffraction 1
Any two difference 1

28. (i) Microwave (ii) Infrared (iii) X-rays 1/2 each

Microwaves produced by special vacuum tubes like klystrons, magnetrons ½
and Gunn diodes
Infrared are produced by the vibrating molecules and atoms in hot bodies ½
X-rays are produced by the bombardment of high energy electrons on a
metal target of high atomic weight. ½
29. (i) Net Electric flux through the cylinder = Flux through the left ½
Surface + Flux through the right surface ½
= 0.250 – 0.125 = 0.125 N m2 C-1 1
(ii) Charge inside the cylinder by gauss th. = 8.854 x 10-12 x 0.125 = 1
= 1.107 x 10-12C
OR OR
(i) For 0 < x <a the charge enclosed by the Gaussian surface is 1
Zero so E = 0 1
(ii) For a ≤ x ≤ b the net charged enclosedby the Gaussian surface is 1
q so E = q /4πεox2
(iii) For b≤ x ≤∞ the net charge enclosed by the Gaussian surface is
(q+ Q) so E = (q+Q)/4πεo x2

30. (i) p-type semiconductor ½

(ii) nenh = ni2, ne= ni2/ nh= 106 per m3 ½
New electron concentration = 106 per m3 1
Hole concentration = 4 x 106 per m3
(iii) energy gap decreases on doping
1
31. (a) Correct expression C = k εoA /d 2½
(b) (i) remain same ½
(ii) remain same ½
(iii) capacitance increases ½
(iv) charge increases ½
(v) energy increases ½
OR
(a)
(i) Suitable with explanation 2
2
(ii) Expression for torque
½
227
 (b) ( i ) for stable equilibrium θ = 0o ½
(ii) for unstable equilibrium θ = 180o

32. (a) Activity:

2

(b) (i) , (ii) and (iii)

OR
½
1
½
½
½
½
½
1

OR
(a) Phaser digram

Expression for impendence

Phase angle
Condition
Name of the circuit
(b) Case -I When XL = R, Z = 1.141R
Power factor P1 = 1 / 1.141
Case -II When XL = XC , Z = R
Power factor P2 = 1
Ratio P1/P2 = 1/1.141
33. (a) Ray diagram 1
Derivation of lens maker’s formula 2
228
 (c) F = 52 cm 2
(d) OR
2
OR
1
(a) Correct ray diagram
1
Definition of magnifying power 1
Expression for magnifying

(b) Correct reason

34. (i) F & V and F & B 1

(ii) along – z axis 1
(iii) Maximum force θ = 90o, Minimum force θ = 0o OR 180o 1+1
OR
OR 1
Magnetic field is parallel to the direction of motion of electron
35. (i) Correct definition of Electric field 1
(ii) Correct Formula for Electric field 1
(iii )SI unit NC-1 or Volt per meter 1+1
It is Vector quantity
OR OR
F = qE= 1.6 x 10-19 x 2 x 104 = 3.2 x 1015 N 2

229
230